Академический Документы
Профессиональный Документы
Культура Документы
UNIVERSITY INTERNATIONAL
CONFERENCE 2012
GLOBAL CHANGE
OPPORTUNITY&RISK
Content
ID
HSO41-1
HSO58-2
HSO65-3
HSO133-4
HSO61-5
HSO85-6
HSO179-7
HSO215-8
HSO216-9
HSO197-10
HSP24-1
HSP28-2
HSP30-3
HSP45-4
HSP46-5
Page I
Page
1
10
25
37
45
51
53
77
86
94
95
96
101
102
103
ID
HSP57-6
HSP62-7
HSP67-8
HSP83-9
HSP101-10
HSP103-11
HSP186-12
HSP187-13
HUO120-1
HUO56-2
HUO77-5
HUO27-7
HUO167-8
HUO52-10
HUO31-12
HUO108-13
Use of Fast Music during Speed Acceleration Training: Effects on 100metre Sprint
Prachaya Chomsahai
Association of Musculoskeletal Injuries between Prior and During the Training
Camp of Thai Rowing Athletes
Seekaow Churproong, Buratin Khampirat, Likit Matrakool, Preecha
Phuangphairote, Suriya Intra
Effects of Germinated Soybean on Serum Lipids in Rats
Wanpen Mesomya, Yaovadee Cuptapun, Duangchan Hengsawadi, Saruda
Lohana, Sompoch Yaieiam
The Immediate Effects of Manual Therapy on Pain Perception, Pressure
Pain Threshold, and Maximum Mouth Opening in Patients with
Temporomandibular Disorders: A Pilot Randomized Controlled Study
Thanchanok Niyomsirisap, Yodchai Boonprakob, Daraporn Sae-lee,
Teekayu P. Jorns
New record of Rickenella cf. fibula, mycenoid fungi from Thailand
(Agaricales, Basidiomycota)
Thitiya Boonpratuang and Rattaket Choeyklin
Simple Isolation of Human CD4+Lymphocytes using Monoclonal
Antibody-based Magnetic Particle
Surachai Suttawat, Panatda Sanrit, Sanita Singsanan, Niramon
Thamwiriyasati, Suticha Chunta
Pain Relief of Chili Roll-on in Chronic Musculoskeletal Pain
Sunantha Osiri, Supaporn Pitiporn, Somboon Vanichayobol, Pagakrong
Kwankhao, Natdanai Musigavong, Pinit Chinsoi, Lakkana Somprasong
The Effect of Eye-hand Coordination Training on Response Time in Table
Tennis Players
Surapon Chamroon, Sukit Pitakcharoen, Monton Thongroj
The effectiveness of the three common types of written corrective
feedback in improving grammatical accuracy
Arlan Parreo
Insider Trading Behavior and News Announcement:Evidence from the
Stock Exchange of Thailand
Weerawan Laoniramai
Motivations in Motorcycle Theft
Somboon Phongphu, Panya Srichandr
Globalization, Governance and The Role of The State
Syaifudin Zakir
Problem of Quality Management in Small and Medium Enterprises
Anil Kumar
Preparing Thai University Library Facilities and Services for ASEAN
Students from Neighboring Countries Qualitative Research of Cambodian
Students Perception
Kimcheang Hong, Samonya Thawinyarti, Suphapipat Wannasiri, Rana
Pongruengphant and Hermann Gruenwald
Investigation of Thai University Students' Attitudes towards Native/Nonnative Speakers of English
Watthana Suksiripakonchai
Security Resources Managements Perspective on Global Change
Suphanee Navakul
Page II
Page
104
105
106
107
108
112
113
119
121
133
140
147
156
162
168
177
ID
HUO105-15
HUO39-16
HUO84-19
HUO170-20
HUO98-21
HUO143-23
HUO192-26
HUO109-28
HUP64-1
HUP110-2
HUP112-3
HUP131-4
HUP149-5
HUP10-6
STO172-1
Page
185
196
200
207
217
223
234
243
253
259
266
272
278
299
305
ID
STO208-2
STO209-3
STO214-5
STO166-11
STO35-12
STO42-13
STO135-15
STO53-16
STO122-17
STO70-18
STO183-19
STO79-20
STO88-21
STO75-22
STO157-23
STO191-24
Page IV
Page
314
321
327
338
345
351
358
363
369
376
383
391
401
409
418
427
ID
STP6-2
STP29-5
STP49-9
STP51-10
STP55-12
STP60-13
STP68-14
STP74-15
STP78-17
STP81-18
STP86-20
STP95-22
STP111-28
STP116-29
Page V
Page
450
455
461
470
478
487
493
499
512
524
533
543
552
561
ID
STP119-31
STP123-32
STP124-33
STP127-35
STP128-36
STP136-38
STP144-40
STP150-41
STP159-45
STP184-50
STP189-52
STP204-58
STP217-62
STP218-63
Page VI
Page
568
577
587
595
605
615
624
631
641
651
657
663
671
679
HSO41-1
Page 1
Cancer is a chronic disease and is a major public health problem that threatens
human life, mainly due to the long-term treatment with associated serious side effects.
The treatments and their side effects have caused significant economic impact on human
resources and social development of countries (Cancer Research UK, 2007). The World
Health Organization (WHO) in 2006 has estimated, by the year of 2020, there will be
more than 11 million deaths from cancer throughout the world (World Health
Organization [WHO], 2007).
Cancer is the second cause of death after cardiovascular disease in the United
States. Cancer affects people at all ages with the risk for most types increasing with age
(Cancer Research UK, 2007). Cancer has caused about 13% of all human deaths in 2007
(World Health Organization, 2007; American Cancer Society, 2008). Each year 10.9
million people worldwide are diagnosed with cancer and there are 6.7 million deaths
from the disease. It is estimated that there are 24.6 million people alive who have
received a diagnosis of cancer in the last five years (Cancer Research UK, 2007; World
Health Organization, 2007).
In Thailand, the trend of cancer is increasing in line with other countries around
the world. According to statistics for 2007 from the Bureau of Policy and Strategies,
Ministry of Health found that the mortality rate of patients with cancer is growing every
year and the number one cause of death in Thailand since 2003. The National Cancer
Institute in 2008 also estimates that Thailand will have 120,000 new cancer patients and
will increase by another 50 percent in the next 10 years (National Cancer Institute, 2008).
The changes of physical symptoms that accompany cancer may cause the patients
to become weak in mind and body. This weakness and associated hopelessness of selfawareness might separate or isolate patients from the social environment. Both physical
and mental conditions are the factors that trigger mental illness; therefore it is important
to help patients, especially in terms of mental stimulation in order to fight the disease and
for pain management. For example, body massage and music therapy can be methods of
mental stimulation which help patients confront their illness and gain motivation
(Delbrck, 2007).
Many cancer patients use therapies promoted as literal alternatives to
conventional medical care. However, the alternative therapies are unproven or were
studied and found to be worthless, and even, in some circumstances, can be harmful
(Delbrck, 2007, Barrie & Deny, 2004). In addition, a greater proportion of cancer
patients use complementary therapies along with mainstream cancer treatments7. Most
are helpful adjunctive approaches that control phenomenon and magnify the quality of
life (Delbrck, 2007; Barrie & Deny, 2004).
Music therapy is an easy, inexpensive way to help cancer patients cope with the
emotional upset often caused by high-dose chemotherapy and autologous stem cell
transplantation8. Patients who were visited by a trained music therapist reported less
anxiety and better overall mood than patients who did not receive music therapy (Barrie
& Deny, 2004). According to Cassileth and his colleagues in 2003, 28% reduced anxiety
and 37% reduced disturbance 69 of cancer patients, when p value is equaled to 0.01
(Cassileth, Vickers, & Magill, 2003).
Physical exercise is important for maintaining physical fitness and can contribute
positively in maintaining a healthy weight, building bone density, muscle strength, joint
mobility, promoting physiological well-being, reducing surgical risks (Cohen &
Williamson, 1991).
Page 2
Page 3
Page 4
* p value < .05 (Ranging from .02 to .04) (between pre- and post-test using Mann-Whitney U
test)
p values A from Friedman test
p value B from Kruskal Wallis test (a, b Results with the same letter are not statistically different
(between groups))
In the 12th week, while compared all the treatments in pairs, we can observe that there is
no significantly different between control and music groups either as the music and music and
exercise groups (Table 3).
Table 3 Test of paired QOL differences of treatment after Kruskal Wallis test using
at week 12
Week 12
Pair of treatments
U
Z
p value
Control - music
8.00
1.28
.199
Control - exercise
2.50
2.29*
.022
Control M and E
1.00
2.35*
.019
Music - exercise
2.00
2.20*
.028
Music - M and E
0.50
2.34*
.019
Exercise - M and E
4.00
1.47
.142
U- test
Page 5
Control
Music
pre-test,
Exercise
M and E
Pair of week
(Comparison)
Pre-test week 4
2.20* .027
2.02* .043
2.02* .043
2.02*
.043
Pre-test week 8
2.20* .028
2.02* .043
2.02* .043
2.02*
.043
Pre-test week 12
2.20* .027
2.02* .043
2.02* .043
1.82*
.048
week 4 - week 8
2.03* .029
2.07* .048
1.34
.067
2.01*
.045
week 4 - week 12
2.05* .025
2.09* .042
2.04* .042
2.09*
.038
week 8 - week 12
1.23
1.34
2.05* .040
2.10*
.035
p value
.068
p value
.067
p value
p value
For the comparison of the study groups, the groups were divided into 4, which were the
control group, the music group, the exercise group and both the music and exercise group. The
results show the increase levels of the quality of life in 12 weeks. For the pre-test, each group
found the value of the quality of life in the range of 4.35 - 5.28. At week 8, the control group and
the music group present the mean value of the quality of life whereas the exercise group and both
music and exercise group also show the similar quality of life. At week 12, all sample groups
show, the mean the quality of life ranged from 7.62 - 9.14 (Figure 1). As mentioned above,
although the improvement was not observed in the first 8 weeks, the patients were more likely to
become accustomed to the treatments at the later weeks. These results show that the patients
appreciated more a positive attitude from their families and in their social life.
Figure 1 Level of the quality of life of each group at pre-test, 4, 8 and 12 week
Score
Time
Page 6
Subscales
(Group)
Psycho physiological
Control
Music
Exercise
Music & Exercise
Functional
Control
Music
Exercise
Music & Exercise
Social/ Spiritual
Control
Music
Exercise
Music & Exercise
Pre-test
Week 4
Week 8
Week 12
M (SD)
M (SD)
M (SD)
M (SD)
4.44 (0.58)
3.65 (0.53)
4.47 (0.57)
4.93 (1.67)
6.11 (1.26)
5.75 (0.94)
7.68 (1.53)
6.48 (0.92)
7.50 (0.79)
7.43 (0.86)
8.18 (0.95)
7.98 (1.35)
7.97 (0.47)
7.82 (0.67)
8.87 (0.75)
9.33 (0.41)
3.93 (0.76)
3.89 (0.91)
4.17 (0.62)
4.34 (0.68)
5.48 (1.28)
5.31 (0.35)
7.17 (1.53)
6.60 (0.61)
6.76 (1.36)
6.91 (0.97)
7.14 (1.23)
7.54 (1.40)
7.21 (1.02)
7.29 (0.92)
8.34 (0.62)
7.29 (1.42)
5.65 (0.57)
5.80 (0.45)
6.25 (0.70)
6.63 (0.80)
6.44 (0.14)
6.35 (0.72)
7.40 (0.27)
7.33 (0.82)
7.23 (0.62)
7.40 (0.18)
8.30 (0.94)
8.30 (0.42)
8.04 (0.38)
7.63 (0.35)
8.65 (0.75)
7.10 (4.03)
The results of this study indicate that music and exercise had a positive effect on the
quality of life and showed some encouraging trends with respect to health in cancer patients.
Because quality of life (psycho physiological, functional and social/ spiritual) are ultimate goals
in the rehabilitation and recovery of cancer patients, the practice of music and exercise program
could provide an effective means for approaching these goals.
DISCUSSION
The scale and results of the T-HQOLI would reflect and document the efficiency of the
traditional medication and well-being of the patients. In addition, the results also would reflect
the patients response to the treatment during each visit and if there was any need for
improvement upon patients request and suggestions. The results of the T-HQOLI were collected
for reference to compare with the later survey and the participants in the experimental group
divided into music or exercise groups based on the first T-HQOLI results.
An effect of music on QOL
We can observe that the participants in this study had a better quality of life, since the
score was improved significantly. Recent studies indicated that the quality of life of the patients
receiving music therapy was higher and the quality of life was improved compared from the
Page 7
Page 8
cancer-idUSTRE77E5OT20110815
Schwartz, A. L., Mori, M., and Gao, R. 2001. Exercise reduces daily fatigue in women with
breast cancer receiving chemotherapy. Medicine & Science in Sports & Exercise, 33,
718-723.
Stanford Hospital and Clinics. Music in Patient Rooms. 2011. [cited 2010 May 15];
Available from:
http://stanfordhospital.org/forPatients/patientServices/musicprogram/patientrooms.html
World Health Organization Cancer News Report. 2007. [cited 2009 April 18]; Available
from: http://www.who.int/mediacentre/news/releases/2006/pr06/en/index.html
Page 9
HSO58-2
Page 10
Fig. 1. Phases of running cycles, based on event of a single lower-limb (Hunter et al.,
2008).
The stance phase serves to absorb impact forces and maintain forward momentum and to
support the bodys weight. The late stance functions to accelerate the body forward and upward
by an increase in the limb length. The swing is the enhancement of the forward and upward
ground reaction thrust. This phase begins as the foot moves forwards.
Kinematics of Running
Kinematics is the study of the motion of object. The variables describes as a function of
the percentage of the total running cycle. The trunk and pelvis are tilted forward in order to keep
the forward acceleration. The hip is flexed between 25 and 30 at foot strike. The hip extends
maximally just before toe-off. During the early stance, the knee and ankle joints flex. A further
2030 of knee flexion occurs early in the stance period which is a natural mechanism that
cushions some of the impact force. Most runners initially contact the running surface with their
rearfoot. In the late stance, the knee extension and ankle plantarflxion are followed. The ankle
plantarflexes up to 30 before toe off (Novacheck, 1998; Lafortune et al, 2000). The heel contacts
the ground with the foot in a slightly supinated position (Mann et al., 1981). After that, the foot
progresses into pronation accompanied by hindfoot eversion and tibial internal roation which
increases mobility of subtalar joint and forefoot. After maximal foot pronation, the subtalar
supination begins at heel-off and remainder of the stance phase for propulsion (Dugan & Bhat,
2005). After take-off, the hip starts to flex and continue through the midswing. The knee and
ankle undergo flexion for toe clearance. The hip and knee joint start to extend in preparation for
touchdown at late swing phase (Hunter et al., 20
Page 11
Fig. 2. Knee flexion angle as a function of (a) the thigh angle and (b) the ankle angle
(Lafortune et al., 2000)
Kinetics of Running
According to the 3rd law of Newton, Foot contact generates a reaction force from the
ground which is divided into three components; vertical ground reaction force, anteroposterior
ground reaction force, and mediolateral ground reaction force. The vertical component is the
largest component which effects the human skeleton. The previous studies provided the
information concerning the magnitude, direction and point of application. Its magnitude is 1.3 to
1.5 times body weight during walking while the magnitude of vertical ground reaction force in
running is able to approach 3 to 4 times body weight. In addition, the peak impact force relates to
running speed. As the running velocity increases, the amplitude of ground reaction forces
increases (Cavanagh & Lafortune, 1980).
Fig. 3. Vertical ground reaction forces compare between rearfoot striker and midfoot
striker (Blazevich, 2007)
The vertical impact force presented in Fig. 3 showed the characteristics of a rearfoot
runner and midfoot runner. Running style is classified according to which part of the foot makes
Page 12
Page 13
Fig. 4 a) Anatomical structure of right foot (superior view) b) Longitudinal arches of foot
(McKinley & OLoughlin, 2008)
The arch of the foot is an important design feature for the stability and function of the
foot. It is capable of supporting itself by the foot natural arch support mechanism known as the
windlass mechanism (Hicks, 1954), that the medial longitudinal arch is raised on dorsiflexing the
first metatarsophalangeal joint.
Running Injuries
Many injuries are related to running because of the high impact forces. Since recreational
running becomes dramatically popular among people, the incidence of running injuries has risen.
Several literatures indicated that the etiology of running-related injuries was multifactorial
characteristics (Keller et al., 1996; Satterthwaite et al., 1999; Taunton et al., 2002; van
Middelkoop et al., 2008; Buist, et al, 2010; Buist, et al, 2010; Harrast & Colonno, 2010; Lynch &
Hoch, 2010; Chang et al., 2011). The factors that causing running injuries could be categorized
into three factors: training, anatomical, and biomechanical factors. The training factors have been
routine excessive mileage, increased intensity, duration and frequency of running, irregular
surface running, running experiences, orthotic use, the type of shoe insoles, the racing group,
training duration and terrain, incorrect footwear, training errors. The anatomical factors have
been identified as the abnormalities or malalignment of the body, especially lower extremities
such as tibia varum, rearfoot varus, and leg length discrepancies. The biomechanical factors have
been the magnitude of impact forces (Cavanagh & Lafortune, 1980), the rate of impact loading
(Nigg, 1986), and the magnitude of push off forces (Winter, 1983).
Most of the running injuries are overuse injuries which occur as a result of repetitive
microtrauma from chronic loading of tendons, muscles, or bones. Lun et al. (2004) studied
musculoskeletal injuries of 87 recreational runners who had no history of injury at the start of the
study and found the incidence was 79%, which was the same for both sexes. van Gent, et al
(2007) summarized that running injuries occurred 7%-50% at knee, followed by the lower leg
(9%-32.2%), the foot (5.7%-39.3%) and upper leg (3.4%-38.1%). van Mechelen (1992) stated
that 50-75% of injuries are due to overuse from running.
Page 14
Page 15
The modern running shoes have been thought of a protective device from rough and
uneven surfaces, excessive ground impact forces, and cold - wet environments. Running shoes
were first designed in the 1970s. Footwear characteristics found to influence injury rates include
shock absorbing properties (Finestone et al., 1992; Milgrom et al., 1992; McKay, Goldie &
Oakes, 2001; Torkki et al., 2002), arch support system, outsole and midsole materials (Chiu &
Wang, 2007), shoe flexibility, toe box room (Miller, 2000), pressure over the plantar surface area
(Jordan, Payton & Bartlett, 1997). Shock attenuation has been a major concern for footwear
designers and manufacturers, as one of the primary roles for running injuries reduction by
providing shock absorption (Cavanagh, 1980; Nigg, 1986). In addition, the deformity of the foot
such as overpronation has also been identified as a key factor related to running injuries (Hart
and Smith, 2009).
The three primary categories of running footwear in the market are motion control,
cushion trainers, and stability shoes. Motion control shoes are developed to control excessive
rearfoot motion (Williams et al., 2001). Motion control running shoes are rigid, durable, stable
control-oriented running shoes that limit pronation. These shoes are designed to provide
significant support for flat-footed or severe overpronators. Cushion trainer shoes are developed to
attenuate lower extremity loading (Williams et al., 2001). The investigations have been focused
on midsole cushioning in order to reduce the impact force and running injuries (Andreasson &
Peterson, 1986). The midsole will provide the extra shock absorption and is best for runners with
a high arch. Stability shoes are designed for the runners with a normal arch. It is believed that
assigning running shoes matched to arch type, injury risk could be reduced (Knapik et al., 2010).
Page 16
Page 17
Page 18
Fig. 4. The comparison between modern running shoes and minimalist running shoes
New Direction in Running Footwear
From the 1960s to present, the running footwears have been developed from brown
rubber to the super cushioning heel by many research which conducted to develop for functions
and styles. The several features; raised heel and arch support, are believed that these parts of the
shoe will help prevent common running injuries. Why are the super cushioning footwear not able
to reduce the incidences of injuries? This big question is discussed among investigators, doctors,
runners and footwear manufacturers. Consumers are looking for more comfortable, safe and
satisfied. Therefore, the studies are directly geared to the back to basics or minimalist lifestyle
to improve the functioning of footwear and let the feet move in their natural way, hold the feet in
the right places and support the body weight at the right locations.
Page 19
Page 20
Page 21
Page 22
Milgrom, C., Finestone, A., Shlamkovitch, N., Wosk, J., Laor, A., Voloshin, A., et al. (1992).
Prevention of overuse injuries of the foot by improved shoe shock attenuation. Clinical
Orthopedics, 281: 189-192.
Miller, J.E., Nigg, B.M., Liu, W., Stefanyshyn, D.J., & Nurse, M.A. (2000). Influence of foot, leg
and shoe characteristics on subjective comfort. Foot and Ankle International, 21:759-767
Nigg, B.M. (1986). Biomechanics of Running Shoes. Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics.
Novacheck, T.F. (1998). The biomechanics of running. Gait and Posture, 7: 77-95.Rao, U. B., &
Joseph, B. (1992). The influence of footwear on the prevalence of flat foot, A survey of
2300 children. Journal of Bone Joint Surgery, 74(4): 525-527.
Richards, C., & Hollowell, T. (2011). The complete idiots guide to barefoot running. NY:
Penguin group.
Robbins, S.E., & Hanna, A.M. (1987). Running-related injury prevention through barefoot
adaptations. Medicine & Science in Sports and Exercise, 19(2): 148-156.
Robbins, S., Waked, E., & McClaran, J. (1995). Proprioception and stability: foot position
awareness as a function of age and footwear. Age Ageing, 24(1): 67-72.
Robbins, S.E., Waked, E., & Rappel, R. (1995). Ankle taping improves proprioception before
and after exercise in young men. British Journal of Sports Medicine, 29: 242-247.
Robbins, S., Waked, E., & McClaran J. (1997). The effect of footwear midsole hardness and
thickness on proprioception and stability in older men. Journal of Test and Evaluation,
25(1):143148.
Ryan, M., Fraser, S., McDonald, K., & Taunton, J. (2009). Examining the degree of pain
reduction using a multielement exercise model with a conventional training shoe
versus an ultraflexible training shoe for treating plantar fasciitis. Physician and
Sportsmedicine, 37(4), 68-74.
Sachithanandam, V., & Joseph, B. (1995). The influence of footwear on the prevalence of flat
foot, A survey of 1846 skeletally mature persons. Journal of Bone Joint Surgery, 77(2):
254-257.
Satterthwaite, P., Norton, R., Larmer, P., & Robinson, E. (1999). Risk factors for injuries and
other health problems sustained in a marathon. British Journal of Sports Medicine, 33:
22-26.
Shakoor, N., & Block, J. A. (2006). Walking barefoot decreases loading on the lower extremity
joints in knee osteoarthritis. Arthritis Rheumatism. 54(9): 2923-2927.
Squadrone, R., & Gallozzi, C. (2009). Biomechanical and physiological comparison of barefoot
and two shod conditions in experienced barefoot runners. Journal of Sports Medicine and
Physical Fitness, 49: 6-13.
Staheli LT. (1991). Shoes for children: a review. Pediatrics, 88(2): 371375.
Tencer, A.F., Koepsell, T.D., & Wolf, M.E. (2004).Biomechanical properties of shoes and risk of
falls in older adults. Journal of American Geriatrics Society, 52(11):1840-1846.
Taunton, J. E., Ryan, M. B., Clement, D. B., McKenzie, D. C., Lloyd-Smith, D. R., & Zumbo, B.
D. (2002). A retrospective case-control analysis of 2002 running injuries. British Journal
of Sports Medicine, 36: 95-101
Torkki, M., Malmivaara, A., Reivovnen, N., Seitsalo, S., Laippalo, P., & Hoikka, V. (2002).
Individually fitted sports shoes for overuse injuries among newspaper carriers.
Scandinavian Journal of Work, Environment and Health, 28:176-83.
Page 23
Page 24
HSO65-3
Page 25
Page 26
Page 27
Table 2 shows the frequency and percent distribution of physical factors (difficulties in
physical functioning) in older respondents. Only 3.4% of the older population responded very
difficult to do or cant do at all to use fingers to grasp or handle small object without special
equipment; by comparison, 16.9% responded very difficult to do or cant do at all to stand for 2
hours without special equipment and 16.6% reported very difficult to do or cant do at all to
stoop/bend/kneel without special equipment. The highest percentage of difficulties in physical
functioning for which the older respondents report cant do at all are standing, walking, and
pushing or pulling large objects without special equipment (10.9%, 8.9%, and 8.2%, respectively).
The average score on difficulties in physical functioning is 0.7 with a standard deviation of 34.4.
The minimum score is 0 and the maximum score is 5.
Page 28
Not at all
difficult
Only a little
difficult
Somewhat
difficult
Very
difficult
Cant do at
all
n(%)
n (%)
n(%)
n(%)
n(%)
Do not do
this
activity
n(%)
62,174(69.1)
6,782(6.9)
6,308(6.5)
5,268(5.2)
9,056(8.9)
3,379(3.5)
67,763(75.5)
6,420(6.4)
5,503(5.4)
4,932(4.6)
6,369(6.0)
2,349(2.1)
59,058(65.7)
71,06(7.5)
6,490(6.7)
6,965(6.0)
11,046(10.9)
3,448(3.2)
Stoop/Bend/kneel
without special
equipment
55,179(60.6)
10,319(11.2)
9,647(10.1)
8,456(8.6)
8,228(8.0)
1,519(1.5)
77,938(84.6)
5,100(5.2)
4,778(4.7)
2,934(2.9)
2,067(2.0)
653(0.6)
78,569(85.2)
6,128(6.2)
4,783(4.9)
2,719(2.6)
863(0.8)
301(0.3)
72,315(80.0)
5,222(5.1)
4,686(4.6)
3,398(3.1)
5,426(5.1)
2293(2.1)
64,993(72.1)
5,682(5.9)
4,963(5.1)
3,894(3.7)
85,18(8.2)
5,269(5.0)
Page 29
All of the
time
Most of the
time
Some of the
time
A little of the
time
None of the
time
n(%)
n (%)
n(%)
n(%)
n(%)
Sadness
1,145(1.1)
2,539(2.4)
8,985(8.9)
12,068(12.5)
67,432(75.1)
Hopelessness
852(0.8)
1,439(1.4)
4,247(4.2)
4,918(5.0)
80,661(88.6)
Worthlessness
917(0.9)
1,234(1.2)
3,309(3.4)
3,719(3.8)
82,911(90.7)
Everything is an
Effort
2,209(2.2)
3,053(3.1)
7,701(8.1)
8,503(9.1)
70,604(77.5)
Feeling of
Nervousness
1,588(1.6)
2,638(2.6)
9,811(10.4)
14,655(16.1)
63,475(69.3)
Feeling of
Restlessness
1,848(2.0)
2,876(3.0)
10,310(11.1)
12,869(14.1)
64,237(69.8)
Page 30
From the Table 4, the respondents reported the highest percentage of hypertension, arthritis,
and diabetes (47.6%, 40.1%, and 16.2%, respectively). In terms of pain symptoms, respondents
reported the high percentage of chronic joint symptoms, pain in lower back, and pain in face and jaw
(44.8%, 31.2%, and 16.3%, respectively). The findings also reported that about 73% of older
respondents had at least one chronic illness, and about 60% reported at least one pain symptom. About
80% of respondents reported their health status as excellent, very good and good, while only 20%
reported their health status as fair or poor. About 44% of older adults reported inactive in physical
activity, 24.5% reported participation in some physical activity, and 32% reported regular physical
activity.
Page 31
Table 5 presents the ordinal logistic regression predicting the physical activity participation in
older adults. Respondents aged 65 and over are more likely to participate in physical activity than
those who are younger (OR=1.15). Married older respondents reported more physical activity
participation (OR=1.06). The odds ratio of difficulties in physical functioning equal to 0.64 means that
with each score increase in difficulties in physical functioning, the predicted likelihood of participation
in physical activity in respondents decreases by about 36%. Older adults who reported more positively
health status reported more physical activity participation. Respondents having chronic illnesses or
pain symptoms reported more physical activity participation (OR=1.18. and OR=1.27, respectively).
DISCUSSION
Changes in body system are highly prevalent in older adults and it affects the physical activity
participation in older adults. This result of the study is consistent with the previous research that
reported that older adults had some difficulty in daily living (Cigolle et al., 2007; Henchoz et al., 2008;
Klieman et al., 2007). Ferrini and Ferrini (2008) also demonstrated that older persons experienced a
decrease in muscular strength and flexibility in joints thataffected limited movement. In addition, a
recent study demonstrated that about 80% of seniors had at least one chronic health condition (U.S.
Census Bureau, 2005). This is consistent with the previous research that older adults participate in less
physical activity because they experience barriers to maintain physical activity (Klieman et al., 2007).
Drewnoski et al. (2003) also pointed out that the most common reported barriers to physical activity in
Page 32
Page 33
Page 34
Page 35
Page 36
Page 37
Page 38
Page 39
Page 40
Psychological demand. With Psychological demand item, there were just one sub-item were
evaluated and ranked as agreed (i.e. mean score of this from 3.50 to 4.49) including You participate
in sports and physical exercises because you feel more confident (mean = 3.52).
Other six of the rest sub-items were evaluated and ranked as neutral (i.e. mean score of this
from 2.50 to 3.49) including You participate in sports and physical exercises because you want to be
relieved from stress (mean = 3.45), You participate in sports and physical exercises because your
parents encourage you to (mean = 2.83), and You participate in sports and physical exercises
because your friends encourage you to (mean = 2.79).
The other results on Psychological demand were described on Table 4.6 following
Leisure demand. With Leisure demand item, there were just one sub-item were evaluated and
ranked as agreed (i.e. mean score of this from 3.50 to 4.49) including You participate in sports and
physical exercises because you like to be with friends (mean = 3.58).
Page 41
Other two of the rest sub-items were evaluated and ranked as neutral (i.e. mean score of this
from 2.50 to 3.49) including You participate in sports and physical exercises to encourage your
friends to take part (mean = 3.36), and You participate in sports and physical exercises because you
like to travel and to be outdoors (as provided by competitions) (mean = 2.97).
According to Figure 4.2, the highest level of agreement from students was the factor of Health
demand (with the average mean = 3.94). Conversely, the lowest level of average mean of Students
motivation was Psychological demand (with the average mean = 2.94). The other average mean of the
Students motivation were described in Figure 4.2, following
Page 42
CONCLUSION
The following conclusions were showed as a result of the research findings regarding karatedo clubs at Dong Thap university.
1. As regards demographics, the most participants was female and freshmen. In term of living
place, most of respondents stayed at near by school and in Dormitory. Regards level of participation,
most of respondents participated around 3 4 times/week at Karate-do club (43.5%) and this was the
largest group; 34.3% of the participants participated around 1 2 times/week and this was the second
largest group; 8.8% of the participants enjoyed 2 3 times/month; and 7% of the participants took part
in almost everyday. The smallest group, composed of 6.5% of the sample, was composed of
respondents that participated in Karate-do club at once a month.
2. Turning to the students motivations, the highest level of agreement from students was the
factor of Health demand (with the average mean = 3.94). Conversely, the lowest level of average mean
of Students motivation was Psychological demand (with the average mean = 2.94).
This research has several implications for researchers and other college health professionals
with an interest in promoting physical activity. This research provides a better understanding of
behaviors of college students with respect to their motivation. This examination of physical activity
among college students at karate-do club should be of interest to those fostering programs, services
and facilities to support this behavior, and particularly campus recreation professionals. The task of
improving system of karate-do clubs becomes more concrete with this newly extracted
multidimensional scale, which might be termed fitness and sport service quality. This is because sports
and fitness service providers can obtain valuable information regarding the components of the quality
service expectations, and they can take action to gauge the extent to which these expectations are
satisfied by the services offered.
Page 43
Page 44
HSO61-5
Page 45
at
Methodology
The data used are of both qualitative and quantitative types. They were gathered by
interviewing 20 Lue ethnic informants in Pannamuangluang and Muang Ham (Kalanpao),
Xishuangbanna Region, and 20 Lue ethnic informants in Phayao and Chiang Mai provinces for
the Lanna Region. The key informants were local scholars, village heads, teachers, and specialists
in food, traditions and rituals. For examining nutritive values, ten types of most frequently eaten
food on a daily basis were selected. The dishes were then analyzed in a chemical laboratory for
the quantity of essential nutrients, including carbohydrate, fat, protein, moisture, ashes, vitamin A
and calcium. They were analyzed by Proximate analysis and nutritional composition. Vitamin A
and calcium were analyzed by HPLC and AOAC methods.
The research findings
Interviewing with the key informants reveals that, in most cases, food preparation and
types of Tai Lue food in Lanna remains the same or similar to that in Xishuangbanna, despite
having migrated from their origin for several centuries. However, minor changes can be seen in
both regions due to the influences of the environment in which the Lue live.
It is found that 10 types of most frequently eaten food on a daily basis were Crab paste ), Crab
paste with green chili, Crab curry, Pak-van (water fern) soup, Cucumber salad, Aeng Thae, Hornung, Mangos leaves salad, Grilled fish and Pickling pak - kum curry. (See Table 1 and Figure
1- 4).
From analyzing nutritive values of the ethnic food, it is found that the foods with higher
energy are crab paste, crab curry , hor-nung, grilled fish and pickling pak-kum curry. In each 100
grams of the foods, they are shown 207.16 kilocalories, 146.80 kilocalories,125.68 kilocalories,
115.70 kilocalories and 111.62 kilocalories, respectively. The foods with higher carbohydrate are
Aeng Thae, crab paste and pickling pak-kum curry. They are shown 21.83 grams,14.16 grams and
9.42 grams, respectively. The foods with higher protein are crab paste, hor-nung, grilled fish and
pikling pak-kum curry. They are shown 24.94 grams,17.37 grams , 14.24 grams, and 11.00 grams
respectively. The food with higher fat is crab curry with 10.51grams of fat. The foods with
higher vitamin A are Aeng Thae, pickling pak-kum curry and pak-van(water fern )soup.They are
shown 855.50 RE, 492.19 RE and 755.70 RE respectively. The foods with higher calcium are
crab paste ,crab paste with green chili and crab curry. They are shown 1,183 milligrams ,484.14
milligrams and 333.33 milligrams respectively.
Discussion
Regarding food preparation and types of food, the ethnic food in Lanna remains the same
or similar to that in Xishuangbanna, despite having migrated from their origin for several hundred
years. Food culture has left traces for investigation and comparison in each ethnic group, which is
Page 46
Energy
(cal)
207.16
74.87
146.8
55.54
43.24
46.22
125.68
69.52
115.7
111.62
CHO
(grams)
14.16
6.39
7.02
3.43
4.51
21.83
4.78
4.3
6.97
9.42
Pro
(grams)
24.94
7.1
5.61
6.11
2.98
3.37
17.37
7.26
14.24
11
Page 47
Fat
(grams)
5.64
2.3
10.51
1.98
1.48
2.38
4.35
2.57
3.43
3.33
Vit. A
(RE)
172.56
87.72
333.13
755.7
65.49
855.5
213.87
259.98
317.48
492.19
Ca
(mg)
1,183
484.14
158.54
79.26
68.94
120.34
26.39
50.86
60.12
101.65
111.62
Grilled fish
115.7
69.52
125.68
Hor-nung
Food's name
46.22
Aeng Thae
Cucumber salad
43.24
55.54
Crab curry
146.8
74.87
Crab paste
207.16
0
50
100
150
200
250
cal
11
9.42
3.43
Grilled fish
14.24
6.97
2.57
7.26
4.3
4.35
Hor-nung
17.37
4.78
2.38
3.37
Aeng Thae
Fat
21.83
Pro
Food's name
1.48
Cucumber salad
CHO
2.98
4.51
1.98
Pak-van (water fern)soup
6.11
3.43
10.51
Crab curry
5.61
7.02
2.3
7.1
6.39
5.64
24.94
Crab paste
14.16
0
10
15
20
25
30
grams
Figure 2 Fat, carbohydrate and protein value of the Tai Lues food ( in 100 grams)
Page - 48 -
492.19
317.48
Grilled fish
Mangos leaves salad
259.98
Hor-nung
213.87
Aeng Thae
855.5
Food's name
Cucumber salad
65.49
755.7
333.13
87.72
Crab paste
172.56
0
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
RE
101.65
60.12
50.86
26.39
Hor-nung
120.34
Aeng Thae
Food's name
Cucumber salad
68.94
79.26
158.54
Crab curry
484.14
1,183
Crab paste
0
200
400
600
800
mg
Page - 49 -
1,000
1,200
1,400
Page - 50 -
Page 51
Page 52
HSO179-7
Page 53
Page 54
Page 55
Definition
Quality
The quality of all relevant studies for a given topic, where quality
is defined as the extent to which a studys design, conduct, and
analysis has minimized selection, measurement, and confounding
biases
Quantity
Consistency
For any given topic, the extent to which similar findings are
reported from work using similar and different study designs
Results
Researches were more than half the students in the United States, 7 articles in Europe's, 7
studies in the Middle East, and a subject to study in Asia. A report of more than half of the study
of long-term follow-up form project database, such as, the study of such long-term women's health
and aging study I, the second longitudinal study of aging (LSOA), the MRC cognitive function and
ageing study, the HALE project, the Rotterdam study, the Kungsholmen project the established
populations for epidemiologic studies of the elderly (EPESE), health and retirement study (HRS),
and the Jerusalem longitudinal study. The sample size was a minimized of 559 people (McGuire,
Ford, and Ajani, 2006.), and maximized of the 9,093 people (Gray,et al.2006), that was subject of
the 66.71 females. The duration of follow-up averaged 45.94 months period to the shortest 18
months (Gill1 and Kurland, 2003.), length 147 months (Gregg,et al, 2002) (table 2 in Appendix).
Analysis of risk factors.
This was a component of the risk factors from 19 the research report, that were 27 factors
identified and separated into 8 dimensions, such as, chronic disease, psycho impairment, fall, risk
behavior, sensory impairment, age, restrict activity, and socioeconomic. Moreover, analyzing the
strength of the relationship of risk factors for the occurrence of the disability, a critical component
of the disability dimension, was composed of three dimensions such as, chronic diseases, psycho
Page 56
Co morbidity
Stroke
Risk factors of
high strenght
Gill,et al,
2004
Gill and Kurland,
OR 1.4
(95%0.9-2.1)
2003
Tas, et al
OR 2.6
(95%CI1.3-5.0)
2007
Dunlop,et al,
OR2.86
(95%CI1.71-4.78)
2005
Arthritis/
Osteoarthitis
HR 2.10
(95%CI1.63-2.71)
Cognitive impairment/
Dementia
Tas, et al
OR 2.1
(95%CI3.6-27.3)
2007
Gill and Kurland,
OR 1.3
(95%CI1.2-1.4)
2003
Marengoni,et al,
OR 3.3
(95%CI1.5-7.4)
2008
Age
Jogger,et al,
OR 1.46
(95%CI1.18-1.82)
2007
Spiers, et al,
OR 1.3
(95%1.0-1.6)
2005
Tas, et al,
OR 1.6
(95%CI1.2-2.3)
2007
Gill,et al
HR 1.44
(95%1.32-1.57)
2004
Dunlop,et al
OR3.10
(95%CI2.29-4.19)
2005
Discussion
The strength of the analysis of risk factors was explained the occurrence of disability,
which was determined by the constancy of the results to the disability of various risk factors
(Consistent), the statistically was significant P value <0.05 or association RR/OR/HR (95% CI)
range from 1.0 up to a value (Quality), and quantitative research (Quantity). It found that the risk
of disability, that was seven high strong factors and two moderate factors. In addition, other factors
had found a limited.
Page 57
Page 58
Page 59
Page 60
Domain
Search
Study
question
Strateg
y
Quality
Inclusion/ Interve
ntion
Exclusion
Outcom
e
Study
Study
data
extraction quality/
validity
Synthesis result
and
analysis
Discussio
n
Funding
1. Freedman
Vicki A., Martin
Linda G.and
Schoeni Robert
F, 2002
2. Umit Ta s, et
al ,2007
High
Table 1 Evaluation of Scales and Checklists for Observational Studies, by Specific Instrument and
9 Domains*
Domain
Instrument
Study Search
question
popula
tion
3. Cronin-Stubbs
Diane,et al, 2000
4. Gregg Edward
W., et al,2002
5. Volpato Stefano,
et al, 2002
6. Gill Thomas M.
and Kurland Brenda
F. , 2003
Compar Expos
bility ure/
Statistic result
Outcome
0f Interven measure
subjects ion ment
Analysi
s
Discuss
ion
Fundin
g
Page 61
Quality
High
Discus
sion
Fundi
ng
Quality
High
7.Thomas M.
Gill, et
l.,2004
8. Brenes
Gretchen A.,
et al,2005
9. McGuire
Lisa C , Ford
Earl S and
Ajani Umed
A,2006
10. Carol
Jagger, et
al,2001
11. Spiers A
Nicola, 2005
12. Carol
Jagger, et al
,2007
13. Umit Ta
s, et al ,2007
14.Marengon
i A., et al,
2008
15.Chung-Yi
Li, Shwu
Chong Wu,
Shi Wu Wen
Page 62
High
High
16.Shelly L.
Gray,
Discuss
ion
Fundi
ng
Quality
Et al ,2006,
pubmed
17.Dorothy
D. Dunlop,
Pamela
Semanik,
,et al,2005
18.Dorothy
D. Dunlop,
et al, 2005
19.Jochanan
Stessman,et
al, 2002
Pubmed
Page 63
High
Table 2 reports the research on risk factors for disability in the elderly (Systematic Reviews)
NO./ Database/
Country
Sources
Search
Strategy
Inclusion/
Exposure or
Intervention
Outcome
Data Extraction
Study Quality /
Validity
Result
Limitation
Quality
score
self-reports of
either needing
help or having
difficulty with
activities of
daily living
(ADLs) and
instrumental
activities of
daily living
(IADLs)
1) no explicitly the
reliability of
outcome measure
including intra rater
reliability
Base on a
national research
council report and
follow up
evaluated survey
quality according to 10
criteria, ranked the
Evidence on trends in
disparities by age, sex,
race, and education
was limited and mixed
,with no consensus yet
emerging
Outcome had
difference 4 type,
no report loss
follow up 5 article
High
Experiencing
difficulty in
ADLs or
IADLs
1) consistency
process
High
Exclusion
1.A Systematic
Review(USA)
Freedman Vicki
A., Martin
Linda G.and
Schoeni Robert
F, 2002
2 database;
MEDLINE,
AGEING,
Jan1990May2002
2.Systematic
review(UK,
3 database;
Pubmed
Dutch, German,
French, Danish,
Norwegian,
Swedish, and
Turkis)
(19662006),
EMBASE
(19802006),
PsycINFO
(1975-2006
Inclusion;
65 or 70
years or
over, in
USA,16
articles
1)physical
disability
2)functional,
cognitive, and
sensory
limitations
Exclusion;
institutional
or health
care
utilization
3) age, sex
19 articles,
Inclusion;
outcome,
longitudinal
study,age 50
years, in
UK, Dutch,
German,
French,
Danish,
Norwegian,
1)demographic
and
socioeconomic
factors,lifestyle
factors, and
medical
conditions
2) 3 reviewers
3) no report blinding
of reviewrs
based on 15
criteria of internal
and
2) 5 reviewers
3) no report blinding
of reviewrs
2)functional
status
external validity.
the assessment
resulted with a
score of 70% of
the maximum
obtainable
points or higher
were rated as
high-quality
studies.
Swedish,
and Turkis
Page 64
It was possible to
pool the data if terms
of homogeneity were
met. In the case of
heterogeneity, a
synthesis of the best
evidence was
performed.
The strength of
evidence was rated as
follows: strong
evidence; moderate
evidence; limited
evidence; conflicting
Table 2 reports the research on risk factors for disability in the elderly (Cohort Study)
NO./ Database/
Country
Sources
Age
Number
Loss
follow up
Comparability
Exposure or
Intervention
Length of
follow up
Outcome
Result
Limitation
1) our measure of
chronic health
conditions was
imperfect, as it relied
on self-reports of
previously diagnosed
conditions and lacked
detail on the severity
of disease.
Study/Control
3.East Boston,
Massachusetts,
(USA)
Cronin-Stubbs
Diane,et al,
2000
65 years or
older
3,434
NR
Mild
depression
Depression
72
(19991994)
/ NR
2) It is unlikely that
non response
bias limits the
interpretation of the
studys results.
Page 65
Quality
score
Sources
Age
Number
Loss
follow up
Comparability
Exposure or
Intervention
Length of
follow up
Outcome
147
Result
Limitation
Quality
score
Study/Control
4.Baltimore,
Monongahela
Valley, Portland,
and Minneapolis
(USA)
Gregg Edward
W., et al,2002
65 years
or older
8,344
18
Diabetes /
Non
Diabetes
Diabetes
Insulin
treatment
(19892001)
BMI
Stroke
1) The study
population was
limited to white,
noninstitutionalized
women who were
probably healthier
than those in the
typical
same-aged
population.
2) collected diabetes
status
by self-report, our
findings may not be
generalizable to
women with
undiagnosed
diabetes
3)lacked information
about glycemic
control and specific
diabetes
medications
Page 66
High
Table 2 reports the research on risk factors for disability in the elderly (Cohort Study)
NO./ Database/
Country
Sources
Age
Number
Loss
follow up
Comparability
Exposure or
Intervention
Length of
follow up
Outcome
36(19992002)
Result
Limitation
Study/Control
5.Baltimore,
Maryland
Volpato
Stefano, et al,
2002
65 years
or older
729
NR
With
diabetes /
without
diabetes
Diabetes
(USA)
1) this study
was that the
algorithm used for
diabetes
ascertainment did not
include a fasting
glucose level.
6.New Haven
(USA)
Gill Thomas M.
and Kurland
Brenda F. ,
2003
70 years or
older
580
22.8
Physical
frailty / no
Physical
frailty
Chronic
condition(no)
18(1998
2002)
Cognitive
impairment
1)ADLs(4
items;bathing,
dressing, walking inside the
house, and transferring from a
chair)
Physical frailty
Prior history of
disability
1) Although our
disability assessment
had excellent
reliability, it is
possible that some of
the disability
transitions
represented
measurement error
rather than a true
change
2)eating, toileting
and grooming were
omitted from
assessment.
3)oversampled
persons who were
physically frail.
Page 67
Quality
score
Table 2 reports the research on risk factors for disability in the elderly (Cohort Study)
NO./ Database/
Country
Sources
Age
Number
Loss
follow up
Comparability
Exposure or
Intervention
Length of
follow up
Outcome
Result
Prior
Hospitalization
60 (March
1998 to
March 2003)
Limitation
Quality
score
Study/Control
7.New Haven,
Conn, (USA)
Thomas M.
Gill; Heather G.
Allore;
Theodore R.
Holford; et
al.,2004
70 years or
older
754
21.9
Physical
frailty / no
Physical
frailty
restricted
activity
Physical frailty
disease
Age
1)analyses were
limited to the first
episodes
of any disability,
persistent disability,
and disability with
nursing
home admission,
Brenes
Gretchen A., et
al,2005
65 years or
older
1,002
NR
Anxiety / No
Anxiety
Anxiety
36(2003
2000)
Page 68
High
Table 2 reports the research on risk factors for disability in the elderly (Cohort Study)
NO./ Database/
Country
Sources
Age
Number
Loss
follow up
Comparability
Exposure or
Intervention
Length of
follow up
Outcome
Result
Limitation
Study/Control
9.The Second
Longitudinal
Study of Aging
(LSOA II).
McGuire Lisa C
, Ford Earl S
and Ajani Umed
A,2006
70 years or
older
559
NR
Disabled /
Non-disabled
Cognitive
functioning
Diabetes
(USA)
1) functional
disability outcomes
were assessed using
respondent-reported,
they
may not reflect
adaptations a person
makes to successfully
complete a task
2) unfortunately,
medication adherence
and depression were
not assessed on the
LSOA II, which can
potentially impair
cognition
10.Melton
Mowbray,
Leicestershire,
(UK)
Carol Jagger,
Antony J.
Arthur, Nicola
A. Spiers,
Michael
Clarke,2001
75 years or
older.
1,345
NR
Men /
Women
Sex
72(1991
1997)
Age
Page 69
Quality
score
Table 2 reports the research on risk factors for disability in the elderly (Cohort Study)
NO./ Database/
Country
Sources
Age
Number
Loss
follow up
Comparability
Exposure or
Intervention
Length of
follow up
Outcome
Result
Limitation
Quality
score
1)There is evidence
for self-report data on
some diseases and
conditions, but the
uncertain validity of
other self-reported
diagnostic data
suggests caution in
interpretation. 2)The
lack of an association
between prevalent
depression and onset
of disability could be
due to the
High
Study/Control
11.England and
Spiers A Nicola,
2005
65 years or
older
35
article,
27.2
Disabled /
not Disabled
Disease
36(1998
2001)
Impairment
Wales(UK)
7,913
Measure
Carol Jagger, et
al ,2007
6569
years old
689
3.0
New cohort /
Old cohort
Arthritis
Chronic
airways
obstruction
24 (between
1991 1992
and 1996
1997)
Age
Page 70
1) the majority of
information
on chronic conditions
was self-report and
therefore
our findings,
Table 2 reports the research on risk factors for disability in the elderly (Cohort Study)
NO./ Database/
Country
Sources
Age
Number
Loss
follow up
Comparability
Exposure or
Intervention
Length of
follow up
Outcome
72 (first
wave 1990 1993; second
wave 1994 1996; third
wave 1997 1999)
Result
Limitation
Quality
score
Study/Control
13.The Rotterdam
Study, Rotterdam
(Germany)
Umit Ta s, et al
,2007
55 years or
older
4,258
27.5
Men /
Women
Health
conditions
Age
Page 71
High
Table 2 reports the research on risk factors for disability in the elderly (Cohort Study)
NO./ Database/
Country
Sources
Age
Number
Loss
follow up
Comparability
Exposure or
Intervention
Length of
follow up
Outcome
Result
Limitation
Study/Control
14.The
Kungsholmen
project,
Stockholm,
(Sweden)
15.in northern
Taiwan.
Marengoni A.,
Strauss von E.,
Rizzuto D.,
Winblad B.,
and Fratiglioni
L.,2008
Chung-Yi Li,
Shwu Chong
Wu, Shi Wu
Wen
75 years or
older
680
38.13
Disability /
Without
Disability
Chronic multi
morbidity
32(1987
2000)
Functional
decline
65 years or
older
2,198
NR
Disability /
free
Disability
1)longest held
occupation in a
lifetime
60
(1993-1997)
2) social class
indicated
1)a potential
Page 72
2)the diagnoses
included definition of
multimorbidity to
those conditions with
potential of severity
Quality
score
Table 2 reports the research on risk factors for disability in the elderly (Cohort Study)
NO./ Database/
Country
Sources
Age
Number
Loss
follow up
Comparability
Exposure or
Intervention
Length of
follow up
Outcome
Result
Limitation
Study/Control
16.the Established
Populations for
Epidemiologic
Studies of the
Elderly, EPESE,
(USA)
Shelly L. Gray,
65 years or
older
9,093
2.94%
Et al ,2006,
pubmed
Benzodiazep
ine user /
nonusers
Benzodiazepine
72 (NA)
17.Health and
Retirement Study
(HRS)
Dorothy D.
Dunlop, Pamela
Semanik,
,et al,2005
(USA)
65 years or
older
5,715
NR
Functional
Limitation /
Functional
Limitation with
arthritis
24(19982000)
Non
Functional
Limitation
Page 73
1)Function declined
Significantly; in women than men
OR1.4 (CI=1.2,1.7); cognitive
impairment OR 2.86 (1.71-4.78);
depressive symptoms OR
1.27(1.05-1.55); DM OR
1.55(1.21-1.99); stroke
OR1.56(1.06-2.30); vision poor OR
1.63 (1.20-2.20); lack of regular
physical activity OR 1.94(1.542.44) age 85 or over OR 3.10(2.294.19)
1) misclassification
of benzodiazepine
exposure may have
occurred, these
analyses may have
underestimated the
true risk , because
long-term exposure
included those who
tolerated
benzodiazepines
1) secondary databases
may affect the
findings, it is unknown
which may be
consequences or
causes of baseline
functional problems
2) the physical
activity assessment
does not provide
information on the
types or levels of
activities in which
people engaged
Quality
score
Table 2 reports the research on risk factors for disability in the elderly (Cohort Study)
NO./
Database/
Country
Sources
Age
Number
Comparability Exposure
Loss
or
follow up
Intervention
Study/Control
Length
of
follow up
Outcome
Result
Limitation
18.Health and
Retirement Study
(HRS)
Dorothy D.
Dunlop,
54 65
6,871
7.19
24(19961998)
1)limitations
Depression /
not
Depression
Depression
et al, 2005
(USA)
common to
secondary databases
may affect
the present findings.
2)Self-reported
measurement of
limitations
in function and IADL
disability may not be
as
sensitive as objective
measures
19.The Jerusalem
Longitudinal
Study, Jerusalem
(Israel)
Jochanan
Stessman,et al,
2002
pubmed
70 77
605
32
Exercise /
No exercise
Exercise
62 (1991
1998)
1021
Page 74
1) Loss follow up in
first stage
Quality
score
High
Page 75
Page 76
HSO215-8
Page 77
Page 78
Page 79
The sample included 227 Vietnamese school children. Their mean age was 11.2 years old
(S.D. = 1.44, range = 9 -13), with their mean weight and height of 41.59 kilograms (kg; S.D. =
9.60, range = 22 69), and 143.31 centimetres (cm; S.D. = 10.45, range = 119-170, respectively).
Their average Body Mass Index (BMI; kg/m2) was 19.93 (S.D. = 3.48, range = 13-31).
Approximately, 91% of the sample had BMI less than 25 and about 9% had BMI of 25 or more.
There were 50.2% for boys, and 49.8% for girls. Their years of study were 5 levels of grade 3, 4, 5,
6 and 7. There were 21.1% of the sample in grade 3, 18.5% in grade 4, 18.5% in grade 5, 21.1% in
grade 6, and 20.7% in grade 7.
The mean mothers age was 40.51 years (S.D. = 4.74) with range from 35 years to 53
years. About one half the families (52.9%) earned more than 5.000.000 VND/month (~ 7,142 Thai
Baht). Most of their mothers completed general education. There were 33.5% of high school,
26.0% of secondary school or lower, 24.7% of university or above, and 15.9% of diploma/college.
2. Descriptive statistics of eating habits and physical activity
Mean total score of eating habits was 31.18 (S.D. = 5.08, range = 17 - 41). Mean total score
of physical activity was 10.31 (S.D. = 2.82, range = 4-18). It could be implied that the sample had
high health eating habits while it had moderate healthy physical activity.
Page 80
The results showed that there were negatively significant correlations between physical
activity and child age (r = -.19, p < .01), and weight (r = -.15, p < .05). However, the findings
showed no significant relationship between physical activity and BMI (p > .05).
The results showed no significant difference of having physical activity between boy and
girl, and the difference of BMI (<25/>25) (p >.05). However, there was a significant difference of
physical activity between the children with different family income in VND (<5,000,000 /
>5,000.000) (M = 10.88 and M = 9.83, respectively; t = 2.87, p < .01).
The results showed significant differences of physical activity over the difference of the
childs years of study (F = 2.67, p < .05). LSD Pos Hoc multiple comparisons revealed that the
sample in grade 3 had physical activity significantly different from those in grade 6 (M = 11.08 and
M = 9.42, respectively; p < .01) and grade 7 (M = 11.08 and M = 9.94, respectively; p <.05). The
sample in grade 4 had physical activity significantly different from those in grade 6 (M = 10.76 and
M = 9.42, respectively; p < .05). However, significant differences were not found for all other pairs
of the childs year of study (p > .05). Moreover, physical activity of the sample with different
mothers education was not significantly difference (p>.05).
DISCUSSION
From the finding, the Vietnamese school children had high healthy eating habits (M =
31.18). This finding was inconsistent with other studies which found moderate level of eating
Page 81
Page 82
Recommendations
1. Nurse should promote and encourage older and heavier school children as well as
children with different family income, years of study and mothers education to have better and
proper eating habits and physical activity. For example, nurse could facilitate to initiate a project to
provide lunch box and/or fresh milk with standard quality of food at primary and secondary school.
In addition, policy related to school food provision and routine physical activity program at school
could be driven by nurse action.
2. Nurse and related health care personnel who work with school children should apply
these findings to effectively plan an intervention program at school level, such as the weightwatcher project and the daily morning aerobic project, to reduce and prevent overweight and
obesity among Vietnamese school children.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
The researcher would like to deeply thanks to major and co-advisor for their help, thanks to
Burapha University, Thailand, for partly research funding, many thanks to Pham Ngoc Thach
University, Vietnam, to support my studying in Thailand, a lot of thanks to all participants and
contributors to make this study possible and completed, and the last but not least thanks to all my
family for financial and emotional supports.
Page 83
Page 84
Page 85
HSO216-9
INTRODUCTION
UHI are unintentional injuries taking place at home (Alptekina et al., 2008). Unintentional
injury is the leading cause of morbidity and mortality among children under five years globally
(World Health Organization [WHO], 2004; 2008). In China, the incidence of accidents aged 0-3 or
0-4 years was 11.5%-19.1% and 1/3 to over 1/2 of the previous cases occurred at home (Hui and
Xia, 2004; Xin et al., 2005). The age group of 2-3 years old was more affected by household
injuries (Jiang et al., 2008), since the imbalance between motor skills and cognitive development
makes them vulnerable to accidents (Ball and Bindler, 2006). They also spend most of time at
home. Therefore, toddlers are prone to UHI.
UHI among young children would bring about a wide range of impacts on themselves and
their families. It was reported that 76% of pediatric burns occurred at home and resulted in
dramatically acute and lifetime physical and psychological problems such as excruciating pain,
anticipatory anxiety and overt distress (Tarnowski et al., 1991). Childrens mothers also experience
post-traumatic stress disorder after their children have suffered a large burn (Kent et al., 2000).
Likewise, UHI produces considerable costs. In Canada, it was estimated that 630 million dollars a
Page 86
Page 87
Page 88
The result showed that only home hazards was significant correlated with UHI (2 = 6, p
=.01) (table 2). Therefore, only home hazards could be entered the multiple logistic regression.
Table4 showed that home hazards could significantly affect UHI (P= .002, OR = 2.31) (see table
3). The possibility to get UHI among children living in the home with high hazards was 2.31 times
as many as that among children with lower home hazards.
DISCUSSION
The incidence rate of UHI among toddlers in this study (40.4%) was one time higher than the
rates in other areas of China (Hui and Xia, 2004; Xin, Nan and Ling, 2005). Moreover, the
occurrence rate of UHI requiring health care was 17.14% in Wenzhou, higher than that in the U.S.
(0.64%), but near the rate in Turkey (12%) (Runyan, et al., 2005; Alptekina et al., 2008). Likewise, 41% of children sustained UHI in the study have suffered injuries more than one time in the
past 6 months. The leading types of UHI in this study were fall, struck by/against, and cutting,
similar to those in the U. S and Turkey (Runyan, et al., 2005; Alptekina et al., 2008). Toddlers were
vulnerable to accidents which might be due to their curiosity to explore unknown world while
unawareness of dangerous environment.
The finding indicated that only high home hazard was risk factors causing UHI. Strong
curiosity of toddlers on new objects and development of motor skill induce them to access to home
hazards, meanwhile, they fail to identify the dangerous of hazards due to insufficient cognition
ability (Ball & Binder, 2006). The imbalance causes young children easy to touch injury hazards
and results in UHI. For example, children tend to fall when they climb up on the table through short
chair. Children could undergo burn if they access to hot food warmer and turn over it and sustain
cutting if they play knife.
The result also revealed that family income, family type, and family functioning failed to
predict UHI among young children. Given that most of family in China have only child, parents are
willing to spend money and time to focus on childrens safety behavior whether they are rich or
Page 89
Page 90
Page 91
Page 92
Page 93
HSO197-10
Page 94
HSP24-1
Characteristics of toxic epidermal necrolysis and StevensJohnson syndrome: A 5- year retrospective study
Jiranuch Thammakumpee MD *, Somchai Yongsiri MD**
* Internal medicine department Chonburi hospital,Thailand
**Faculty of Medicine,Burapha university Thailand
Abstract
Background:Toxic epidermal necrolysis (TEN) and Stevens-Johnson syndrome (SJS) are rare,
unpredictable, life-threatening drug reaction with high mortality and acute emergencies condition.
There was no data about these patients in community base practice in Thailand.
Objective: To study the demography, causative drugs, laboratory features, treatments,
complications, and mortality of TEN/SJS in Chonburi hospital and compare factors associated with
mortality between groups.
Material and Method: The medical records of TEN/SJS patients during 2005-2009 were
retrospectively reviewed. Characteristic of the patients and factors associated with mortality were
analyzed by SPSS version 19 for windows.
Results: There were 15 SJS and 9 TEN patients. The average age was 40.13+/-22 years. Male to
female ratio was 1.4:1. The mean SCORTEN on day 1 was 1.54+/-1.1 and 1.79+/-1.59 on day 3.
The overall mortality was 20.83%. Antibiotics were the commonest group of drugs causing
TEN(55.6%) and SJS(66.7%) . Septicemia and pulmonary infections were associated with higher
mortality (p<0.001 and 0.004 respectively). Steroid treatment was associated with lower mortality
13.33 % vs. 33.33 %.
Conclusion: Antibiotics is the most common causative agents in SJS/TEN. Sepsis and pulmonary
infections are associated with higher mortality. Steroid treatment may have some survival benefit.
Page 95
HSP28-2
Page 96
Page 97
Figure 1. Polypharmacy collected from drugstores in the Bang Phlat district, Bangkok.
Sample preparation and determination: Each tablets of polypharmacy were gridded and
filled until met the blue line of the test tube. Reagent was dropped into tube with sample contained
until met the red line of the test tube. The suspending were mixed at list 3 minutes by vortex mixer
homogeneously and standing for precipitated. The supernatant was dropped (4 drops) into the test
well of Immunochrographic test kit (DMSc Steroid Test Kit, Thailand) and read the result rapidly
and not longer than 10 minutes. The positive result was presented as one band at C region and
negative result was presented as two bands at T and C region. Dexamethasone and
prednisolone were used as positive control (Fig.2).
69
Total
Number of drugstores
30
18
4
3
14
Page 98
The number of tablets for each dispended from drugstores in Bang Phlat distric were
various number (Table 2). Two and Three tablets were most dispended from 7 drugstores and only
one was dispended 5 tablets as maximum number.
Number of drugstores
7
7
3
1
18
CONCLUSION
The study found 18 drugstores in Bang Phlat district dispended polypharmacy to customer
on demand without asking for a prescription. However, 30 drugstores denied selling polypharmacy.
Some pharmacists informed the staff about the danger of polypharmacy which should not be used
to relief asthma. They recommended using over the counter tablet or nasal spray instead. Some
pharmacists even further informed the staff about steroid content and its side effect in
polypharmacy.This indicated that most of drugstores awared of an inappropriateness of
polypharmacy dispensing and concerned about the safety of public in drug consumption.
This study showed that even though the drugstores were located in Bangkok which is the
capital and the most civilized city of the country, there still exist a number of cases of asthma
polypharmacy dispensing as evidenced by drugstores in Bang Phlat. The focal point is the finding
of the distribution of polypharmacy containing steroid, a controlled substance, without prescription.
It is an inappropriate usage of steroid drug; unnecessary use and for wrong purpose of treatment.
For this reason, the Department of Public Health should be more tightly enforcing the steroid
regulation, especially, to prevent a case of polypharmacy dispending from a drugstore operating
without a pharmacist on duty and a case of steroid dispensing without prescription. To improve the
safety of drug usage among public and also to increase the public awareness of risk and harm form
steroid in polypharmacy, the Department of Public Health should publish and advertise to educate
public about the side effects of steroids. And also at university undergraduate level, a health related
class should be required for graduation in order to strengthen the knowledge in this field for young
people who are the future of our country.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
The author sincerely thanks Research and Development Institute, Suan Sunandha Rajabhat
University, Bangkok, Thailand for partially financial support. We thanks to students whom study in
Department of Aesthetic Health Science and Department of Applied Thai Traditional Medicine,
Faculty of Science and Technology, Suan Sunandha Rajabhat University for help us as good
volunteers to collecting samples and useful data.
Page 99
Page 100
HSP30-3
Page 101
HSP45-4
Page 102
HSP46-5
Page 103
HSP57-6
Page 104
HSP62-7
Page 105
HSP67-8
Page 106
HSP83-9
Page 107
HSP101-10
INTRODUCTION
Rickenella and Mycena are very similar genera by sharing the same macroscopic
characters, only microscopic characteristics are able to separate these two genera. Pileus trama of
Rickenella is not reaction with Melzers reagent (giving an inamyloid reaction) while Mycena is
reaction with Melzers reagent (giving a dextrinoid reaction) by turning from yellowish to reddish
brown color at pileus trama or lamellae trama. Basidiospore of Rickenella is inamyloid while
dextrinoid in Mycena. Rickenella fibula is well-known from Europe, Canada, USA and Japan
(Antonin and Noordeloos, 2004: Bougher and Syme, 1998: Smith, 1947) but it has never been
reported from tropical or Southeast Asia. This study was proposed a new record of Rickenella cf.
fibula from Thailand and Southeast Asia. The specimen was found on moss in evergreen mountain
of Khao Kaew at Khao Yai National Park in 2010.
MATERIALS AND METHODS
Raw Material
Mushroom was collected on leaves litter from dicotyledonous tree in evergreen mountain
of Khao Kaew at Khao Yai National Park in 2010 by T. Boonpratuang, T.W. Flegel, A.
Wiriyageerapipat and P. Promkiam-on. Mushroom and it substrate was slowly dried at 40-50C by
food dehydrator for 8 hours then was stored in plastic box with label, and was sealed by plastic bag.
The specimen was protected them from pest damaged by frozen specimen in box into freezer -20C
Page 108
Sample Preparation
Macromorphological features were recorded from fresh material, documenting all aspects
of basidiome (mushroom) size, shape, colour, surface, texture and odor (Hemmes and Desjardin,
2002). Colour of basidiomes were described in daylight by using the colour guide by Kornerup &
Wanscher (Kornerup and Wanscher, 1963). Basidiomes was illustrated with pencil, and digital
photographs when possible. Dried specimen was used for analyses of micromorphological features,
wherein all cell types and tissue types were described in detail. Head, stipe and base were dissected
by using a razor blade. The dissecting portion was rehydrated in 95% ethanol followed by distilled
water, 3% KOH or Melzers reagent (Largent and Watling, 1977). Microscopic structures were
measured with ocular micrometer and illustrated with aid of a drawing tube attached to an Olympus
BX51 compound microscope. The size, shape, location, organization, and chemical reaction of
each cell type and tissue were documented (Desjardin et al., 2000).
RESULTS
The identification of this species was indicated into a new record of Rickenella cf. fibula of
Thailand and Southeast Asia.
Macroscopic morphology
Pileus: 5-7 mm diam., convex to campanulate, mostly umbonate but rarely umbilicate disc,
pulvinate, dry, sulcate, pileus beyond lamellae, orange disc and creamish orange over all, paler
color when age. Pileus-context: 0.5 mm, orange color. Lamellae: deeply decurrent, 14-16
lamellulae, series, cream color both edge and face, thick, distant. Stipe: 0.5 0.7 mm. wide 10
25 mm. central, cylindrical, fistulose, cream to pale yellow, translucent, smooth, dry, enlarge base.
Substrate: soil. Habitat: living among living moss. Habit: Scattered to caespitose.
Microscopic morphology
Basidiospores: 6 7 (9) 3 4 m, subglobose to ellipsoid, hyaline, smooth, thin-walled,
inamyloid. Basidia: 15 28 5 7 m, 24spores, clavate, hyaline, smooth, thin-walled,
inamyloid. Basidioles: 10 18 4 5 m, clavate, hyaline, smooth, thin-walled, inamyloid.
Pileipellis consisting with cutis of repent hyphae, monometic hyphal system, hyaline, smooth thinwalled, inamyloid, clamp connection presented. Pleurocystidium: 8 32 m, clavate to ventricoserosetate, hyaline, smooth, thin-walled, inamyloid. Cheilocystidia: absent. Lamellulae trama:
divergent, consisting with generative slim hyphae and inflated hyphae, hyaline, smooth thin-walled,
inamyloid, clamp connection presented.
Stipitipellis: consisting with parallel layer of repent hyphae 4 5 m, hyaline, smooth,
thin-walled, inamyloid and giving arise numerous of Caulocystidia. Caulocystidia: 35 55 7 12
m, clavate, Stipe trama consisting with inflated hyphae 8 15 m, clavate to cylindrical, hyaline,
smooth, thin-walled, inamyloid.
DISCUSSION
This species was described close to Rikenella cf. fibula because most of macromorphology
and micromorphology were similar but only one microscopic feature was different (Antonin and
Noordeloos, 2004: Bougher and Syme, 1998: Smith, 1947). Type species consisted of scattered
pileocystidia while absented in Thai species. This species might be described a new species of
Rikenella because the point of pileocystidia is an important taxonomic character. This study need to
confirm with loaning type specimen from oversea and molecular information will be included for
future analysis.
Page 109
Photo and illustration of Rikenella cf. fibula 1) Basidiomes with moss, 2) Basidiospores,
3) Basidia and basidium with basidioles, 4) Basidioles with clamp connection, 5) Pleurocystidium,
6) Stipe trama and Caulocystidia, stipe hyphae with clamp connection. Bar 1 = 10 mm, 2 6 = 10
m. Original code: TBP1252 = BBH1684. Photoed and illustrated by Thitiya Boonpratuang.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
Dr. Scott Readhead was acknowledged for his value suggestions on the concept of genus
Rikenella. The Center for Genetic Engineering and Biotechnology (BIOTEC) were thanked for
financial support under BRN program and RI program (P-11-00490). BIOTEC Bangkok
Herbarium (BBH) was thanked for herbarium examination. Khao Yai National Park and
Department of National Parks, Wildlife and Plant Conservation were thanked for permission of
surveying and collecting fungi in Khao Yai National Park.
Page 110
Page 111
HSP103-11
Page 112
HSP186-12
Page 113
Page 114
RESULTS
Table 1 Baseline characteristics
Characteristics
Patients Receiving
Treatment (N=132)
p-value
Capsaicin
(n=69)
Placebo
(n=63)
Sex (male/female)
23/46
15/48
0.227
49.5
47.9
0.523
24.6
24.3
0.739
Diagnosis
11(20.4)
4(8.0)
37(68.5)
43(86.0)
Capsaicin
- others (%)
6(11.1)
3(6.0)
(n=69)
Placebo
(n=63)
Before
5.54 + 2.19
5.67 + 2.01
0.630
week 1
4.32 + 2.11
4.72 + 1.53
0.261
week 2
4.08 + 1.95
4.14 + 1.53
0.878
Frequency of pain
- sometime (%)
0.095
0.080
19(27.9)
26(41.9)
20(32.3)
week 3
3.36 + 1.74
4.25 + 1.62
0.019*
14(20.6)
16(25.8)
week 4
2.94 + 1.66
3.83 + 1.74
0.024*
45(72.6)
0.113
32(46.4)
31(49.2)
0.679
Analgesic taking
(%)
8(13.8)
9(17.3)
0.611
activity (%)
- all the time (%)
p-value
* Sig.(p<.05)
Page 115
DISCUSSIONS
Capsaicin was superior to vehicle
only in providing pain relief on the VAS
scores at week 3 and week 4. The PGA
scores showed that they felt better at week 1,
week 2, and week 3. The satisfaction of
treatment outcome in capsaicin-treated
patients was significantly more than the
vehicle-treated patients. These results imply
that there are beneficial effects of 0.025%
capsaicin roll-on for chronic musculoskeletal pain. These findings also pertain to
topical capsaicin cream or plaster, as per a
systematic review by Mason et al. (2004).
Even though the pain symptoms were
relieved, the PGA scores at week 4 were not
different. There may be external conditions
unrelated to the capsaicin therapy which
contribute to PGA scores.
The local adverse events, burning
sensation occurred in the 15 patients (27.1%)
of capsaicin treated patients. Since the
adverse event rated high, about one third of
patients, Bandolier (2005) commented that
topical capsaicin was an unlikely first or even
second
choice
for
treatment.
The
contamination of the patient's environment
(clothing, bedding, contact lenses, etc.) might
be associated with burning sensation. Poor
patient compliance with these products has
also been cited as a likely contributor to
limited efficacy (Altman and Barkin, 2009).
The formula could possibly be improved to
reduce side effects. There are also lowconcentration
capsaicin
formulations
(0.0125% capsaicin) (Kosuwon et al., 2010).
In other dosage form, a high-concentration
single-administration capsaicin 8% patch
which was recently approved in the EU and
USA, was designed to rapidly deliver
capsaicin into the skin while minimizing
unwanted systemic or environmental
exposure of capsaicin to patients (Anand and
Bley, 2011). The modified capsaicin
structures should be developed for improving
the analgesic effectiveness with minimal
unwanted side effects (Rusterholz, 2006).
p-value
(n=69)
Placebo
(n=63)
Before
3.18 + 0.73
3.03 + 0.73
0.378
week 1
3.57 + 0.57
3.19 + 0.48
0.008*
week 2
3.83 + 0.53
3.18 + 0.68
<.001*
week 3
3.62 + 0.70
3.21 + 0.59
0.031*
week 4
3.83 + 0.75
4.00 + 0.75
0.690
* Sig.(p <.05)
Side effect
The local adverse event reported
during the 4-week treatment with
capsaicin, 15 patients (21.7%) had
transient burning sensation, one patient
had skin rash, and one patient had itching at
the sites of drug application but none
withdrew for these reasons. Burning
Page 116
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
This study was supported by Faculty
of Abhaibhubejhr Thai Traditional Medicine,
Burapha University, Thailand. Thank you Dr.
Ronald Markwardt for sparing his valuable
time in editing this report.
Page 117
Page 118
HSP187-13
Page 119
Page 120
HUO120-1
Page 121
Page 122
METHODOLOGY
Research Design
To answer the research questions, a
pre-test-post-test experimental study was
conducted. It involved three experimental
groups based on the three types of written
corrective feedback treatment, which were
direct corrective feedback (DCF), indirect
corrective feedback (ICF), and coded
corrective feedback (CCF), and a control group
that received no written corrective feedback.
All groups were given a pre-test (at the
beginning of the semester) , an immediate
post-test (right after the first treatment was
given) and a delayed post-test (at the end of the
15-week semester) to determine the effects of
the treatment.
Participants
The study was done at Assumption
University in academic semester 1/2011. Four
sections of academic English I students were
randomly assigned for the study. Originally,
there were 112 students divided among the
four sections. However, due to exemptions,
withdrawals, and student nationality, only 68
Thai students were used for the analyses of
data. The four sections were randomly
assigned to the four groups.
The average age of the participants
was 18.93 years. Of the 68, 40 (57.4%) were
females and 28 (41.2%) were males. They
were all first year students coming from the
faculty of Business Administration (26.5%),
Arts (38.2%), and Communication Arts
(35.3%). They had an average of 12 years of
learning English prior to university. The first
language of all study subjects is Thai.
One-way
analysis
of
variance
(ANOVA) of the pre-test scores showed that
there were no significant differences between
the groups in terms of accuracy in the four
grammar areas under study: subject-verb
agreement (F (3,64) = 0.619, p = 0.605); verb
tense (F (3,64) = 0.237, p = 0.80); verb form (
F (3, 64) = 0.330, p = 0.804), and word form
(F (3,64) = 0.780, p = 0.51). Thus, it was
assumed that all groups were comparable.
ICF
Mean
(SD)
SVA 2.79
(2.12)
VT
2.07
(1.60)
VF
1.07
(0.71)
WF 1.36
(0.60)
DCF
CCF
Control
Mean
(SD)
3.26
(1.25)
2.10
(1.66)
1.30
(0.48)
1.40
(0.39)
Mean
(SD)
3.40
(2.19)
2.15
(1.11)
1.24
(0.54)
1.22
(0.43)
Mean
(SD)
2.72
(1.11)
2.45
(1.57)
1.18
(0.91)
1.53
(0.90)
Page 123
Page 124
Pre-test
Mean (SD)
Post-test1
Mean
(SD)
1.24
(1.07)
1.34
(1.02)
Post-test2
Mean
(SD)
1.83
(1.77)
3.33
(1.58)
1.59
.88 (.56)
(1.10)
2.49
2.16(1.28)
(1.51)
2.79 (2.12)
3.26 (1.25)
3.40(2.19)
2.72(1.11)
4
3.5
3
2.5
1.5
1
0.5
0
Pre-test
Post-test 1
Post-test 2
Indirect CF
Direct CF
Coded CF
Control
Page 125
Post-test 1
Post-test 2
Indirect CF
Direct CF
Coded CF
Control
Pre-test
Mean
(SD)
ICF
1.07(0.71)
DCF
1.30(0.48)
CCF
1.24(0.54)
Control 1.18(0.91)
Post-test1
Mean(SD)
Post-test2
Mean(SD)
0.56 (0.53)
0.34(0.46)
0.34(0.39)
0.80(0.94)
1.03(0.50)
1.15(0.68)
0.47(0.38)
1.65(1.01)
1.8
1.6
1.4
1.2
1
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.2
0
Pre-test
Post-test 1
Post-test 2
Indirect CF
Direct CF
Coded CF
Control
Page 126
Pre-test
Mean(SD)
ICF
1.36(0.60)
DCF
1.40(0.39)
CCF
1.22(0.43)
Control 1.530(.90)
Post-test2
Mean(SD)
0.91(0.62)
0.94(0.61)
0.51(0.60)
1.41(0.65)
1.8
1.6
1.4
1.2
1
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.2
0
Pre-test
Post-test 1
Post-test 2
Indirect CF
Direct CF
Coded CF
Control
Post-test1
Mean(SD)
0.38(0.32)
0.50(0.51)
0.30(0.31)
0.91(1.08)
Page 127
Page 128
Page 129
Page 130
Page 131
Page 132
The purpose of this paper is to examine insider trading behavior reaction to news
announcement by using firms listed on the Stock Exchange of Thailand during 2000 to 2008. By
employing event study approach, the results show that the information contents are significant to
insider buying but not to insider selling. In other words, only insider buying can create abnormal
returns. Moreover, trading before good news announcement shows significant abnormal return for
both selling and buying, in particular, insider buying followed by good news greatly impact on
prices.
Page 133
LITERATURE REVIEW
Earliest research about corporate
insiders focused its study on the performance of
insider trading. Most studies measured
abnormal returns during a period of insider
trading. References [7] [13] assert that insider
trades are profitable. There are significant
abnormal returns to insider ranging from 6 to
12 months after the transaction. More recent
researches report a similar result. Insiders gain
more than average profits from their
transactions [11] [2]. These imply that insider
trading contains information.
The disclosure news provides
information to market participants. Having
obtained information before news release, an
insider may take this opportunity to trade in a
favorable way. Such transactions may impact
the price of the security. Many previous
researches have studied insider trading toward
certain public events. To illustrate, [9] [8] find
information leakage before merger and
acquisition announcements. Reference [6]
report that insider trades are larger after
earnings disclosures and become a profitable
manner; selling (buying) stocks after good
(bad) announcements. Reference [5] find no
significant relationship between timing of
insider trading and subsequent announcements.
However, the findings of [12] [4] show that
insider transactions can gain benefits from
voluntary disclosures.
MATERIALS AND METHODOS
Raw Material
The source of insider trading data is
the SECs Form 59-2 (corporate insider) and
Form 246-2 (large shareholder). Both reports
contain all transactions by insiders which are
daily provided through the SECs website. The
study period covers from January 2000 to
December 2008. The news reports and the data
of securities market are obtained from
SETSMART. This database is a main source of
financial data provided by the SET.
We investigate buying and selling of
common shares in listed firms. Our sample
includes complete and valid transactions.
Following these adjustments, the numbers of
observations remain 29,752 transactions from
(1)
AARt =
1
N
ARit
i =1
(2)
t2
(3)
Page 134
CAAR(t1, t 2)
(CAR(t1, t 2) ) n
(4)
RESULTS
This section reports three main results
according to our hypotheses. We show three
groups of insiders which are all types of insider,
corporate insider, and large shareholder. The
buying and selling activities are separately
presented.
H1: The relation of cumulative
average abnormal return (CAAR) to the
insiders buying is positive.
Page 135
(+1, +5)
(+1, +10)
(+1, +20)
(+1, +30)
Sample size
Buy
Corporate insider
Sell
Buy
Sell
Sell
-0.0840
0.8177
0.1766
0.7474
0.2339
1.9779
( 0.0000) +++
( 0.0195) ++
( 0.0000) +++
( 0.0021) +++
( 0.0000) +++
( 0.7563 )
1.2680
0.5407
1.1919
0.5707
2.4913
0.5317
( 0.0000) +++
( 0.0000) +++
( 0.0000) +++
( 0.0000) +++
( 0.0000) +++
( 0.1324 )
2.2100
1.2583
2.1252
1.2875
3.0707
1.1713
( 0.0000) +++
( 0.0000) +++
( 0.0000) +++
( 0.0000) +++
( 0.0000) +++
( 0.0168) ++
2.8610
1.8112
2.7769
1.8787
3.6640
1.3607
( 0.0000) +++
( 0.0000) +++
( 0.0000) +++
( 0.0000) +++
( 0.0001) +++
( 0.0191) ++
14,866
14,886
14,035
13,144
831
1,742
Large shareholder
Buy
Page 136
(+1, +5)
(+1, +10)
(+1, +20)
(+1, +30)
Sample size
Buy
Sell
Buy
Sell
Buy
Sell
-0.5099
1.6831
-0.7337
0.0118
1.1189
0.6895
( 0.0000) +++
( 0.0000) +++
( 0.9191 )
( 0.0000) +++
( 0.0000) +++
( 0.0023) +++
2.9065
-0.7760
-0.2121
2.0895
0.8062
-0.5127
( 0.0000) +++
( 0.0000) +++
( 0.1772 )
( 0.0000) +++
( 0.0004) +++
( 0.0175) ++
4.4588
-0.5515
0.2158
3.7820
1.1564
-1.2371
( 0.0000) +++
( 0.0250) ++
( 0.3117 )
( 0.0000) +++
( 0.0021) +++
( 0.0007) +++
5.8769
-0.0805
0.0776
4.8808
1.4897
-1.8034
( 0.0000) +++
( 0.7859 )
( 0.7837 )
( 0.0000) +++
( 0.0012) +++
( 0.0001) +++
5,516
5,148
4,792
6,250
1,973
2,004
(+1, +5)
(+1, +10)
(+1, +20)
(+1, +30)
Sample size
Corporate insider
(news in the right direction)
Corporate insider
(news in the wrong direction)
Corporate insider
(news in the neutral direction)
Buy
Sell
Buy
Sell
Buy
Sell
1.5593
-0.5444
0.0189
1.0704
0.5643
-0.4946
( 0.0000) +++
( 0.0001) +++
( 0.8707 )
( 0.0000) +++
( 0.0002) +++
( 0.0027) +++
2.7364
-0.5690
-0.1590
1.9267
0.6256
-0.5879
( 0.0000) +++
( 0.0024) +++
( 0.3097 )
( 0.0000) +++
( 0.0058) +++
( 0.0077) +++
4.3004
-0.2960
0.3084
3.5749
0.9420
-1.1928
( 0.0000) +++
( 0.2399 )
( 0.1513 )
( 0.0000) +++
( 0.0142) ++
( 0.0011) +++
5.6663
0.3495
0.2045
4.6935
1.3045
-1.7136
( 0.0000) +++
( 0.2565 )
( 0.4759 )
( 0.0000) +++
( 0.0056) +++
( 0.0001) +++
5,173
4,517
4,500
5,531
1,859
1,778
(+1, +5)
(+1, +10)
(+1, +20)
(+1, +30)
Sample size
Large shareholder
(news in the right direction)
Buy
Sell
Large shareholder
(news in the wrong direction)
Buy
Sell
Large shareholder
(news in the neutral direction)
Buy
Sell
-0.6141
3.4099
-1.8277
-0.0909
1.4248
2.6486
( 0.0000) +++
( 0.0001) +++
( 0.8827 )
( 0.0011) +++
( 0.0079) +++
( 0.3587 )
5.2808
-1.9719
-0.9741
3.1159
3.5933
-0.0037
( 0.0000) +++
( 0.0006) +++
( 0.2690 )
( 0.0000) +++
( 0.0041) +++
( 0.9962 )
6.6700
-2.0275
-1.1140
5.0871
4.4643
-1.5373
( 0.0000) +++
( 0.0127) ++
( 0.3118 )
( 0.0000) +++
( 0.0081) +++
( 0.2747 )
8.8166
-2.5649
-1.7446
6.0611
4.3417
-2.4118
( 0.0000) +++
( 0.0057) +++
( 0.2067 )
( 0.0000) +++
( 0.0394) ++
( 0.1520 )
343
631
292
719
114
226
Page 137
Page 138
Page 139
Page 140
Years
Recovery
Motorcycles
Cars
Motorcycles
Cars
2001
17,546
3,302
4,217
344
2002
18,736
3,200
3,909
306
2003
18,950
2,747
2,818
230
2004
15,810
3,048
2,410
198
2005
17,523
2,820
2,832
194
2006
20,478
2,841
2,686
186
2007
19,853
2,976
3,038
241
2008
20,039
2,712
3,588
272
2009
21,039
3,043
3,676
257
14,846
1,196
2,818
192
Average 9 years
18,705
2,972
3,168
248
20,310
2,910
3,434
256
The objective of this research is twofold. First, we want to explore existing anti-theft or
other protective devices for motorcycles which are commonly used. Secondly, we want to examine
the motivations that lead to motorcycle theft.
METHODS
In this research we interviewed of 19 prisoners at Sara Buri Provincial Prison and Bangkok
Remand Prison. These prisoners are highly-skilled and keen in motorcycle theft. Additionally, we
also interviewed 3 police officers who were deputy superintendents of investigation departments of
the police stations.
Page 141
Page 142
Fig. 2 Positions of the Electrical System Lock and the Steering Lock
2. Main Stand Lock: The motorcycle owner uses some kind of lock to lock the main stand of
the motorcycle. To lock the main stand is to immobilize the motorcycle. In the locked position, the
front wheel will be raised from the floor by the main stand (Fig.3).
Page 143
DISCUSSION
According to the literature, the crime is related to the economy, discrimination or social
inequality. But if we pierce down to the theft of motorcycles which is part of the crime it is found
that there is a difference. The most important motivation of motorcycle theft is not related to the
economy, discrimination or social inequality. The result of interviews showed that, Low risk of
arrest is key motivation for motorcycle theft with the highest respondents of 17 people. There are
Page 144
CONCLUSION
Motorcycle theft is a result of many motivations. Low risk of being arrested is most
important motive and the second is easy to steal. If we want to reduce the number of motorcycles
stolen, the first thing is required to reduce these motivations. To reduce the motivation of low risk
of arrest is difficult because the nature of motorcycle enables the thieves to escape and hide easily.
The best ways to reduce the opportunities for theft are parking a motorcycle in an appropriate area
where there are security guards, lighting or crowded area can reduce the chances of theft. The ease
of stealing is dependent on the quality, type and amount of the lock. There is perfect of anti-theft
lock. The time required and difficulty to steal will increase if the owners take good care and lock
their motorcycle property.
Page 145
Page 146
HUO27-7
Page 147
Page 148
Page 149
Page 150
Page 151
Page 152
Page 153
Page 154
Development,
Marsh, Ian, 2000, Sociology: Making Sense of Society, England, Prentice Hall.
Martinussen, John, 1997, Society, State and Market, Zed Books Ltd, London& New Jersey
McClelland, David. 1964, The Business Drive and National Achievement, p.161-173 In Amitai
Etzioni and Eva Etzioni (eds) Social Change, New York, Basic Books.
McMichael, Philip, 1996, Development and Sosial Change: A Global Perspective, New York, Pine
Forge Press.
Preston, P.W., 1996, Development Theory An Introduction, Blackwell Publishers, Oxford, UK.
Sassen, Saskia, 2003, How Globalization Changes the Role of the State, University of Chicago
So, Alvin Y, 1990, Social Change and Development: Modernization, dependency, and World System
Theories, United States, Sage publication.
Sharif, Varizi Manouchehr and Rassafi, Amir Abbas, 2003, Globalization and Sustainable
Development: European Experience, Sharif University of Technology, Iran
Williamson, John. Did the Washington Consensus Fail? Outline of Remarks at CSIS. Washington
DC: Institute for International Economics, November 6, 2002. Available from: URL:
http://www.cid.harvard.edu/cidtrade/issues/washington.html.
Page 155
HUO167-8
Page 156
.793
Approx. Chi-Square
df
Sig.
Cronbachs alfa=0.931
7595.657
105
.000
The Table 1 highlights the results of Kaiser-Meyer-Olkin (KMO) and Bartletts test of
sphericity. The KMO test measure of sampling adequacy equal to 0.793 vividly reveals that data is fit
for factor analysis.
Bartletts test of sphericity (7595.657)
further corroborates our findings. The value of
Cronbachs alfa is 0.931.The naming of
Page 157
Name of statement
Lack of competencies in
quality management
Lack of training to
implement
quality
management
.829
Lack
of
relevant
information to identifying
potential areas of quality
improvement
Lack of a company-wide
definition of quality
Lack of competencies to
implement
quality
management
Frequent turnover of
employees
Lack of knowledge
Geographical distances
from suppliers
.836
Difficulty
acceptable
standard
Lack
of
commitments
to
adopt
quality
quality
Factor loadings
Eigen Value
4.019
.863
.585
24.154
3.623
21.731
3.260
15.091
2.264
.762
.750
.647
.646
.779
.715
.911
High
cost
of
implementation
Inadequate resources to
employee TQM
.817
.826
of
.724
Per cent
variance
26.792
.803
Page 158
Name
factor
of F-value
d
f
Level
of
significanc
e
.042
Lack
of 2.755* 3
*
competencies
in
quality
management
.049
3
Difficulty to
adopt
acceptable
quality
standard
Lack
of 2.902* 3
quality
*
commitment
s
Lack
of 3.339* 3
*
planning and
resources
Note: ** indicates 5 per cent
significance
Page 159
.986
.035
.020
level of
Page 160
Page 161
HUO52-10
Page 162
Page 163
Page 164
Page 165
Page 166
Page 167
Page 168
Page 169
Page 170
Page 171
Nationality
Chinese
Filipino
New Zealander
Indian
Australian
Thai
NS
35%
70%
85%
10%
85%
5%
NNS
65%
30%
15%
90%
15%
95%
Table 2 demonstrates the students comprehensibility level regarding the recordings they
heard in the intelligibility test. The results indicated that the two native speakers of English from
New Zealand (20%) and Australia (35%) were rated most difficult to understand. On the other
hand, the Thai speaker of English (5%) and the Indian speaker of English (5%) were rated very
difficult to understand. It is interesting to see that only 5% of the students rated the Australian
voice to be the easiest to understand and the New Zealand pronunciation, another native model,
was not found to be the easiest to understand (15%). In this study, the Thai speaker of English was
rated as having the easiest voice to understand (45%). The other non-native pronunciation models
were rated easier than native ones the Indian (30%) and the Chinese (20%).
Statement No.
3
4
New
Indian
Zealander
20%
5%
1
Chinese
2
Philippine
5
Australian
6
Thai
10%
15%
35%
5%
20%
55%
30%
5%
20%
45%
20%
25%
25%
40%
25%
15%
10%
20%
35%
25%
20%
15%
30%
5%
45%
Page 172
The following section is the responses of students in relation to their attitudes towards
native and non-native speakers of English.
1. Do you want to learn English pronunciation with native or non-native English teachers? Why?
The majority of students responses were in favour of the native English teachers. They
were of the opinion that they would rather learn English pronunciation with native speakers of
English rather than non-native speakers of English because they believed native speakers were the
owner of the English language; therefore, they would have clear English pronunciation. They also
thought that native speakers of English had correct English accent. Nevertheless, in their mind,
native speakers of English meant foreign nationals (Caucasian) in which this could mean any
European speakers of English. Only two students stated that they would rather learn English
pronunciation with Thai teachers as they believed that this would be easier for them in terms of
less misunderstanding and opportunities to ask questions.
Page 173
Page 174
Page 175
Page 176
This article has three main objectives. First, it presents the studies of globalization
including definition, its components, and advantages and disadvantages. In addition, it
demonstrates globalization affecting the global changes which are impact on Thailands
development strategies. Second, it indicates the similarities and differences between Security
Resources Management and Resource Dependence Theory. Last, it analyzes how to implement
Security Resources Management in term of Human Resources and Natural Resources. As a result,
local communities should make a decision on Security Resources Management.
Globalization consists of three components, namely economy, politics, and society. The
advantages of globalization are economic growth, steady state growth rates, voluntary solidarity
and increasing of life expectancy while countries might be confronting the risks of conflicts,
insecurity and inequality as disadvantages. However, the different levels of advantages and
disadvantages of countries depend on their contexts. Globalization brings some changes to
Thailand, therefore the development strategies should be generated to response these changes.
Security Resources Management or SRM consists of two dimensions: developing
resources and strengthening securities. The focal of SRM is that the security of resources should
be always considered by the decision makers at all levels including national, local, organizational,
and individual.
In order to implement SRM on Thailands strategies, the two dimensions matrix must be
analyzed on human resources, knowledge-based economy, societies, food and energy, economic
and cooperation in the region, and natural resources and environment. In this article, only human
resources and natural resources are analyzed because they play the most important roles on the
development.
Finally, it proposes that the national strategies should promote the protection of the
important natural resources from being undervalued and poorly safeguarded. It is also required
solving the problem that the local poor depend heavily on natural resources and exploit them in
unsustainable ways. Moreover, local communities should set up their objectives of development
under the interests and capabilities because they have knowledge and understanding of their own
resources management more than others.
Keywords: globalization, global change, resource dependence theory, security resources
management
Page 177
1970
1980
1990
2000
2009
Composite Index
28.99
33.04
38.21
58.04
64.15
Economic Globalization
28.66
34.18
39.64
59.91
69.55
Political Globalization
38.96
47.09
45.61
77.37
81.59
Social Globalization
22.30
22.04
31.61
42.65
46.62
Many studies indicate that globalization promotes some advantages to countries including
the economic growth, steady state growth rates, voluntary solidarity and increasing of life
expectancy.
Economic growth, the study of Mutascu and Fleischer (2011) reveals that if countries tend
to maximize the economic growth, they must globalize more. This connection is functional only
on medium and long term, but with a flat intensity. Dreher and Axel (2006) also conclude that
globalization increases economic growth. They develop an index of globalization covering its
three main dimensions: economic integration, social integration, and political integration. Using
panel data for 123 countries in 1970-2000 it is analyzed empirically whether the overall index of
globalization as well as sub indexes constructed to measure the single dimensions affect economic
growth. As the results shown, globalization indeed promotes growth. The dimensions most
robustly related with growth refer to actual economic flows and restrictions in developed
countries. Although less robustly, information flows also promote growth whereas political
integration has no effect.
Page 178
Page 179
Advantages:economicgrowth,
steadystategrowthrates,
voluntarysolidarityand
increasingoflifeexpectancy
GlobalChangesaffectingThailand
globaleconomicrecovery
changingglobalrulesand
regulations
developmenttrendtowards
amultipolarworldwhere
Asiahasaleadingrole
globalwarming
foodandenergysecurity
changingtechnology
ThailandsStrategies
promotingthejustsocieties
developinghumanresources
balancingfoodandenergysecurity
creatingtheknowledgebased
economy
strengtheningeconomicand
securitycooperationintheRegion
managingnaturalresourcesand
environmenttowards
sustainability
Page 180
DevelopingLevel
Secondly, SRM promotes all stakeholders to develop their resources and strengthen the
securities while the concept of power is used by managers to control over vital resources in RDT.
Thirdly, SRM aims to strengthen securities of resources while RDT focuses on the
reduction of environmental uncertainty and dependence.
Lastly, SRM is an interdisciplinary; whereas, RDT is related to organizational behavior
and organizational theories.
As mentioned above, SRM consists of two dimensions; developing resources and
strengthening securities as per Figure 2. In the other words, all development concepts or
approaches under SRM must recognize which levels the developing and security are. The progress
of developing and security must be always monitored periodically. For example, when an
economic policy is formulated such as a budget allocation to local community, it must aim not
only at the poverty reduction (as an approach of economic development) but also the economic
security or stability. The developing level might be in the D2 because the poverty (Warr, 2009) has
declined remarkably over time despite a steady increase in income inequality. The income
inequality is shown that economic security might be in the S1 only owing that economic stability
must be improved. It implies that resources are managed inefficiently. S3 is the ideal level of
security while each resource has its limitation for development. It is difficult to summarize the
most suitable level for development.
D3, S1
D3, S2
D3, S3
D2, S1
D2, S2
D2, S3
D1, S1
D1, S2
D1, S3
SecurityLevel
Page 181
Opportunitie
Objectives
Capabilities
Figure 3 Understanding State Behavior (Viotti and Kauppi, 2001: p. 75).
Page 182
Threats
Page 183
Page 184
Siriporn Poonruksa
Faculty of Nursing Science, Assumption University, Bangkok 10240, Thailand
Email: siripornPnr@au.edu
ABSTRACT
At present time to 2015, ten countries in ASEAN are moving towards ASEAN
community. Healthcare has been one of the priority sectors identified for accelerated economic
integration. Mutual Recognition Arrangements on nursing service would strengthen professional
capabilities by promoting the flow of relevant information and exchange of expertise, experience,
and best practices suited to the specific needs of ASEAN member countries. Now, the top five
customers in the private hospitals of Thailand are from countries that use English and Arabic
languages for communication. So nurses should be able to train the conversation in Arabic and
English languages effectively in order to convey message and provide nursing care that fit with the
customers need. In this study, Continuous Quality Improvement process and one group pre-test
post-test experimental design were mutually applied which aimed to compare English and Arabic
speaking proficiency of nursing staff before and after implementing a toll for the speaking skill
development. Participants composed of 19 nurses and non-nurses who were purposively
randomized into experiment group. Language handbook guideline was created based on
information deriving from staff nurses brain storming. The handbook details involved common
vocabularies and sentences in nursing practice including customer greeting, admission and
discharging, sign and symptom assessment, medication administration, and pre and post operative
care. Content validity was tested by three international interpreters who have been spoken two
languages. Pre-test of two languages was employed then the handbook was introduced to
participants for practicing their communication. After one month, post-test was conducted and the
results revealed that participants speaking proficiency scores after practicing with handbook
guideline were statistically significant increased. Moreover, they expressed high level of
satisfactory score towards language guideline book. The research result was recommended to a
nurse director to use this language handbook guideline continually for improving nursing staff
speaking skill.
Keywords: nursing staff, CQI, private hospital, English and Arabic proficiency, ASEAN
community
INTRODUCTION
In 2015, ten countries in Southeast Asia including Brunei Darussalam, Cambodia,
Indonesia, Lao People's Democratic Republic (PDR), Malaysia, Myanmar, Philippines, Singapore,
Page 185
Page 186
Page 187
Page 188
English
Good morning
Arabic
Thai
English
Arabic
Good evening
Until
()
Good evening
Try to ambulate
Press on the
wound when
coughing
Do you want
some help?
Clear liquid/
liquid diet
I am fine.
Regular diet
Good bye
Soup
Excuse me
Boiled rice
Please speak
slowly
Take a deep
breath
, ,
Yes
Ough
,,
No
Bleeding
Thank you
Until
Try to ambulate
No problem
Press on the
wound when
coughing
Page 189
Page 190
S.D
Pre-test
6.8947
19
2.18314
.50085
Post-test
8.9474
19
1.35293
.31038
t
4.444
Sig
.000*
Page 191
Page 192
Page 193
Page 194
Page 195
1. Introduction
Each individual has a unique human
thinking process. Psychologists, educators and
researchers are showing increased interest in
cognitive styles and learning styles, which are
the fundamental factors that enhance effective
learning for learners at all levels.
Creative thinking ability is one of the
most important skills that teachers must
develop in learners. Creative thinking skills are
critical to individual success and development
of the nation. Every individual possess creative
thinking ability. Psychologists and educators
have expressed various viewpoints on the
concept of creative thinking. Guilford (1950)
[1] proposed the concept of "divergent
thinking" in the 1950s, when he noticed that
creative people tend to exhibit this type of
thinking more than others.
Creativity has growing significance in
contemporary world, and received increased
Page 196
Variable
Creative Thinking
Fluency
Originality
Flexibility
Elaboration
Reliability
0.98
0.96
0.95
0.98
Page 197
3.2 Discussions
Creative Thinking Level
Scoring
Level
The research result showed that overall
Prathomsuksa
5 students have a moderate
0.00 19.99
Very Low
creative thinking score, with a moderate level of
20.00 39.99
Low
Fluency and Elaboration, and a low level of
Flexibility and Originality. The potential cause of
40.00 59.99
Moderate
low creative thinking level is the negligence of
teachers in focusing on developing students
60.00 79.99
High
creative thinking ability. In todays world,
creative thinking ability is very essential and can
80.00 100.00
Very High
be developed by using various approaches such
as teaching, training and creating an environment
which can enhance freedom in learning.
3. Results and Discussions
The creative thinking variable of
Fluency can be developed by teaching the skills
3.1 Result
of Word Fluency, Associational Fluency,
Expressional Fluency and Ideational Fluency.
Table 3 Creative Thinking Level of
Likewise, Elaboration can be developed by
Prathomsuksa 5 Students
teaching students the observational skill and the
step-by-step thinking method, which will
SD
Creative enhance the ability to think in a more detailed
Variable
x%
Thinking manner. However, Elaboration also depends on
Level
age factor (Aaree Phuntumanee, 2004)
[11].Furthermore, to improve Originality and
1. Fluency
42.31
15.76
moderate Flexibility, students should be taught to think
innovatively and generate new ideas. Teachers
2. Flexibility
26.42
10.55
low
can assist by teaching students to analyze
problems in different views and learn new
3. Originality
20.18
9.13
low
solutions to those problems.
4. Elaboration
41.01
20.13
moderate
4. Conclusion
Prathomsuksa
5
students
of
40.32
17.76
moderate
Total
Watsaweatachat School showed a moderate level
of creative thinking. Since Torrance Test of
Creative Thinking Figural Form A integrates
Picture Construction, Picture Completion and
According to the analysis, taken as a
Use of Parallel Line, students who are not good
whole, Prathomsuksa 5 students showed a
at art may find it difficult, hence the low result.
creative thinking score of 40.32, which is
However, the research results are limited only to
moderate. On an individual basis, the result
Watsaweatachat School.
showed a moderate level of creative
thinking variables of Fluency and
5. Acknowledgement
Special thanks to Assoc.Prof.Sittichai
Elaboration
of
42.31
and
41.01
Kaewkuekool
and Asst.Prof.Sopon Mejaleurn for
respectively,
whereas Flexibility and
words
of
advice.
Originality showed a low level of 26.42 and
20.18 respectively.
Page 198
Page 199
INTRODUCTION
The Historic city of Ayutthaya is considered to be property of outstanding universal value
and is listed as a World Heritage in 1991 under criteria III, bear a unique or at least exceptional
testimony to a cultural tradition or to a civilization which was living or which has disappeared. It
is extremely popular in Siamese architecture, and many examples can be contemplated throughout
the entire region. They were the evidence of the highest prosperity of Southeast Asian civilization
in the fourteenth to nineteenth centuries. The numerous palaces, temples, fortresses, as well as
architecture, paintings, sculptures, and literature, are testimonies to this great civilization. To
compete with the old capital, the kings of Ayutthaya richly endowed the monasteries, which
acquired gigantic proportions.
Unfortunately, after the city was completely abandoned due to Ayutthayan-Burmese war
which broke out in 1767, some brick and other material were dismantled and subsequently were
Page 200
Page 201
This study deals with a number of visitors who visited Ayutthaya without an interpreter,
along with a survey on heritage interpretation and proposed a standard for architectural heritage
interpretation. A database of tourism statistics and visitors analysis was used for determining and
analyzing visitor behavior in the historic site. One important thing is to analyze the interpretive
infrastructure currently available for tourism and identify gaps for proposing tourism or educationrelated documents and feasibility studies for possible future interpretation programmes and
services.
This research employed visitor surveys and observations to assess the factors that
significantly influence visitor behavior and motivation in-situ. The quantitative data derives from
visitor surveys and fits together with qualitative interviews with involved bodies which will be
analyzed.
RESULTS
From interpretive infrastructure surveying has revealed that the existing interpretation
infrastructures and facilities in the historic city of Ayutthaya were inadequate, and park officials
and residents were not trained to host visitors (Chotigavanit et al, 1995). The master plan cannot
make it effective. Visitors receive information piece by piece which is not linked together. That
means the existing interpretation programme does not work under any set of theme. The local
stakeholder was separated from the heritage managerial reality. The survey has also revealed the
current state of Ayutthaya is lack of Informative Management and Information service. All
existing interpretation were based on linguistic-historical information and not linked together.
Tourist facilities at the Ayutthaya Historical Park were located in Tourist Information
Center, The Tourism Authority of Thailand Ayutthaya branch. Unfortunately, only 1.5% of the
visitors visited here in 2008. Visitors were not aware of the existence of this center.
The ticket office responsible for The Fine Arts Department on each Historical site only
provided printed materials, postcards, souvenirs and films for sale. The officer could speak only
Thai and gave no more information service in depth. A free guided tour can offered only for Thai
non-business visitation in and around the Ayutthaya Historical site. However advance reservation
was required due to a lack of park staff. While a local guided tour offered by the local private
sector such as Tuk-Tuk drivers, part-time students, local sellers etc. Nevertheless, they must be
registered and trained in an academic approach
Roughly, 3.6 million visitors came to Ayutthaya in 2008, 11% of which who visited the
historical park. Amongst those visitors, a significant part of foreign visitors were Japanese at 41%,
European and American at 38%, and other Asian countries at 11% of all tourists. In other words, it
could be said that no more than 40% of foreign visitors came from English speaking country.
Page 202
Table 2 Percentage of visitors classified by Basic knowledge of Thai art and Architecture
The survey2 revealed one significant data. From a sample group of visitors, 90% of them
visited the Historical Park without any site interpreter who was engaged with the public
communication of information on the site. More than a half of them had no art or architectural
background when visiting the architectural remains of the Historic city of Ayutthaya by
themselves.
Because of the lack in public transportation service for roaming around the Historic site,
private cars and coaches were used for transportation, which usually took 3-6 hours or 6-12 hours.
That means visitors could decide which places to go, where to stop, and how to access the site by
themselves.
The survey allowed visitors to evaluate the existing interpretation programme and service
as well as to point out the limitation of heritage learning of the site. Signboards, friends/relatives
and site staff were important during their visit. But no information signboards were used by
foreign visitors, while guidebooks, friends/relatives and tourist guide were important. A
subsequent survey on informative materials at the site had revealed that only 50% of visitors
believed that the signboard was the most useful in helping them understand the site. It may be
because the signboards were not in their language, in a poor condition, or they had their own
guidebook. Less than half could grasp what was being explained about the site.
Table 3 Percentage of visitors classified by satisfying factors about information at the site
2
The visitors survey has done in 3 difference languages; Thai, English, and Japanese.
Page 203
Page 204
Table 5 Architectural heritage theme and place for visitation, classified by interest of the audience
The differentiation between each visiting thematic also reflected on how difficult it was to
access the visual information of remaining architecture and visitors background knowledge. However,
the lacking amount of remaining physical evidence might have lost some potential in visual
presentation of the architecture. In order to achieve architectural interpretation, it is indispensable to
increase intensity of visual information through both visual and simulated virtual architectural
information to increase realism and provide a more intuitive and immersive experience.
Visitors immediately perceived architectural objects through its visual information through all
their senses. However, they may not perceive normatively, but rather as experienced background and
set-up conditions for architectural creations that create emotional senses on their mind. As a result,
together with interpretive material as a combination between this may forge emotional and intellectual
connections between visitors and architectural heritage as described in Tildens identification of
interpretation.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
The preparation of this important study would not have been possible without the support, hard
work and endless efforts of a large number of people in the World Heritage Studies Programme in the
University of Tsukuba, Faculty of Architecture Assumption University, Thailands Fine Art
Department and Ayutthaya historical park office, the Tourist Agency of Thailand, UNESCO Bangkok
office, and particular a huge amount of financial support from the Rotary-Yomeyama scholarship.
Page 205
Page 206
Page 207
Page 208
Page 209
Europe
(abbreviation UL) and
Burapha University, Faculty of Engineering,
Department of electrical Engineering,
Thailand (abbreviation BUU).
Examples of problem-based tests in
introductory electrical engineering
Engineering students at BUU have
theoretical course in Electrical Circuits 1 in
the 4th semester followed by Electrical
Engineering Laboratory 1 in the 5th semester.
Usual exercise lasts 150 minutes, once per
week, 16 weeks. Main objectives of the
course are: (i) to acquire electrical instrument
skills, (ii) to handle electronics components
and practice wiring of simple circuits, (iii) to
present measured data numerically and
graphically as well as to analyze the data,
and (iv) to employ theoretical knowledge and
mathematical skills in practical situations.
Because of a large number of
students (more then 100), the exercises are
organized in teams of three students per
working place. Since they work in teams,
some students may not be motivated to
actively do the lab exercises because her/his
student colleague may do the most of the
required work. To test each student
individually, we introduced problem-based
test two times in a semester. Thus,
approximately every 7th exercise, each
student has 50 minutes to practically solve
given problem. Therefore, instead of 150
minutes work in a group of three students,
each student has 50 minutes to solve the
problem by her/himself emphasizing
practical work. To illustrate activity we
outline two typical example problems.
Problem 1
Suppose R1, R2 and R3 are 1k in a circuit
below. What are electrical currents I1, I2 and I3
measured by a multi-meter? Compare theoretical
and measured values of I1, I2 and I3.
physics
Theoretical values
(mA)
I1=
I1
VR1/R
1
I2=
VR2/R
2
I3=
I2
I3
VR3/R
3
Page 210
2.
Fill-in a correct answer in the blanks
according to the following questions:
2.1) Resistance color code of 470 is
Problem 2
Make a RL circuit using a function
generator and an oscilloscope (see the
scheme below). Set function generator to
generate AC sine signal with 5 V peak
voltage and frequency to 1 kHz. Suppose
R is 470 and an inductor is of an
unknown value.
1. Measure voltage on an inductor and
draw its signal and fill corresponding
values in blanks.
Page 211
flipuse
real
sub-
Problem 1
Use JK flip-flop to simulate circuits with
different functions. Save files created by
Yenka simulation software to your folder for
Page 212
213
CONCLUSIONS
Page 213
Page 214
Page 215
Page 216
INTRODUCTION
Thai Teacher TV project has managed for 2years. We did an internal quality assurance to
guarantee the quality of the project. We did project assessments continuously and self assessment
reports are 5reports for more information. Next, we synthesized a self assessment report to the
overall image to show the development of the project from assessment within tangibles and
continuously. This research is important step to get information for project development. The
result of this project had many advantages for project executive and project inventor for next step.
Page 217
source
variance
Satisfaction of approach
Between
channel
Groups
Within
Groups
Total
List of the presentations
Between
Groups
Within
Groups
Total
Worthiness of watching
Between
Groups
Within
Groups
Total
Activity of Teacher TV
Between
Network
Groups
Within
Groups
Total
Impact by this project
Between
Groups
Within
Groups
Total
totally satisfaction
Between
Groups
Within
Groups
Total
* P < .05 , ** P < .01 , ** P < .001
of SS
df
MS
Sig
3.160
1.053
1.879
.131
765.093
1365
.561
768.252
6.246
1368
3
2.082
444.650
1366
.326
450.896
4.839
1369
3
1.613
505.172
1366
.370
510.012
8.607
1369
3
2.869
635.186
1365
.465
643.793
6.068
1368
3
2.023
772.192
1365
.566
778.261
4.919
1368
3
1.640
374.786
1366
.274
379.705
1369
6.396*** .000
4.362**
.005
6.165*** .000
3.576*
.014
5.976*** .000
Table 2 Mean (M) and standard deviation(SD) of Satisfaction of approach channel follow with
part of satisfaction and total
part of
statement
satisfaction
1
Satisfaction of approach channel
2
List of the presentations
3
Worthiness of watching
4
Activity of Teacher TV Network
5
Impact by this project
total satisfaction
Page 218
M
3.6177
4.0055
4.0975
4.0774
4.0368
3.9518
SD
.74939
.57390
.61036
.68601
.75426
.52665
satisfaction
good
good
good
good
good
good
Page 219
total
verygood
good
verygood
good
neutral
times
Discussion
The total satisfaction was good. The worthiness of watching was the highest satisfaction ,
but the approach channel is the lowest because the presentation in project was worthwhile to
cause the idea or trend in the routine work for them ,but however still get into trouble the lead
presents by free TV which majority likes and can appreciate easy but the presents while
inappropriate suit is the cause of the lowest approach channel.
Every total satisfaction cause who have higher educate qualification will more satisfaction
than other, particularly the master's degree in education has higher satisfaction than other because
more Thai teachers get master's degree because of level master's degree education has higher
possibility master's degree can synthetic and analysis well. Teacher TV project effect was good
for audience should must have advanced stage skill in synthetic and analysis about something for
integrating or applying. Then, the project made many advantages for teacher and teachers
satisfaction.
In different status of audiences, the impact of this project found that the satisfaction of
the
executive
higher
than
undergraduate
teacher
and
parents
because
the executive is an advantage from the project most because of the list of Teacher TV project
emphasizes to develops a teacher throughout both of substance that covers every substance group
and limitation development teacher reduction and they can do all of provincial time throughout
no limited by local. This project can develop teachers. The executive can go to one level.
Moreover, the executive has still the trend or the substance or the way from the list in the project
can develop teachers. The results show that master's degree qualification has more satisfaction
teacher TV project than other because of the executive has important property assembles a
position must master's degree everybody qualification before reaches a position that the official
has noted for the confidence system to administrates the education and a parents who use
education of the school service that who come to the executive of master's degree at least.
The coefficient is related of the satisfaction with age finding that age of target group has
relation in approach channel. In the minus show that old age are lower satisfied in approach
Page 220
Policy Suggestion
.1After , there is completed innovation by first already, an institute should manage the
next by where is responsible affiliated with education foundation organization.
.2Teacher education foundation developments should fix to the policy , there is the
official letter from education foundation or local education to go to still , secondary education ,
and due to the school .
.3The public information should show in two ways. One is follow by government service
system. Another one is the privacy advertising.
.4The project should join with the institute produces an undergraduate , Science of
Education student , education science , and government officer institute emphasizes
undergraduate development , teacher student , have applying has from the project.
.5The project should supposed affecting with the human developing in primary
education, by might apply it to claim as same as the part of staff training and can apply to
the property of a teacher who has training.
.6The project should bring to the part of school quality assurance for the
development of teacher .
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
Grateful acknowledgement is given to department of research and applied
psychology, faculty of education , Burapha University.
Page 221
Page 222
3
Lecturer, NIDA centre of Integrated Tourism Management Studies (NITs)
Page 223
Page 224
Page 225
Negative outcomes from the interaction between ETAs and host residents
Local people in remote / rural areas not only suffer from influx of tourists but often suffer
from invasion of outsiders who may be foreigners or mainstream Thai who open their tourism
businesses and take advantages of local resources in rural areas. As a result, local residents are
invaded by outsiders who hold different values which disrupts their culture. According to Liu et al.
(2007) tourism development in developing countries or less developed destinations is usually
dominated by the outsiders, which in this research will be referred to as ETAs who have abilities
in terms of power, connection and finance to develop tourism and own large scale activities such
as accommodation, travel, tour, catering, etc.
Host communities often are the weaker party in interactions with their guests and service
providers (UNEP 2002; Shaw and Williams 2004). Therefore, if one culture from a stronger party
interacts with a weaker one, the local community often loses its own culture, such as language,
value of beliefs, tradition etc. (Shaw and Williams 2004). As a result, not only the local residents
may lose their culture but may also become confused about their identity (Andronicou 1979).
However, Maznevski (1995) argues that when people adapt to a new lifestyle or accept a new way
of thinking does not mean they have to forget their own lifestyle or erase their prior way of
interpreting situations.
According to Keen (2002) while tourism development in rural areas may bring benefits the
destination may face serious issues such as cultural conflict and culture shock from the intrusion of
ETAs. ;(1977)Downs and Stea Andronicou (1979) ) and Hofstede2001 (share a similar view by suggesting that
the interaction between host and ETAs can cause original residents to view their community
differently which can weaken their value of beliefs due to the forces of shared culture. Huang and
Stewart (1996) and UNEP (2002) also support this idea by pointing out that the movement of
outsiders into a certain destination or a community and due to their different in cultures may
influence and restructure the host culture. For example, the agriculture which was the basis of
traditional life is replaced by, and becomes secondary to tourism (Poostchi 1986;
Rattanasuwongchai 1989; Ryan 1991; Archer et al. 2005). In the case of Thai highlanders, these
people left their traditional career path (crop cultivation and traditional farming practices in
mountain areas) to work for the ETAs in tourism industry (Cohen 2006; Pinsarn 2006).
Not only is there a decline in traditional career paths, there is also a conflict from income
contribution (Cohen 2006; HADF 2007). When the ETAs such as tour agency bring in a group of
tourists to the community they either go trekking, stay in local homestay accommodation, or join
other local activities. The ETAs are usually the ones who manage the money gained from tourists
and they often pay the local residents unequally to one another. This often creates conflicts among
residents themselves or fights between local residents and ETAs over the actual benefits they
should get from the business. As a result of all the financial the sense of harmony in the
community may be destroyed due to the business competition among the local residents
themselves which often weakens the community (HADF 2007).
McMillan and Chavis (1986) point out that the differences in cultural backgrounds and
social values between residents and outsiders can cause a problem of fractionalisation in society
which divides people into groups. As a result, it can create boundaries between residents in a
community. An irridex model by Doxey (1975) indicates that the interaction between local
residents and outsiders from two or more cultural groups, as cross-cultural contact, may not always
necessarily give positive outcomes it however, can cause friction and irritation and increases the
gap between the cultures.
Moreover, due to their differences in lifestyles and social values, ETAs and host residents
may have different expectations for their shared community (Huang and Stewart 1996). Bochner
(1982) suggests that the interaction between host and ETAs can be a threatening experience,
participants may feel like outsiders, intruding, undermining values of the other culture. It has been
argued that the more frequent interaction between people of different cultural backgrounds, the
more negative the feelings that may develop (Hofstede 1980).
Page 226
Positive outcomes from the interaction between ETAs and host residents
It is widely recognised that the income from tourism is often much higher than what rural
people can earn from agriculture (Rajani 2002; Buadang 2004; Karabati et al. 2009), as a result,
working with ETAs has been accepted willingly in many rural areas in spite of its negative effects
(Poostchi 1986; Rattanasuwongchai 1998).
Despite its negative outcomes, it has been argued that the interaction between outsiders
and host residents may result in gaining knowledge of each other which can lead to enhancement
of attitudes towards each other and give them an opportunity to learn about the others culture and
foster social interaction (Bochner 1982). A number of scholars (e.g., Mann 1959; Nunez 1963;
Cohen 1971; Li and Yu 1974; Fulbright 1976; Robinson and Preston 1976; Bochner 1982; Pearce
1982a; Pizam 1982; Fisher and Price 1991; Pettigrew 1998; Uriely and Reichel 2000; Litvin 2003;
Reisinger and Turner 2003; Snow 2008) mention not only the negative outcomes from the
interaction between host and ETAs but also suggested that the higher the intensity of the same
contact may also results in the positive change in attitude toward hosts as well as postive outcomes
in terms of mutual appreciation, understanding, respect, tolerance and liking. Li and Yu (1974) and
Feather (1981) highlight that those who had been involved longer and those who had more time to
interact and became familiar with each other tend to develop more favorable attitudes to each
other. Cook (1962) and Thyne et al. (2006) explain that this interaction allows participants to get
to know and understand one another. Buck (1978); Bochner (1982); Pizam (1982); Uriely and
Reichel (2000) also believe that social interaction of people who have different backgrounds can
benefits host community, intrusion of outsiders not only restructure local culture but it also
improve and preserve locals traditional values.
As mentioned, people from different backgrounds tend to have different expectations
regarding their community due to their differences in lifestyles and social values. This however,
can have a positive and beneficial impact as when local people interact more with ETAs, they may
be inspired by successful careers, determination and independent thinking of ETAs, and may in
turn develop greater ambitions for themselves after they interacted, particularly after they have
worked with ETAs, that may help increase their determination to work harder in order to achieve
these ambitions (Davidson 1989). Moreover, the benefits from social interaction can result in
learning and adopting change to create and sustain social value (Dee 1998; Hogh 1998; Warren
1998). Despite the negative view of McMillan and Chavis (1986) about impact from interaction
between people with different cultural backgrounds and value of beliefs may result in
fractionalisation in society and boundaries between residents in a community. On the contrary,
Page 227
Page 228
Gender
Age
Hmong
ETA related job
Name
Gender
Age
Ying
Female
18
a food server
Pai
Female
19
a food server
Rongroj
Male
23
a guest house
Pee
Male
24
a campground
manager
supervisor
Mam
Female
27
a resort manager
Ae
Female
34
Somran
Male
Tong
Male
Sae-Ya
Male
25
a singer
a housekeeper/farmer Sit
Male
27
a tour guide
34
a porter/farmer
Nikom
Male
29
42
a homestay
Nong
Female
31
a homestay manager
manager/ trekking
guide
The focus group discussions explored perceptions of the Karen and Hmong regarding
impacts perceived from working with ETAs. The data from these focus groups were analysed,
using content analysis, and grouped together to identify the major themes relating to the
respondents experience of employment with ETAs a number of which had not emerged from the
preceding review of the literature. These findings together with the findings of the literature review
were used to create and design a questionnaire which was distributed to a sample of respondents in
the selected communities in order to identify the perceptions and attitudes of Karen and Hmong
respondents. The respondents were asked to indicate their level of agreement with a series of
statements relating to the impacts they perceive to result from their working with ETAs. Each
statement was evaluated on a five point Likert scale, where 1=strongly disagree and 5=strongly
agree.
A pilot study leading to a modification of the questionnaire was undertaken with a sample
of respondents who had experienced the role of ETAs in the expansion of tourism in Doi Inthanon
and were therefore able to relate to the questionnaire. The results from the pilot tests demonstrated
that some further clarification was required and also demonstrated that face-to-face interviews
would be essential as some of the respondents had difficulties in understanding the Thai language
and others did not like to read the questions, hence in order to gain as accurate information as
possible interviewer completion was essential.
It was clear from the focus groups and general observations in the villages that the
majority of both tribes are still employed in agriculture or other non ETA-related jobs.
Unfortunately no records or data exists as to how many of the Karen and Hmong in Doi Inthanon
work with ETAs. An estimate of made by the village headmen from both tribes indicated that
approximately 150 of their tribal members work for ETAs, representing approximately 15% of
each tribal community. Based upon this information a sample size of 100 respondents from each
tribe who work for ETAs was agreed. Logistical and pragmatic factors, not least the difficulty of
finding respondents at home during daylight resulted in a snowballing approach to sampling being
applied in order to reach 100 respondents from each tribe who were working with ETAs.
Data was analyzed using SPSS Version 16. Descriptive data including frequency, mean score
Page 229
Page 230
Page 231
Page 232
Page 233
Chinawong Sringam
Faculty of Management Science, Phranakhon Rajabhat University, Bangkok 10220, THAILAND
E-mail: csringam@yahoo.com
ABSTRACT
This research aims to investigate the knowledge management (KM) circumstances for the
local occupation development, and to construct a KM Model for the local occupation development
in Nonthaburi Province, Thailand. An action research technique emphasizing qualitative research
method was employed in the study. The target population comprised leaders and members of local
occupation groups. The research findings revealed that the KM circumstances of the local
occupation groups mainly covered the preservation and transmission of knowledge relating to local
wisdoms from ancestors and the creation of new knowledge. The group members learned and
shared their knowledge and experiences, and they also utilized the knowledge to develop their local
products. In relation to the KM model, a practical model detailing major steps and the relationship
of significant components was developed and proposed. In applying the KM model, local
communities and related organizations, both public and private sectors, needed to be concerned
with the philosophy of sufficiency economy, the community contexts and the community based
development.
Keywords: knowledge management, local occupation development, model construction
INTRODUCTION
The
development
of
local
occupations in local communities throughout
the country has been a major focus of Thai
government since 2001 as stated in the
Eighth National Economic and Social
Development Plan (1997-2001) (Office of the
National Economic and Social Development
Board, 1997). The government has set up the
national policy and strategies of developing
local communities using the community
based
approach
by
enhancing
the
opportunities for community people to get
involved in applying local wisdoms,
community resources and human capital to
conduct local occupations to earn their living
as well as to improve their quality of lives.
Page 234
Page 235
Page 236
Page 237
Page 238
Knowledge
distribution
and
utilization with the support of
community managerial resources
(4Ms) and local wisdoms followed
by a formative follow-up study,
results based supervision and
reinforcement by group leaders and
local authority officers
Evaluation according to the set-up
criteria, goals, and KPIs, results of
group performances, if achieved,
go on to the next cycle of
continuous development. But if
they are not achieved, they go
back to knowledge sharing step.
This can be conducted by using
measurement
tools
and
measurement techniques relevant to
occupation groups and community
contexts, conducted by both internal
members and external experts
Reporting which is not actually a
part of KM, but is a systematic way
of disseminating results of local
occupation development to internal
groups for mutual understanding; as
well as to external groups, business
networks and partners for further
business cooperation
The process of the knowledge management model for local occupation development is represented
on Figure 1 below:
Page 239
DISCUSSION
Knowledge management (KM) is
generally dealing with the management of
knowledge in related tasks and activities. It
mainly includes organizing, sharing and using
knowledge in order to create value of products
and services, and achieve competitive
advantage for an organization. In the study,
KM is applied to the development of local
occupations based on the community contexts
in terms of its readiness of resources,
especially human resources, and local
wisdoms. The main purposes of utilizing KM
in local organizations are to preserve and
transmit knowledge and local wisdoms
regarding local occupations for community
people to earn their living as well as to
maintain and modify the knowledge needed
for occupation development. In applying the
developed KM model, some guidelines are
advised. Firstly, the establishment of local
occupation groups is essential, and the
participatory cooperation of group members in
identifying guidelines of the group
management, regulations, benefits and
responsibilities and participation of the group
members is essential as well. Secondly, the
major steps of knowledge management to be
properly applied include knowledge creation
and
codification,
knowledge
sharing,
knowledge distribution and utilization. Lastly,
the measurement and evaluation system needs
to be conducted for the organizations further
improvement and/or for the continuous
development in the next cycle. After the
evaluation process, the official report, such as
annual report or fiscal year report, must be
well prepared and distributed to internal
groups and external groups for mutual
understanding
and
further
business
cooperation.
In applying the KM model step-bystep, group members should utilize effective
working techniques such as brainstorming,
Page 240
Page 241
REFERENCES
Bhusahas, A., 2004. Research for Developing and Improving the Community Knowledge
Management Mechanism: Num-Lang and Num-Kong Areas of Pangmapa District, MaeHongsorn. Office of the National Research Council of Thailand, Bangkok.
Department of Non-formal Education. 2005. Non-formal Education Management for Community
Strengthening and Poverty Overcoming. Rangsri, Bangkok.
Holsapple, C. W. and Joshi, K. D. 2001. An Investigation of Factors that Influence the
Management of Knowledge in Organizations, Journal of Strategic Information Systems
9(2/3): 235-260.
Knowledge Management. [Online]. [cited 2011 December 15]. Available from: URL:
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Knowledge capture
Laudon, K. C., and Laudon, J. P. 2002. Management Information Systems: Managing the Digital
Firm. 7th ed. Upper Saddle River. Prentice Hall, New Jersey.
Neuman, W. L., 2006. Social Research Methods: Qualitative and Quantitative Approaches. 6th ed.
Pearson Education, Inc., Boston.
Office of the National Economic and Social Development Board. 1997. The Eighth National
Economic and Social Development Plan (1997-2001). Office of the National Economic
and Social Development Board, Bangkok.
One Tambon, One Product. [Online]. [cited 2012 February 7]. Available from: URL:
http://www.otopcdd.com/index.php
Panshe, C., 2005. Research and Development on Life Library: Local Wisdom Knowledge
Management for the Development of Traditional Bakery of Kudee-Chean, Thonburi.
Thonburi Rajabhat University, Bangkok.
Philosophy of Sufficiency Economy. [Online]. [cited 2012 January 27]. Available from: URL:
http://www.reflectedknowledge.com/clients/GSB/sufficiency/sufficiency.htm
Phranakhon Rajabhat University. 2005. The Follow-up Study of Community Development Plan:
Bangyai District of Nonthaburi Province. Phranakhon Rajabhat University, Bangkok.
Praichanchit, S., 2006. Learning Process and Community Knowledge Management on Traditional
Culture and Local Wisdoms. Office of the National Research Council of Thailand,
Bangkok.
Puangchan, S. and Yakao, P., 2006. Local Wisdoms Knowledge Management of Wooden
Handicrafts of Ban-Luk. Lampang Rajabhat University, Lampang.
Simaruk, S., 2003. Knowledge Management Mechanism Development for Local Area
Development at Sub-district Level. Office of the National Research Council of Thailand,
Bangkok.
Turban, E., Rainer, R.K. and Potter, R. 2001. Introduction to Information Technology. John
Wiley & Sons.,Toronto.
Page 242
HUO109-28
INTRODUCTION
Social networking services (SNS) have become one popular kind of services on the
Internet from both personal computer and mobile users. According to a report by the comScore
Company in 2011, the SNS usage continues to grow rapidly, particularly the social networking
leaders such as Facebook, Twitter as well as LinkedIn (comScore, 2011). Facebook is the worlds
largest SNS with over 800 million users, Twitter and LinkedIn are now reach 160 and 100 million
users respectively. Furthermore, there is a new SNS from Google called Google+ which reaches
25 million users faster than any other social network in history. Currently, Google+ has 65 million
users. Boyd and Ellison (2007) studied the SNSs characteristic. Their work revealed that the SNS
allows users to generate their profile, interact with other users and traverse their list of connections
within the system. These make the SNS become enormous resources for capturing and storing
personal data.
The SNS users usually express themselves, exhibit their lifestyle, and share their interests
through interaction within the SNS. For example, sharing their contents to their friends and paying
attention on contents generated by others. These contents include texts, messages, photos, videos,
webpages, comments and places. The SNS has a function called Like which allows users to
Page 243
show their interests of the contents. Recently, Like is a very popular social function on the SNS.
It is used to display relationship between users and the contents they like. The relationship is
occurred when the users press the like button (Jin et al., 2011). The Like button in some SNS is
labeled as Favorite or +1. After pressing the Like button, the users interests will be captured
and stored in the system and the users can backtrack to see them later.
The expression of users interests by pressing the Like button can also be related with the
places where he or she likes. In 2010, the Facebook had released location based service called
Facebook Places. It allows the Facebook Fan Page to be tied with a locations information
(Oreskovic, 2010). Hence, many businesses which have the Facebook Fan Page can show their
places location to their customers by using this service. The customers can press Like to those
places while they are visiting the places immediately. The service does not only support the
contents on the Fan Page but also supports Events Page on the Facebook. These make the contents
with the location information on the Facebook are widely spread.
The contents with the location information can reflected the interests of user in tourism
domain when they are visiting the places and pressed Like button. The users interests stored in
the SNS system can provide personalized information in tourism domain. The users interests may
answer question about the places where the user likes (i.e., what kinds of place does the user love
to visit?). For example, the user who enjoys Japanese foods or shopping centers may like these
kinds of place more than others. Currently, the SNSs provide tools to retrieve the users interests
from their systems, e.g., Facebook Graph API which is very popular Facebook API (Ko, Cheek,
and Shehab, 2010). The API helps developers to manage information from the Facebook server
conveniently. In addition, it can also be applied with several programming languages.
Chatcharaporn et al. (2011) examined availability of places categories on the Facebook.
The examination found that the categories definition was too broad. It did not have specific
categories for tourism domain such as temple, aquarium, village, mountain as well as beach. It
may cause problems when users create the Place Page (the Facebook Fan Page with location
information), because they cannot find the suitable category for the places. Even though, the
Facebook has subtext (places metadata), but it may not provide correct categories for all places.
For example, Temple of the Emerald Buddha, which is one of the most popular destinations in
Thailand (Metreveli and Timothy, 2010) has Local Business category in both of the available
category of Place Page and the subtext field (Facebook, 2012). The temple should be in Temple
category. This problem makes identifying type of user's favorite places very difficult. To overcome
the mentioned problem, Foursquare might be a very interesting data source, because Foursquare
is one of the most popular location-based social networks. It has very up-to-date the places
information, which comes from more than 10 million active users (Ye et al., 2010).
Due to the fact that Foursquare is SNS which emphasizes on location based service, thus
it has more places categories than the Facebook. The places categories from the Foursquare
could be used to improve the incorrect places categories classification problem in the Facebook.
Thus, combining strength in finding users favorite places of the Facebook and strength in rich
places categories information of the Foursquare could create a novel method for finding the
correct places categories of users interest places. This method can be applied with a personalized
system called SMARP (Social network in Mobile Augmented Reality for Personalization)
(Chatcharaporn et al., 2011). The method could be utilized in the SNS stream manager component
of the SMARP system for extracting users interests in tourism domain.
The design and development of a SMARPs module called SNSCombiner is proposed in
this paper. SNSCombiner is a module for extracting users favorite places from the Facebook,
combining the places information between the Facebook and the Foursquare, and summarizing
the appropriate categories for the places. The module is used to support the SNS Stream Manager
component of the SMARP system to get additional users interests from the SNS. The output of
the SNSCombiner module includes users favorite places along with their categories.
This paper is organized as follows. Section 2 presents the SNSCombiners framework and
its four main components. The experimental evaluations are explained in Section 3. The last
section presents conclusion and future work.
Page 244
Page 245
Page 246
$likes =
array_values(idx(FBUtils::fetchFromFBGraph("me/likes?access_token=$token&limit=1
00"), 'data'));
Page 247
Page 248
Page 249
Page 250
This paper presents a novel method for improving the accuracy of place category
identification based-on users favorite places on the SNS. The improvement uses the combination of
the SNS such Facebook and Foursqaure to support each other. This paper also introduces
implementation of the SNS combination to a module called SNSCombiner. The main role of the
module is to collect the places data from the SNS and summarize information for assigning their
categories. The experimental results indicated that the hybrid approach is the best approach for
summarizing. It could provide the highest accuracy rate for almost all place categories. However, it
took the longest time to process the summarization.
The module will be used to plug with SNS Stream Manager component of the SMARP system
in near future. It also used to get more the users interests in tourism domain on the SNS. The users
interest information could be adopted with the other data mining techniques and location based
technology to provide the personalized information to the travelers.
Page 251
Page 252
Page 253
Page 254
H4:
Marketing communication has
a positive effect on practical service quality
H5: Marketing communication has
a positive effect on identity of Thai Lanna spa
4. Methodology
A two-stage methodology was applied
in this research. A mixture of both qualitative
and quantitative methods was used to provide
the necessary research results for triangulation
to improve internal validity and to achieve a
better understanding of the subject (Perry
1998) Following this,
Stage 1: Exploratory research
Exploratory research was conducted
through the use of two focus groups consisting
of eight respondents per group. Each group
was selected to form a homogeneous group
reflecting a range of the total study population
(Kitzinger 1995). Interview questions for the
focus groups were developed from the initial
research question and objectives. In addition
to this, results were taken from the literature
review in order to both obtain relevant
background information for a better
understanding of issues and to help define the
problem and develop hypotheses for
subsequent testing (Churchill & Iacobucci
2002). The data gained from the focus groups
was then used to refine and develop the final
model and to generate possible questions for
further research to be used in an online survey
in the next stage.
Stage 2: Explanatory research
The purposive sampling by control
characteristics of interest. A questionnaire was
developed based on both the literature and
exploratory study. The sample for the study
was comprised of foreigner tourists in
Chiangmai. The 1,100 respondents were
randomly assigned to respond to the
questionnaires with their reliability by
Cronbachs alpha which was higher than 0.70.
3. Research Hypothesis
H1: Marketing communication has a
positive effect on spa marketing value
perception
H2: Practical service quality has a positive
effect on spa marketing value perception
H3: Identity of Thai Lanna spa has a
positive effect on spa marketing value
perception
Page 255
Page 256
6. Conclusion
Research consistently shows that
customers often judge the quality of the
service they receive largely on their
assessment of the people providing the
service (Lovelock and Wright, 2002).
The result can found from the beginning
is marketing communication has a
positive effect on the spa value
perception in a practical service quality
and identity of Thai Lanna spa can
explain that the spa advertising and sales
promotion , word-of-mouth and good spa
image are a spa marketing instruments
communicate to the foreigner tourists in
Chiangmai , accept with George and
Berry, (1981) the service marketer should
constantly stimulate word-of-mouth
communications apart from using regular
advertising Communication includes
informing the customer in a language
they can understand (Parasuraman,
Zeithaml and Berry, 1985). It can make
them want to try spa service in
Chiangmai , It is a decision of how best
to communicate the product to target
audience and how to persuade them to
Page 257
Page 258
Page 259
Page 260
LP2
-The obligatory
subjects are
reasonable.
LP3
LP4
LP5
LP6
Male
150
3.63
0.81
Satisfied
Female
150
3.60
0.79
Satisfied
Male
150
3.39
0.68
Neutral
Female
150
Male
Neutral
3.41
0.73
150
3.56
0.69
Satisfied
Female
150
3.59
0.85
Satisfied
Male
150
3.29
0.77
Neutral
Female
150
3.09
0.92
Neutral
Male
150
3.27
0.78
Neutral
Female
150
3.20
0.79
Neutral
0.291
0.772
- 0.242
0.807
- 0.303
0.765
1.974
0.05
0.734
0.465
Page 261
Coding
LTM1
LTM2
LTM3
LTM4
SD
Students
satisfaction
level
3.66
0.78
Satisfied
150
3.55
0.86
Satisfied
Male
150
3.60
0.72
Satisfied
Female
150
3.67
0.76
Satisfied
Male
150
3.53
0.69
Satisfied
Gender
Male
150
Female
Female
150
3.51
0.70
Satisfied
Male
150
3.40
0.77
Neutral
150
3.57
0.75
Male
150
3.44
0.81
Satisfied
Female
150
3.45
0.88
Satisfied
Male
150
3.39
0.78
Neutral
Female
150
3.40
0.73
Neutral
Male
150
3.63
0.81
Satisfied
Female
150
3.77
0.80
Satisfied
Male
150
3.47
0.84
Satisfied
150
3.65
0.84
Female
LTM5
LTM6
LTM7
Satisfied
Sig
1.196
0.233
-0.852
0.394
0.166
0.869
-1.973
0.050
-0.143
0.892
-0.154
0.879
-1.581
0.116
-1.934
0.055
LTM8
Female
Page 262
Satisfied
Coding
Male
150
3.29
SD
Students
satisfaction
level
0.76
Neutral
Sig
1.034
0.302
0.363
0.717
2.119
0.035
0.648
0.517
1.594
0.112
LMT9
Female
LTM10
Neutral
150
3.19
0.80
150
3.28
0.77
150
3.25
0.82
Male
150
3.33
0.72
Neutral
Female
150
3.16
0.70
Neutral
Male
150
3.30
0.70
Neutral
Female
150
3.25
0.72
Neutral
Male
150
3.31
0.72
Neutral
Female
150
3.18
0.73
Neutral
Male
Female
LTM11
Gender
LTM13
Neutral
Neutral
Page 263
Page 264
Cronbachs Alpha
.8215
.8379
Page 265
Page 266
Page 267
Students
PN1
Full-time
Short-time
Full-time
Short-time
Full-time
Short-time
Full-time
Short-time
Full-time
Short-time
Full-time
Short-time
Full-time
Short-time
Full-time
Short-time
Full-time
Short-time
Full-time
Short-time
Full-time
Short-time
Full-time
Short-time
57
40
57
40
57
40
57
40
57
40
57
40
57
40
57
40
57
40
57
40
57
40
57
40
PN2
PN3
SaN1
SaN2
SaN3
SoN1
SoN2
SoN3
EN1
EN2
EN3
SD
4.70
4.60
4.30
2.95
4.58
4.38
4.44
4.58
4.25
2.88
4.40
2.55
4.81
4.70
4.33
4.38
4.63
4.43
4.65
4.70
4.75
4.65
3.04
4.25
0.46
0.50
0.73
0.99
0.57
0.63
0.63
0.55
0.71
0.52
0.73
0.90
0.34
0.64
0.74
0.71
0.56
0.71
0.48
0.46
0.43
0.48
0.53
0.81
Motivation
level
Very high
Very high
Very high
Neutral
Very high
Very high
Very high
Very high
Very high
Neutral
Very high
Low
Very high
Very high
Very high
Very high
Very high
Very high
Very high
Very high
Very high
Very high
Neutral
Very high
Sig
1.036
0.303
7.736
0.000
1.671
0.098
-1.109
0.270
10.974
0.000
11.158
0.000
1.184
0.240
-0.278
0.781
1.536
0.129
-0.520
0.604
1.112
0.269
-8.317
0.000
p < 0.05
Criteria: Motivation level (1.00 1.80: very low; 1.81 2.61: low; 2.62 3.42: neutral; 3.43
4.23: high; 4.24 5.00; very high)
Table 1 indicated that:
Both full-time and short-time students had very high motivation level in items PN1,
PN3 so there were not significant differences between them in these items (Sig >0.05). However,
full-time students had higher motivation than short-time students in item PN2 so there was a
significant different between them in this item (Sig <0.05).
Both full-time students and short-time students scored very high motivation level in item
SaN1 so there was not a significant different between them in this item (Sig >0.05). But, there
were significant differences between them in two items SaN2 and SaN3 because full-time
students score very high motivation while short-time students scored neutral and low motivation
(Sig <0.05).
For Social Needs factor, there were not significant differences between them in
Physiological Needs factor (Sig <0.05) because both full-time and short-time students scored very
high motivation level in 3 items SoN1, SoN2, SoN3.
Both full-time and short-time students had very high motivation level in two items
EN1, EN2 so there were not significant differences between them in these items (Sig >0.05).
However, full-time students had lower motivation than short-time students in item EN3 so there
was a significant different between them in this item (Sig <0.05).
Page 268
Page 269
PN1
PN2
PN3
4
5
6
SaN1
SaN2
SaN3
7
8
9
SoN1
SoN2
SoN3
10
11
12
EN1
EN2
EN3
Items
Physiological needs
The Vietnamese Studies Faculty locates at a convenience location.
The suitable learning program.
The lecturers have good teaching methods.
Safety needs
Vietnamese Studies Faculty is a reputed teaching place.
Help me find well paid jobs.
With flexible timetable.
Social needs
Can make me have more friends.
To improve my skills of teamwork.
To improve the knowledge and language.
Esteem needs
To bring the respect of others.
Can make me feel more confident.
Can bring me to higher standing in the society.
Page 270
Cronbachs Alpha
0.7383
0.7895
0.8979
0.7462
Page 271
Page 272
Page 273
RESEARCH OBJECTIVES
To study factors supporting the
establishment of learning organization for
governance officers and employees at local
administrative organizations in Singburi province.
To examine the characteristics of learning
organization for governance officers and
employees at local administrative organizations in
Singburi province.
To compare the characteristics of learning
organization for governance officers and
employees at local administrative organizations in
Singburi province when classified by gender, age,
education level, work position, workplaces, and
work experience.
To study the relationship between factors
supporting the establishment of learning
organization and the characteristics of learning
organization for governance officers and
employees at local administrative organizations in
Singburi province.
RESEARCH HYPOTHESIS
H1: There are no significant
differences in the characteristics of learning
organization for governance officers and
employees
at
local
administrative
organizations in Singburi province when
classified by gender, age, education level,
work position, workplaces, and work
experience.
H2: There is relationship between
factors supporting the establishment of
learning organization and the characteristics
of learning organization for governance
officers
and
employees
at
local
administrative organizations in Singburi
province.
RESEARCH FRAMEWORK
1. The independent variables consist
of personal factors (such as gender, age,
education level, work position, workplaces,
and work experience) and components of
knowledge process capabilities (knowledge
acquisition, knowledge creation, knowledge
storage, and knowledge transfer).
2. The dependent variables are
Senges fifth disciplines which are personal
mastery, mental models, building shared
vision, team learning, and systems thinking.
Page 274
R2
Adj
R2
Sig.
0.254
0.065
0.32
0.1950
.033
(Constant)
Knowledge
creation
Knowledge
storage
3.757
SE
B
Beta
Sig.
11.060
.000
-.192
.080
-.242
-2.406
.017
.199
.096
.197
2.071
.039
Page 275
RECOMMENDATION FOR
ORGANIZATIONAL PRACTICES
the results of this study present
beneficial information that could be used to
make improvements in organizational
practices. local administrative organizations
in Singburi province should focus on
supporting members from all organizational
levels to realize the importance of knowledge
management and learning organization. It is
necessary to improve communication and
participation by facilitating adoption of
learning organization dimensions at all
organizational levels. This would empower
all members in the organizations to take
action on learning to improve performance
and gain a competitive advantage. It is also
suggested to combine the significance of
knowledge management and learning
organization in the long-term vision and
objectives of organization and develop best
practices around them.
RECOMMENDATION FOR FURTHER
RESEARCH
There are significant opportunities to
broaden this research. First, this research
concentrated
on
local
administrative
organizations in Singburi province only,
future research should study different local
administrative organizations in other
provinces. Second, further research should
link between knowledge capabilities and
organizational performance. It is necessary to
understand the differences among knowledge
capabilities including firm level differences
and how this involves to organizational
performance. Third, an important area for
further research is to understand how
characteristics of the organizations culture
facilitate knowledge capabilities and learning
process.
Page 276
Page 277
Page 278
Year
Apr.-Jun.
Jul.-Sept.
Oct.-Dec.
2007
3,831,089
3,123,663
3,422,983
4,058,708
2008
4,326,793
3,549,567
3,380,301
3,327,559
2009
3,645,330
2,963,983
3,284,484
4,256,044
2010
4,659,750
2,899,778
3,761,459
4,615,413
(see in Table 1.1) The number of tourist arrivals in the first quarter and second quarter of
2009 were 3.64 million and 2.96 million, respectively. These figures were lower than during the
first two quarters of 2007 or 2008. In the third quarter of 2009 we see that the number of visitors is
similar to the number of visitors in both 2007 and 2008, suggesting that the worst was over. In the
fourth quarter of 2009, we saw more arrivals than in 2007 and 2008.
The first quarter of 2010 saw a significant increase of tourist arrivals, especially in January
and February. Related to the political disturbances during April and May 2010, the second quarter
arrivals of 2010 were low but not much lower than in the second quarter of 2009, which also was
characterized by riots and demonstrations. However, tourism rebounded strongly during the third
and fourth quarter of 2010, with arrivals higher than in any of the preceding years (Tourism
Authority of Thailand, 2011).
Considering the number of tourist arrivals and growth rate of tourist arrivals, it was found
that the majority of tourists are from Malaysia and Japan. This study can be used to compare with
the USA and the UK for making policy because of the difference in tourism volatility. The
sustainable tourism is also considered with regards to the policy for Thailand tourism future
development.
yt = + t + yt 1 + j yt k + t
j =1
Page 279
(1.1)
The Phillips-Perron test is a unit root test. It is used in time series analysis to test the
null hypothesis that a time series is I (1). It builds on the Dickey-Fuller test, but unlike the
Augmented Dickey-Fuller test, which extends the Dickey-Fuller test by including additional lagged
variables as regressors in the model on which the test is based, the Phillips-Perron test makes a
non-parametric correction to the t-test statistic to capture the effect of autocorrelation present when
the underlying autocorrelation process is not AR(1) and the error terms are not homoscedastic.
( L) = 1 1 L 2 L2 p L p and ( L) = 1 + 1 L + 2 L2 + + q Lq
or
yt = + 1 yt 1 + 2 yt 2 + + p y t p + t + 1 t 1 + 2 t 2 + + q t q ,
(1.3)
with
E ( t ) = 0 ; E ( t ) = 2 ; E ( t s ) = 0, t s
2
where yt , yt 1 ,..., yt p represent the current and lagged growth rate of tourist arrivals, p is the lag
length of the AR error term, and q is the lag length of the MA error term.
If there are the seasonal effects, it will be the seasonal autoregressive moving
average, or SARMA ( P, Q ) T , model is given below:
yt = + T yt T + 2T yt 2T + + PT yt PT + t + T t T + 2T t 2T + + QT t QT , (1.4)
Page 280
Y t = E (Y t F t 1 ) +
where
(ii ) t = h1 / 2 t ,
p
(iii ) hit = i + i
l =1
2
i ,t 1
+ i hi ,t 1
(1.5)
l =1
l =1
l =1
(iv ) I ( i ,t ) = 1, i ,t 0
and
(1.6)
= 0, i ,t > 0
where Ft is the information set variable to time t, and : iid (0,1) . The four equations in the model
state the following : (i) the growth in tourist arrivals depends on its own past values; (ii) the shock
to tourist arrivals has a predictable conditional variance component, ht , and an unpredictable
component, t ; (iii) the conditional variance depends on its own past values and the recent shocks
to the growth in the tourist arrivals series; and (iv) the conditional variance is affected differently
by positive and negative shocks to the growth in tourist arrivals.
Page 281
1 + 1 < 1
(1.7)
1
2
1 + 1 + 1 < 1
(1.8)
In equations (1.5) and (1.6), the parameters are typically estimated by the
maximum likelihood method to obtain Quasi-Maximum Likelihood Estimators (QMLE) in the
absence of normality of t , the conditional shocks (or standardized residuals). The conditional loglikelihood function is given as follows:
t2
1 n
l t = log ht +
2 t =1
ht
t =1
n
Page 282
H0 : = 0
H1 : < 0
The ADF test results are confirmed by the Phillip-Perron test and the coefficient is
significant at the 5% level. The results of the ADF unit root tests are that when the ADF test
statistics are compared with the critical values from the nonstandard Dickey-Fuller distribution, the
former for all of variable series are less than the critical value at 5% significance level. Thus, the
null hypothesis of a unit root is rejected at the 5% level, implying that the series are stationary. By
taking first differences of the logarithm of variables, the ADF tests show that the null hypothesis of
a unit root is clearly rejected. The ADF statistics for the series are less than the critical value at the
5% significance level. Thus, the first differences of the logarithmic variables are stationary. These
empirical results allow the use of this data to estimate conditional mean and conditional volatility
model.
Page 283
Variable
ADF
PP
Without trend
Without trend
level
1st difference
level
1st difference
DTN
-7.6671***
-14.9299***
-33.4911***
-30.6096***
DNM
-4.9960***
-12.9948***
-37.5955***
-277.6326***
DNJ
-5.8683***
-16.9183***
-31.2189***
-108.3260***
DNUK
-3.8053***
-13.1170***
-20.9481***
-61.4773***
DNUS
-4.4828***
-20.5141***
-31.2214***
-77.3335***
Notes:
1. DTN denotes the growth rate of total number of tourist arrivals, DNM denotes Malaysian tourist
arrivals, DNJ denotes the growth rate of Japanese tourist arrivals, DNUK denotes the growth rate of
United Kingdom tourist arrivals, and DNUS denotes the growth rate of American tourist arrivals
2. *** denotes the null hypothesis of a unit root is rejected at the 1% level.
Page 284
Accumulation of
Malaysian tourist
arrivals
Accumulation of
Japanese tourist
arrivals
Accumulation of
United Kingdom
tourist arrivals
Accumulation of
American tourist
arrivals
(1979-2010)
(1979-2010)
(1979 -2010)
(1979-2010)
25,975,942
20,587,357
8,793,307
9,140,592
(1976-2010)
191,429,339
Page 285
1600000
1200000
800000
400000
0
1980
1985
1990
1995
2000
2005
TOTAL
200000
160000
120000
80000
40000
0
1980
1985
1990
1995
MAL
Page 286
2000
2005
140000
120000
100000
80000
60000
40000
20000
0
1980
1985
1990
1995
2000
2005
JAN
90000
80000
70000
60000
50000
40000
30000
20000
10000
0
1980
1985
1990
1995
UK
Page 287
2000
2005
70000
60000
50000
40000
30000
20000
10000
0
1980
1985
1990
1995
2000
2005
USA
Figure 1.6 Total monthly tourist arrival growth rates from 1976-2010
60
40
20
0
-20
-40
-60
1980
1985
1990
1995
DTOTAL
Page 288
2000
2005
160
120
80
40
0
-40
-80
1980
1985
1990
1995
2000
2005
DMAL
Figure 1.8 Monthly Japanese tourist arrival growth rates from 1979-2010
80
60
40
20
0
-20
-40
-60
1980
1985
1990
1995
DJAP
Page 289
2000
2005
80
60
40
20
0
-20
-40
-60
1980
1985
1990
1995
2000
2005
DUK
Figure 1.10 Monthly American tourist arrival growth rates from 1979-2010
120
80
40
-40
-80
1980
1985
1990
1995
DUSA
Page 290
2000
2005
Variable
Coefficient
t-Statistic
AIC/BIC
LM(SC)
1.660
1.103
AIC=7.241 F=1.282
AR(1)
-0.190
-3.694
BIC=7.273 p=0.076
SAR(12)
0.739
20.913
Table 1.7 presents the results of the SARMA model for Malaysian tourist arrival growth
rates, model is given below:
Table 1.7 SARMA model for growth rates in monthly Malaysian tourist arrivals
Variable
Coefficient
t-Statistic
AIC/BIC
LM(SC)
4.252
2.983
AIC=9.170 F=2.473
AR(1)
-0.474
-9.805
BIC=9.204 p=0.062
SAR(12)
0.385
7.818
Table 1.8 presents the results of the SARMA model for Japanese tourist arrival growth
rates, model is given below:
Page 291
Variable
Coefficient
t-Statistic
AIC/BIC
LM(SC)
0.098
0.025
AIC=7.461 F=3.303
AR(1)
-0.173
-3.181
BIC=7.506 p=0.070
SAR(12)
0.958
86.397
MA(12)
-0.676
-16.551
Table 1.9 presents the results of SARMA model for UK tourist arrival growth rates, model
is given below:
Table 1.9 SARMA model for growth rates in monthly UK tourist arrivals
Variable
Coefficient
t-Statistic
AIC/BIC
LM(SC)
2.423
6.005
AIC=8.282 F=1.217
AR(1)
-0.275
-5.285
BIC=8.315 p=0.125
SAR(6)
-0.596
-13.675
Table 1.10 presents the results of SARMA model for American tourist arrival growth rates,
model is given below:
Table 1.10 SARMA model for growth rates in monthly American tourist arrivals
Variable
Coefficient
t-Statistic
AIC/BIC
LM(SC)
2.078
0.711
AIC=7.418
F=1.689
AR(1)
-0.276
-5.241
BIC=7.452
p=0.075
SAR(12)
0.856
31.625
Page 292
(1.615 )
( 0.028 )
( 0.029 )
The estimated GARCH (1, 1) model of monthly growth rates in total number of
international tourist arrivals to Thailand for the short run persistence lies at 0.138, whilst the long
run persistence lies at 0.924. As the respective estimate of the second moment conditions,
1 + 1 < 1 for GARCH (1, 1), are satisfied. The QMLE are consistent and asymptotically normal.
This means that the estimates are statistically adequate and sensible for the purpose of
interpretation.
The estimated GJR (1, 1) equation for monthly growth rates in the total number of tourist
arrivals is given as follows:
(1.611)
( 0.048 )
( 0.059 )
( 0.030 )
The asymmetry coefficient is found to be positive and significant for the GJR (1, 1) model,
namely 0.123, which indicates that decreases in total number of tourist arrivals to Thailand increase
volatility. As the respective estimates of the second moment conditions, 1 +
1
1 + 1 < 1 for
2
GJR (1, 1) and where the figures in parentheses are standard errors, which indicates that the model
provides an adequate fit to the data. As 1 is estimated significant and 1 + 1 > 1 , it appears that
Page 293
(15.645 )
( 0.059 )
( 0.042 )
The estimated GARCH (1, 1) model of monthly growth rates in Malaysian tourist arrivals
shows the short run persistence lies at 0.118, while the long run persistence lies at 0.936. As the
respective estimate of the second moment conditions, 1 + 1 < 1 for GARCH (1, 1), are satisfied.
The QMLE are consistent and asymptotically normal. This means that the estimates are statistically
adequate and sensible for the purpose of interpretation.
The estimated GJR (1, 1) equation for monthly growth rates in Malaysian tourist arrivals is
given as follows:
(15.719 )
( 0.050 )
( 0.080 )
( 0.060 )
The asymmetry coefficient is found to be positive and significant for the GJR (1, 1) model,
namely 0.071, which indicates that decreases in monthly Malaysian tourist arrivals to Thailand
increase volatility. As the respective estimates of the second moment conditions,
1
2
1 + 1 + 1 < 1
for GJR (1, 1) and where the figures in parentheses are standard errors, which
indicates that the model provides an adequate fit to the data. As 1 is estimated significant
and 1 + 1 > 1 , it appears that volatility is affected asymmetrically by positive and negative
shock, with previous negative shocks having a greater impact on volatility than previous positive
shocks of similar magnitude.
The estimated GARCH (1, 1) equation for monthly growth rates in Japanese tourist arrivals
is given as follows:
(10.738 )
( 0.065 )
( 0.134 )
The estimated GARCH (1, 1) model of monthly growth rates in Japanese tourist arrivals
shows the short run persistence lies at 0.293, while the long run persistence lies at 0.691. As the
respective estimate of the second moment conditions, 1 + 1 < 1 for GARCH (1, 1), are satisfied.
The QMLE are consistent and asymptotically normal. This means that the estimates are statistically
adequate and sensible for the purpose of interpretation.
The estimated GJR (1, 1) equation for monthly growth rates in Japanese tourist arrivals is
given as follows:
Page 294
( 73.385 )
( 0.132 )
( 0.124 )
( 0.452 )
The asymmetry coefficient is found to be positive and significant for the GJR (1, 1) model,
namely 0.038, which indicates that decreases in monthly Japanese tourist arrivals to Thailand
increase volatility. As the respective estimates of the second moment conditions,
1
2
1 + 1 + 1 < 1 for GJR (1, 1) and where the figures in parentheses are standard errors, which
indicates that the model provides an adequate fit to the data. As 1 is estimated significant
and 1 + 1 < 1 , it appears that volatility is affected asymmetrically by positive and negative
shock, with previous positive shocks having a greater impact on volatility than previous negative
shocks of similar magnitude.
The estimated GARCH (1, 1) equation for monthly United Kingdom tourist arrivals is
given as follows:
( 2.781)
( 0.038 )
(19.825 )
The estimated GARCH (1, 1) model of monthly growth rates in United Kingdom tourist
arrivals shows the short run persistence lies at 0.092, while the long run persistence lies at 0.982.
As the respective estimate of the second moment conditions, 1 + 1 < 1 for GARCH (1, 1), are
satisfied. The QMLE are consistent and asymptotically normal. This means that the estimates are
statistically adequate and sensible for the purpose of interpretation.
The estimated GJR (1, 1) equation for the United Kingdom tourist arrivals is given as
follows:
( 3.092 )
( 0.049 )
( 0.094 )
( 0.047 )
The asymmetry coefficient is found to be positive and significant for the GJR (1, 1) model,
namely 0.084, which indicates that decreases in monthly United Kingdom tourist arrivals to
Thailand increase volatility. As the respective estimates of the second moment conditions,
1
2
1 + 1 + 1 < 1 for GJR (1, 1) and where the figures in parentheses are standard errors, which
indicates that the model provides an adequate fit to the data. As 1 is estimated significant
and 1 + 1 > 1 , it appears that volatility is affected asymmetrically by positive and negative
shock, with previous negative shocks having a greater impact on volatility than previous positive
shocks of similar magnitude.
The estimated GARCH (1, 1) equation for monthly growth rates in American tourist
arrivals is given as follows:
Page 295
(12.227 )
( 0.051)
( 0.073)
The estimated GARCH (1, 1) model of monthly growth rates in American tourist arrivals
shows the short run persistence lies at 0.181, while the long run persistence lies at 0.411. As the
respective estimate of the second moment conditions, 1 + 1 < 1 for GARCH (1, 1), are satisfied.
The QMLE are consistent and asymptotically normal. This means that the estimates are statistically
adequate and sensible for the purpose of interpretation.
The estimated GJR (1, 1) equation for American tourist arrivals is given as follows:
( 39.935 )
( 0.029 )
( 0.065 )
( 0.390 )
The asymmetry coefficient is found to be positive and significant for the GJR (1, 1) model,
namely 0.114, which indicates that decreases in monthly American tourist arrivals to Thailand
increase volatility. As the respective estimates of the second moment conditions,
1
2
1 + 1 + 1 < 1 for GJR (1, 1) and where the figures in parentheses are standard errors, which
indicates that the model provides an adequate fit to the data. As 1 is estimated significant
and 1 + 1 > 1 , it appears that volatility is affected asymmetrically by positive and negative
shock, with previous negative shocks having a greater impact on volatility than previous positive
shocks of similar magnitude.
Page 296
Total
Malaysian
Japanese
UK
American
5.832***
33.132***
32.064***
3.273*
93.615***
(1.615)
(15.645)
(10.738)
(2.781)
(12.227)
0.138***
0.118***
0.293***
0.092**
0.181***
(0.028)
(0.042)
(0.065)
(0.038)
(0.051)
0.786***
0.818***
0.398***
0.890***
0.230***
(0.029)
(0.059)
(0.134)
(0.045)
(0.073)
AIC
0.924
0.936
0.691
0.982
0.411
BIC
7.054
9.073
7.386
8.128
7.118
9.142
7.466
8.196
Diagnostics
Second moment
7.386
7.456
Notes:
Numbers in parentheses are standard error.
The log-moment condition is necessarily satisfied as the second the moment condition is satisfied.
AIC and BIC denote the Akaike Information Criterion and Schwarz Criterion, respectively.
*** denotes the estimated coefficient is statistically significant at 1%.
** denotes the estimated coefficient is statistically significant at 5%.
* denotes the estimated coefficient is statistically significant at 10%.
Page 297
Total
Malaysian
Japanese
UK
American
5.829***
26.257*
145.296**
3.051*
114.467***
(1.611)
(15.719)
(73.385)
(3.092)
(39.935)
0.123***
0.071*
0.038*
0.084*
0.114***
(0.048)
(0.050)
(0.131)
(0.049)
(0.029)
0.025*
0.100*
-0.115*
0.040*
0.024*
(0.059)
(0.080)
(0.124)
(0.094)
(0.065)
0.789***
0.835***
0.148*
0.883***
0.326*
(0.030)
(0.060)
(0.452)
(0.047)
(0.390)
AIC
0.925
0.956
0.128
0.987
0.452
BIC
7.060
9.074
7.649
8.134
7.118
9.153
7.740
8.212
Diagnostics
Second moment
7.412
7.792
Notes:
Numbers in parentheses are standard error.
The log-moment condition is necessarily satisfied as the second the moment condition is satisfied.
AIC and BIC denote the Akaike Information Criterion and Schwarz Criterion, respectively.
*** denotes the estimated coefficient is statistically significant at 1%.
** denotes the estimated coefficient is statistically significant at 5%.
* denotes the estimated coefficient is statistically significant at 10%.
1.9 Conclusion
The empirical study based on two widely-used conditional volatility models shows that the
volatility is affected symmetrically by positive and negative shocks, with the previous positive
shocks to the growth in tourist arrivals to Thailand having a greater impact on volatility than
previous negative shocks of similar magnitude.
This should be useful information for both private and public tourist providers to manage
sustainable tourism in Thailand.
Page 298
This research aimed to study relationship between opinion and real practice that had an
effect on factors that affected the effectiveness of quality assurance (QA) in education of the
Eastern University of Management and Technology (UMT), and to analyze factors that affected the
effectiveness of QA in education of UMT. The sample group consisted of 73 teachers and 39
officers (the total was 112 people). Research instrument was a questionnaire about affecting factors
toward the effectiveness of QA of UMT. The reliability was 0.86. The statistics used in data
analysis were namely percentage, mean, standard deviation, Pearsons correlation coefficient, and
logistic regression analysis.
The research result found that:
Sample group had high-level opinion toward the effectiveness of QA and the effectiveness
of the university procedures in terms of leadership and education administration; however, the
factors in terms of organizational culture, resource support, database development, personnel
development, student development, academic service, art and culture preservation, and interested
person were at the moderate level.
The sample group had high-level opinion toward real practice in terms of leadership;
however, the factors in terms of organizational culture, database development, personnel
development, education administration, student development, academic service, research, art and
culture preservation were at the moderate level, and interested persons was at the low level.
The sample groups opinion and real practice toward the factor in terms of personnel
development had positive relationship at the significance level of .05.The correlation coefficient, r,
was equal to 0.18, and the factor in terms of database development could explain the variability of
the outcome organizational effectiveness after the evaluation of educational quality at the
significance level of .05, which explained 71.20 %.
Keywords: predictors, effective, quality assurance
Page 299
Page 300
Page 301
Or
Outcome organizational effectiveness
205.14+82.54 (database development factor)
= e-
Page 302
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
This research project is supported by
income budget of the Eastern University of
Management and Technology for which the
researcher is highly grateful. This research
used
quantitative
methodology
and
implemented the method through data
collection by using a questionnaire. The
researcher obtained the data through very
good cooperation from the administrators,
teachers, and officers of UMT.
Thanks to Asst.Prof.Dr.Veerasak
Jinarat, President Emeritus, Dr. Smarnjit
Piromruen, Dr. Pannathorn Chachvarat, and
Assoc.Prof.Dr. Veera
Chaisrisuk, who
devoted their time for advising and reading
the research and suggesting in many parts of
the research.
The researcher hopes very much that
the report of this research will be well useful
for the development of quality assurance of
UMT and for those who study and do
research.
= e-
Page 303
Page 304
Page 305
Page 306
Fig. 1 Preliminary screening (A) and pure isolated by cross streak technique (B) of EPS-producing
microorganism isolated from sugar cane field on Winogradskys mineral mixture nutrient agar
plate, using viscosity and size of the colony as index of EPS-producing microorganism.
Page 307
Fig. 2 Representative of the PCR products of 16S rRNA gene primer that amplified around 1,500
bp. Front lane ; DNA marker, Lane 2-8; the representative of amplified 16S rRNA genes from EPS
producing bacteria.
PCR products were sequenced by ABI PRISM 310 Genetic Analyzer with a BigDye
Termimator (version 3.0). The obtained sequences were compared to 16S rRNA gene sequence in
the GenBank database using the BlastN program to retrieve sequence similarity and bacterial
identification as shown in Table 1.
Eighteen isolates showed high identity between 95-99% with the corresponding 16S rRNA
gene sequences of soil bacteria groups, in particularly of rhizobacterial strains including,
Bacterium sp., Mitsuaria sp., Agrobacterium tumefaciens, Ensifer adhaerens, Mitsuria sp.,
Sinorhizobium sp., Cupriavidus gilardii, Pseudomonas sp., Agrobacterium tumefaciens and
Rhizobium sp.
Fig. 3 showed the phylogeny tree of relationships among 18 isolates. It indicated that all
bacteria in this research had the mutual parentage. Bacterium, Sinorhizobium sp. clone 4h-12,
Rhizobium sp. clone GI7-3-A09, Agrobacterium tumefaciens strain BLN4, Agrobacterium
tumefaciens isoate EFLRI 73, Ensifer adhaerens strain J2S2, Bacterium clone p02.C11 and
Mitsuaria sp. H24L1C had the similar character whereas Mitsuaria sp. KN1, Bacterium clone
nbw623a04c1, Cupriavidus gilardii strain AU3713, Pseudomonas sp. NII-1015 Sinorhizobium
medicae isolate EFLRI116 had the similar characterization. However the bacterial strain
HSCL1.10 Phere showed the biggest and the most viscose appearance colony, therefore, it was
selected to further study. HSCL1.10 Phere was identified to be a new strain of Pseudomonas sp.
HSCL1.10 with 99% similarity to Pseudomonas sp. NII-1015 which showed mucoid appearance
on MWA and the cells were Gram-negative and rod shape
(Figure 4) It is able to accumulate several polysaccharides (EPS) inside or outside of
(Hou et al., 1996).
Page 308
the cell
Accession
no.
AB589884.1
EU714910.1
EU714910.1
EU714910.1
HM270513.1
HM270513.1
HM270513.1
GQ181060.1
EU221356.1
HQ231945.1
FJ444721.1
FJ602413.1
GQ111262.1
AY860227.1
HM036665.1
EU445243.1
EU445260.1
FJ193930.1
% identity
99%
98%
98%
98%
99%
99%
99%
96%
99%
99%
99%
98%
95%
98%
99% (818/820)
99%
99%
99% (660/673)
Fig. 3 Phylogenetic analysis base on 16s rRNA gene sequences of 18 EPS-producing bacteria
isolates
from sugarcane field using Clastal W program.
A
Fig. 4 Colony characterization on MWA (A) and morphology (B) of Pseudomonas sp. HSCL 1.10
Page 309
The optimal conditions of Pseudomonas sp. HSCL 1.10 were studied under
different carbon and nitrogen sources. For the carbon source study, sucrose was
preferentially utilized by the organism for maximum production of EPS compared to other
carbon sources used (Figure 5).
Fig. 5 Effect of sugars on EPS production by Pseudomonas sp HSCL 1.10; growth curve (A) and
EPS dry weight (mg/100ml) (B)
Figure 6 showed the result of nitrogen source which the maximum EPS production was
found in using yeast extract as nitrogen source, even though Pseudomonas sp. HSCL 1.10 grew
well in all of nitrogen sources.
Page 310
Fig. 6 Effect of nitrogens on EPS production by Pseudomonas sp. HSCL 1.10; growth curve (A)
and EPS dry weight (mg/100ml) (B)
After optimal condition was investigated, preferential carbon and nitrogen sources for
bacterial growth were added in the basal medium (MW). Pseudomonas sp. HSCL 1.10 produced
the maximum EPS dry weight of 1,162 mg/100 ml by using sucrose as carbon source and yeast
extracted as nitrogen source
DISCUSSION
We sampled the soil from the surface of the sugar cane root, which is known to be high in
rich sugar plant, for isolation of EPS producing bacteria. We segregated 48 isolates of
rhizobacteria; eighteen isolates could produce EPS by morphology characterization, viscose and
mucoid appearance. Nucleotide sequencing was performed on these eighteen to identify their
nearest strain, namely: Bacterium, Mitsuaria sp. H24L1C, Bacterium clone ncd266h05c1,
Agrobacterium tumefaciens strain BLN4, Ensifer adhaerens strain J2S2, Mitsuaria sp. KN1,
Sinorhizobium sp. clone 4h-12, Bacterium clone p02.C11, Bacterium clone nbw623a04c1,
Rhizobium sp. clone GI7-3-A09, Agrobacterium tumefaciens isolate EFLRI 73, Pseudomonas sp.
NII-1015, Sinorhizobium medicae isolate EFLRI 116 and Cupriavidus gilardii strain AU3713. The
phylogenetic tree predicted that these 14 strains had the mutual parentage relationship.
Pseudomonas sp. HSCL 1.10 was selected, from the 14 EPS producing bacterial strains, to
study the optimal condition for EPS production, measured by the largest and high viscosity colony
appearance on MWA. It was found that Pseudomonas sp. HSCL 1.10 grew well in basal medium
(MW medium), containing sucrose and yeast extract, produced the maximum EPS dry weight of
1,162 mg/100 ml. There are several reports on EPS production from Pseudomonas sp., which
agreed with our findings; Sudhamani et al. (2004) reported that Pseudomonas caryophylli
produced the highest EPS dry weight 1,700 mg/100 ml, also isolating an O-specific polysaccharide
from the lipopolysaccharide (LPS) of this strain (De Castro et al., 2001). EPS were reported to
have been isolated from Pseudomonas fluorescens Biovar II (Chin Chang Hung et al., 2005) and
from Pseudomonas oleovorans NRRL B-14682 (Filomena et al., 2009).
The experiments concluded that efficiently produced biologically functional EPS,
screened from the rhizosphere of wild or cultivating plants such as sugar cane, that have grown in
adverse soil, that the rhizophere produced and released EPS to the environment. Those microbe
interaction played an important role in plant adaptation to adverse conditions by increasing watercapturing, promoting nitrogen-fixation, inhibiting denitrification, phosphorus-solubilizing, heavy
metal trapping (Raffaella et al., 2006). EPS benefits are being promoted in industries such as food,
Page 311
Page 312
Page 313
Page 314
Page 315
Fig. 1 The powerful of microorganisms in three earthworm species broke down CM-cellulose.
The screening of microorganisms in the digestive tract of three different earthworm
species, Eiseniafoetida (The Tiger worm),Eudriluseugeniae (African Night Crawler), Perionyx
excavates (Blue worm) were selected and cultured in LB broth containing CM-cellulose for 24
hours as in Figure 1. The microorganism from African Night Crawler in the third tube (African
Night Crawler 3) has the most powerful microorganism in all microorganisms from African Night
Crawler. And the most powerful microorganism in The Tiger worm and Blue worm were Tiger
worm in sixth tube (Tiger worm 6) and Blue worm in first tube (Blue worm 1), respectively.
Growth curve of the microorganisms selected from three earthworm species.
A total of 24 potential cellulose degraded bacteria isolated from earthworms feces were
screened for glucose producer. Out of 24 isolates, 3 strains were able to degrade CM-Cellulose for
24 hours. A comparison of the growth curve of 3 strains was shown in figure 2.
Page 316
Fig. 2 Growth curve of the 3 microorganisms that have the high powerful to degrade CMCellulose.
Fig. 2 showed that all strains have the same growth rate in LB broth. these 3 strains were used to
degrade the cellulose from the waste paper sludge.
Study the efficiency of the three microorganisms for degrading paper sludge.
The three effective microorganisms were performed the degradation of paper sludge. The
microorganism from Eudriluseugeniae, African Night Crawler 3, is the most superior glucose
producer as shown in figure 3.
Page 317
Page 318
Page 319
Page 320
Page 321
(a)
(b)
(c)
-
Fig. 3 The detection of) a (ammonia (NH3)) b (nitrite (NO2 ) )c (nitrate (NO3 ) in ammonium
sulfate broth.
Page 322
(a)
(b)
-
(a)
(b)
(c)
) d(
Fig. 5 The detection of) a (ammonia (NH3)) b (nitrite (NO2- )) c (nitrate (NO3-)) d (gas production
in nitrate reduction and denitrification.
Page 323
Page 324
Page 325
Page 326
Page 327
Screening of bradyrhizobia that could grow under stress conditions (in vitro
experiment)
The cell cultures of 108 cells/ml were washed by normal saline twice, and 10 l cultures
were dropped on YM agar medium at different stress conditions for screening the stress tolerant
strains compared with a commercial strain of B. japonucum USDA110.
Screening under acid condition: YM medium was prepared at pH 4, 5, 6 and 7, then
0.5% bromthymol blue was added as pH indicator. The cell cultures were dropped on YM medium
at different pH conditions. Plates were incubated at 28C and the growth was checked everyday.
Bradyrhizobia that could grow at low pH condition were selected.
Screening under high temperature condition: The cell cultures were dropped on YM
agar medium then incubated at 28, 35, 40, and 45C. The growth of cell at different temperatures
was checked everyday. Strains could grow at high temperature were selected.
Page 328
Page 329
Fig. 1. Effect of bradyrhizobial inoculation on nitrogenase activity (mol C2H2 h-1 g-1 nodule),
biomass dry weight, and nodule number (No. nodules) of plant grew under (a) pH 4, (b) pH 5, (c)
pH 6, and (d) pH 7. Means and standard deviation are calculated from three replicates, and values
with different letter are significant difference at P 0.05.
RESULTS
Isolation and characterization of bradyrhizobia
A total of 20 isolates were exhibited a gram-negative, rod shape bacteria, and
appeared on positive PHB staining after cultured on YM plate. After authentication and nitrogen
fixation ability test with soybean, seven bradyrhizobial isolates could nodulate with soybean roots
and able to fix nitrogen well (data not shown). These strains were used for further testing under
acid, drought, and high temperature stress conditions.
Bradyrhizobial isolates could grow under stress conditions (in vitro)
Nodulating bradyrhizobia were tested on various stress conditions. The investigation at
acid condition showed five isolates, including isolate187, 188, 193, 194, and 197 grew better than
a commercial strain B. japonicum USDA110 on agar plate at low pH condition. Investigation at
high temperature condition found five isolates consisted of isolate 184, 187, 188, 193, and 194
could grow better than commercial strain. However, there was no difference among all tested
strains under drought condition (data not shown). Thus, bradyrhizobia isolates 184, 187, 188, 193,
194, and 197 were selected for further experiment.
Page 330
Figure 2 Effect of bradyrhizobial inoculation on nitrogenase activity (mol C2H2 h-1 g-1 nodule),
biomass dry weight, and nodule number (No. nodules) under different levels of drought condition
at (a)-0.5, (b)-1.48, (c)-3.02, and (d)-5.0 bars. Means and standard deviation are calculated from
three replicates, and values with different letter are significant difference at P 0.05.
Page 331
Figure 3 Effect of bradyrhizobial inoculation on nitrogenase activity (mol C2H2 h-1 g-1 nodule),
biomass dry weight, and nodule number (No. nodules) under different temperature conditions at
(a) 30C,(b) 35C, and (c) 40C. Means and standard deviation are calculated from three
replicates, and values with different letter are significant difference at P 0.05.
To determine the efficiency of selected bradyrhizobial strains as soybean inoculant
compared with commercial strain USDA110, the germinated soybean seeds were inoculated with
tested isolates and grown under different conditions. Our results showed that soybean inoculated
with these strains had no statistical significant difference in nitrogenase activity, nodule number,
and biomass dry weight when grown under normal condition compared to a commercial strain of
USDA110.
Under strong acid condition (pH 4 and 5), the overall nodulation ability, and plant growth
were reduced when compared to mild acid condition (pH 6) and normal condition (pH 7) (Fig.1).
The nitrogenase activity of plants inoculated with isolates 187 and 194 was higher than other
strains under pH 4 (Fig. 1a), while isolates 188 and 194 produced higher nitrogenase activity than
other strains under pH 5 (Fig. 1b). However, the nitrogenase activities as well as biomass dry
weight and number of nodule were not significantly different from that of plants inoculated with
USDA110 under strong acid condition. Interestingly, the nitrogenase activity of plants inoculated
with isolate 197 was highest and significantly different from plants inoculated with USDA110
under mild acid condition (pH 6) (Fig. 1c). However, there was no significant difference of
biomass dry weight and number of nodule among the strains under this condition. Thus,
bradyrhizobia isolate 187, 188, 194, and 197 could be the candidates to be used as inoculant under
acid condition. The extreme pH of acid condition is one limiting factor for symbiotic rhizobia and
legume plant growth. Although bradyrhizobial inoculant could tolerate to acid condition and able
to nodulate and fix nitrogen the plant under acid condition similar to neutral pH condition, soybean
Page 332
187
188
193
194
197
pH4
0.447b
1.031a
0.881ab
0.731ab
1.063a
0.781ab
0.634ab
1.189a
pH5
0.694b
0.744b
0.853ab
0.947ab
0.863ab
1.056ab
0.919ab
1.428a
pH6
0.778b
1.581a
1.469ab
1.288ab
1.682a
1.295ab
1.750a
1.024ab
pH7
1.000b
1.809a
1.553ab
1.334ab
1.519ab
1.606ab
1.662a
1.727a
-0.5 bars
0.264d
0.324cd
0.510ab
0.380abc 0.276cd
0.337cd
0.551a
0.387ab
c
-1.48 bars
0.355c
0.384bc
0.643a
0.515abc
0.612ab
-3.02 bars
0.201c
0.244bc
0.340ab
0.447a
0.260bc
0.426a
0.420a
0.379ab
-5.0 bars
0.192b
0.357ab
0.364ab
0.473ab
0.438ab
0.966a
0.496ab
0.364ab
30C
0.563bc
0.772ab
0.521c
0.731ab
0.798a
35C
0.216b
0.494a
0.499a
0.553a
0.515a
0.481a
0.513a
0.500a
40C
0.261b
0.425a
0.453a
0.454a
0.434a
0.428a
0.467a
0.446a
Acid
Drought
High temp.
significantly different with USDA 110. However, isolate 188 had highest nitrogenase
activity under -1.48 and -3.02 bars, and also promote highest biomass dry weight under -1.48 bars,
the value at these conditions were significantly different from USDA110. While, isolate 193 gave
highest number of nodule under -0.5 and -1.48 bars. In many research studies indicating that the
osmotic potential generated by PEG decreased the root elongation [19] then lead to reduce the
Page 333
Page 334
Page 335
Page 336
Page 337
Page 338
(1)
(2)
Where (DPPH2)T was the concentration of DPPH2 at the time of steady state and
(DPPH2)T=0 was the concentration of DPPH2 at zero time. The percentage of remaining DPPH (%
DPPH2REM) against the standard concentration was used to obtain EC50 (the quantity of sample to
decrease 50% DPPH2). The time needed to reach the steady state to EC50 called TEC50. Antiradical
efficiency (AE) is a new concept of antiradical efficiency which combines the factors EC50 and
TEC50 was defined as AE. It was calculated following (Sanchez-Moreno et al., 1998) formula. All
experimental were carried out in triplicate.
Page 339
(3)
Cytotoxic Assay
Cytotoxicity of methanol extract of fruit peel and husk were assayed using brine shrimp
lethally test (Meyer et al., 1982), The Artemia salina was prepared in which hatched eggs (obtained
from Laboratory of Fish Breeding, Faculty of Fisheries and Marine Science, Brawijaya University)
in 2 day lighted sea water. The assay was prepared with 3 ml of filtered sea water containing 10
free swimming nauplii of Artemia salina in cavity bottle. 1 ml of variably crude extract
concentration was plugged in cavity bottle for 24 hour. The percentage of mortality was determined
by comparing the mean surviving Artemia salina. IC50 was determined using probit analysis
(Wardlaw, 1985). Extracts giving LC50 values greater than 1000 ppm were considered to be
nontoxic.
RESULTS
Antibacterial Activity
Methanol extracts of X. mollucensis fruit husk and peel were active against all tested
bacteria. In general, the ranged of MIC was from 3.0-6.00 mg/ml. However, as shown in Table 1,
the methanol peel extracts showed low in vitro potential of antibacterial activities against S. aureus
and E. coli. The methanol husk extract inhibited the growth of S. aureus at 4.0 mg/ml, which was
the second lowest concentration used in this research. In contrast, the MIC of the extract on E. coli
(7.0 mg/ml) was two times higher than S.aureus.The lowest MIC on both tested bacteria was
shown by peel extract on S. aureus (3.0 mg/ml).
Table 1. antibacterial activity of methanol extracts of the X. granatum
Fruit part
Husk
Peel
Tested Bacterial
MIC
(mg/ml)
Staphylococcus aureus
4.0
Eschericia coli
7.0
Staphylococcus aureus
3.0
Eschericia coli
6.0
Antioxidant Activity
The radical scavenging activity of methanol extract of fruit husk and peel using DPPH
method is shown in Table 2. Lower value of the EC50 illustrated higher antioxidant. The EC50 value
of methanol extract of X. granatum fruit husk and peel were 669618 and 454315g/ml
respectively.
Page 340
EC50 (g/ml)
TEC50 (min)
AE
Husk
669618
1.760.3
8.48 x 10-5
Peel
454315
3.540.2
6.21 x 10-5
1123
1.480.1
6.03 x 10-3
Ascorbic acid
LC50 (g/ml)
husk
Y=1.688X-1.248
5495
peel
Y=1.777X-1.042
2512
Samples
DISCUSSION
The weakest antibacterial activity was shown by the husk methanol extract especially
against the E. coli (8.0 mg/ml). Based on this assay, it can be seen that the peel was better on
antibacterial activity than the husk. This fact may be due to the lack of the antibacterial compound
in the X. granatum husk which extracted by methanol. This study confirms the previous report on
antibacterial effect on X. granatum extract (Choudhury et al., 2005). Alam et al. (2006) reported
that the bark of this species was far more powerful to inhibit bacteria. 400 g of methanolic bark
extract resulted 15 and 10 mm on S. aureus and E. coli, respectively.
The antibacterial compounds that exist in X. granatum fruit are probably for natural
defense against microorganism contamination in Xylocarpus sp. seed. Phenolic compounds were
divers spreading in almost all fruits husk, this compound has antibacterial activity (Cosmulescu et
al., 2010). The fuit of Xylocarpus sp. contained cyloccensin and xylocarpin that was known as
antibacterial compound (Zhou et al., 2006; Cui et al., 2007).
In this study was also revealed that gram positive bacteria appeared to be more susceptible
to the inhibitory effect of the extracts than gram negative bacteria. It is because the fact that its
Page 341
Page 342
Page 343
Page 344
Page 345
PVA
2
1
1
1
1
1
PVP
0
0
0.25
0.5
1
2
Page 346
80
60
40
urea
EUF1
20
EUF2
0
1
10
11
12
13
14
15
Time (min)
Page 347
2.5
log (Mt/M)
2.0
1.5
1.0
urea
EUF1
0.5
EUF2
0.0
0.0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1.0
1.2
1.4
log (t)
Fig. 2 Plot of release data log (Mt/M) versus log (t) of EUF1, EUF2 and control
Table 2 The release factors (K), release exponents (n), and determination coefficients (r2)
following linear regression of release data of urea from EUF
Sample
urea
EUF1
EUF2
n
0.69
0.95
0.96
K
17.56
9.23
7.67
r
0.9470
0.9827
0.9815
Fig. 3 shows the cumulative released quantity versus time from PVA and PVP in different
ratio. The EUF3 was released 15%, 33%, 47%, and 85%, while the EUF4 was released 16%, 35%,
54%, and 85% on the 3, 5, 7, and 13 min, respectively. The EUF5 was released 19%, 38%, 55%
and 89%. The EUF6 was released 23%, 44%, 63%, and 97%, respectively. Similar trends were
observed for the concentration dependence, where the PVA/PVP mass ratio ranged from 1:0.25 to
1:2. It depended on the PVP content. It can clearly be seen that the trends of releasing of urea was
increased when increasing PVP content. Due to the hydrophilic nature of PVP, the polymer would
be release well in water.
As seem in the Table 3, All the sample were non-Fickian diffusion behaviors and EUF3 is
the best strong non-Fickian diffusion.
100
80
60
40
EUF3
EUF4
EUF5
20
EUF6
0
1
Time (min)
Page 348
10
11
12
13
14
15
2.5
log (Mt/M)
2.0
1.5
1.0
EUF3
EUF4
EUF5
0.5
EUF6
0.0
0.0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1.0
1.2
1.4
log (t)
Fig.4 Plot of release data log (Mt/M) versus log (t) of EUF3, EUF4, EUF5 and EUF6
Table 3 The release factors (K), release exponents (n), and determination coefficients (r2)
following linear regression of release data of urea from EUF
Sample
EUF3
EUF4
EUF5
EUF6
n
0.96
0.93
0.88
0.86
K
8.03
8.93
10.44
12.72
r
0.9910
0.9833
0.9858
0.9924
From the plot of log (Mt/M) versus log (t) (Fig. 4), the release exponent (n) and release
factor (K) have been calculated. Table 3 summarizes the values for urea release from EUF. Then n
value is in the range from 0.86-0.96. Therefore, the nutrient release mechanism is non-Fickian
diffusion.
DISCUSSION
Providing the problem of using fertilizer as sufficient N fertilization to crops is critical to
achieve high quality and yields. Encapsulated urea fertilizer is needed to control release, maximize
N uptake efficiency, and minimize environmental hazards. It can be utilized as a management tool
to supply nutrients during an extended period of time while reducing potential nutrient losses to
the environment. Urea granules, being used as fertilizer, were coated in rotary drum with
PVA/PVP polymer based formulations. We have developed a conventional encapsulation
technique on the basis of PVA/PVP blending with spraying polymer solution on the granules, in
which PVP serves as both a plasticizer and stabilizer on granule. High control releasing rate was
obtained at room temperature for PVA/PVP in a mass ratio of 1:0.25. The release of urea through
these coating was measured and compared to urea un-coated granules. When PVA was used, the
urea release decreased drastically. PVA was found more efficient than PVP in reducing the rate of
release. It was also found that mixtures with PVA/PVP induced a non-Fickian release pattern.
However, for industrial applications the releasing product was still not achieved. Probably coating
deficiencies were responsible for faster urea release of coated granules. More research is necessary
to improve the coating process, and thus coating quality.
Page 349
Page 350
Page 351
Page 352
In the ampicillin nanoparticles, upon increasing the concentration of the polymer, the
increased drug release was observed in the drug and polymer concentration of 1:3. On the other
Page 353
AP1
58.170.11
2.
AP2
61.730.14
3.
AP3
60.170.09
4.
AP4
58.130.11
5.
AP5
62.130.12
6.
AP6
53.120.11
7.
AP7
59.150.13
In the ampicillin nanoparticle formulation, above 52 % drug got entrapped and the AP5
formulation with the good release profile showed 62.13 % of drug entrapment. The formulation
AP5 was subjected to zeta potential analysis in order to find their surface charge and the obtained
values in this regard was found to be 52 mV.
Biopharmaceutical parameters:
Table 4.Biopharmaceutical parameters of ampicillin-loaded sepia nanoparticles
S.No
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Parameters
Absorption Constant (Ka)
Elimination Constant (Ke)
Half life (t)
Tmax
Apparent
volume
of
distribution (Vd)
Cmax
AUC
Values
0.0133
0.0034
15.13h
52.10h
77 l
95mg/ml
18.70mg/ml
For the formulation AP5, an amount of 1.75 g/ml was found to be released when
experimentation was done in the serum blood samples of rabbits1. A maximum drug release was
at a concentration of 3.18 g/ml at the 24th h. After that, the elimination started and at the 72nd h,
and the plasma drug concentration was 0.82g/ml.
Page 354
animal 1
animal 2
animal 3
animal 4
Average
15 Min
1.90 0.06
1.80 0.07
1.72 0.06
1.6 0.07
1.75
30 Min
2.12 0.07
2.09 0.06
1.90 0.07
1.70 0.08
1.95
1h
2.25 0.06
2.22 0.07
2.10 0.08
1.90 0.07
2.12
2h
2.30 0.06
2.40 0.08
2.30 0.09
2.22 0.08
2.30
4h
2.650.06
2.75 0.08
2.60 0.08
2.56 0.07
2.64
8h
2.850.08
2.900.07
2.850.09
2.730.07
2.83
12 h
3.050.07
3.150.09
3.100.1
2.920.08
3.05
24 h
3.200.08
3.300.09
3.200.1
3.050.1
3.18
36 h
2.900.06
3.650.1
3.000.1
2.960.09
2.97
48 h
1.500.09
2.800.09
2.950.09
2.750.09
2.5
72 h
0.550.06
1.000.06
0.900.06
0.83
0.82
The pharmacokinetic parameters evaluated showed that the values of AUC, ka, ke, t1/2 and
Cmax were at 18.7013, 0.0133per hr, 0.0034per hr, 15.13hrs and 95 respectively.
From the In-vitro data obtained, it is clear that the drug release was in sustained manner in
a period of time from 15min to 72h. Hence, the above formulations experimented are considered
as ideal formulations.
Stability testing (ampicillin)
Table 5
0
1st Week
2nd Week
3rd Week
4th Week
The stability studies were performed for AP5 as per ICH guidelines. This formulation was
packed in screw capped bottles and was stored at different temperatures viz. room temperature, 45
C and 4 C for one month and the samples were analyzed at weekly intervals.
The accelerated stability studies were also performed for the ampicillin nanoparticles
(AP5) and it was found that there was no change in the concentration of these drugs at room
Page 355
Page 356
Page 357
Page 358
Corundum
1.0
Intensity (a.u.)
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.2
0.0
680
685
690
695
700
705
710
Wavelength (nm)
3+
Page 359
1.0
Intensity (a.u.)
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.2
0.0
660
670
680
690
700
710
720
Wavelength (nm)
Fig. 3 Luminescence spectrum of chrysoberyl and corundum compared to the Be heat treated
corundum at the melted surface
DISCUSSION
From the report of Atichat et al. (2008), they reported that the investigation of the
beryllium-treated sapphire from Ilakaka, Madagascar by the Luminescence spectroscopy detected
the three emission peaks at 688.9, 691.2 and 693.2 nm at the recrystallization on the surface which
is not the normal luminescence spectrum from the Cr3+ in the corundum structure. These result is
still under investigation to explain the extra peak after the Be heat treated. Also the Be treated
corundum in this study, emission significant peaks at 678.8 and 683.4 nm have been detected at
the melting surface instead (Fig. 3).
Page 360
Page 361
Page 362
Page 363
Fig. 1 XRD patterns of CuO nanoparticles; (a) 20wt% Cu with conventional drying; (b) 20
wt% Cu with sonication prior to conventional drying; (c) 20wt% Cu with microwave drying;
(d) 50wt%Cu with conventional drying; and (e) 50wt%Cu with microwave drying.
SEM analysis
After calcinations, morphology of CuO crystallites grown on SiO2 support with different
drying methods was revealed in SEM images (Fig. 2).
Page 364
Drying conditions
Conventional drying
20wt%Cu
50wt%Cu
22.8
26.6
23.1
Microwave drying
23.5
25.9
(a)
(b)
Fig. 2 SEM images of CuO/SiO2 nanocomposite powders prepared at 20wt%Cu loading with (a)
conventional drying; (b) sonication prior to conventional drying; and (c) microwave
drying.
Page 365
drying
to Conventional
Sonication prior
Conventional
20wt%Cu
Microwave
100nm
Fig. 3 TEM images (100000X) of CuO/SiO2 nanocomposites prepared with different methods.
DISCUSSION
CuO crystallites deposited on SiO2 particles forming CuO/SiO2 nanocomposites. With
higher %Cu loading, dispersed CuO crystallites gained higher probability of aggregation and
formed larger crystallites.
In the sonication prior to conventional drying and microwave drying process, the CuO
crystallites agglomerated into rod shapes. Moura et al. (2010) revealed that agglomerated CuO has
the preferential growth direction; [001] zone axis. The microwave heating time played an
important role in the structure evolution during the aggregation mechanism, which was described
by a process of self-assembly; many individual primary nanoparticles were attracted to each other
to form the secondary structures, which were stabilized by the steric interaction (Guo et al. , 2012).
The results confirmed the CuO aggregations in the preferred orientation.
Page 366
Page 367
Page 368
The connection between the quadratic nonlinear Schrdinger equation and the Schamel
equation is made within the context of Madelungs fluid. The time evolution of the envelope solitary
wave and the collision between two envelope solitary waves is investigated numerically via the
spectral method as well as.
Keywords: plasma physics, solitons, spectral methods, Madelungs fluid
INTRODUCTION
The solitary wave is the remarkable phenomena which is observed in various continuous
media such as waters (Infeld et.al. 2000) or plasmas (Washimi et.al. 1966,Schamel, 1973). The wave
travels without changing its amplitude due to the balance of the nonlinear and dispersion effects in the
media. The most well-known solitary wave is described by the Korteweg-de Vries (KdV) equation,
where subscripts t and x denote the partial derivative with respect to temporal and spatial
coordinates, respectively. n represents the deviation from the equilibrium of some physical contexts
such that density or height. The second term on the left hand side represents the nonlinear effect while
the last term is for dispersion. In the case of a cold-ion plasma with free electrons and electrons
trapped by the ion-acoustic waves, Schamel (1973) proposed that these two types of electrons have a
different temperatures and can derived what is now known as the Schamel equation,
(1)
The cubic nonlinear Schrdinger (cNLS) equation is another nonlinear PDE which admits
solitary wave solutions. It is the most useful equation in telecommunications and fibre optics and takes
the form
Page 369
(2)
This is done in the next section. The solitary wave solution of the qNLS will be derived in the
third section. In the fourth section, the time evolution of the solitary wave and solitary wave collisions
will be investigated via the spectral method.
Basics equations
The Madelung fluid or Madelung equations are alternative formulations of the Schrdinger
equation. We use this technique to write the qNLS equation in terms of the fluid Euler equations. To
obtain these equations, we start by writing the solution of (2) as
where
is the Madelungs fluid density. After substitute this solution back into (2), the
equations for the real and imaginary parts for the fluid-governing equations can respectively be written
as
(3)
(4)
(5)
After multiplying (4) by we have
Page 370
(6)
The last term on the right hand side of (6) can also be rewritten as
and
to (8) gives
(9)
Page 371
. Then
where
Numerical results
We apply the spectral method to study the time evolution of the solitary wave solution, (11).
We first take the Fourier transform of the qNLS equation over the spatial coordinate,
(12)
where F denotes the Fourier transform operator,
in which N is the number of mesh points in the x direction, xl=lLx/N , Lx is the length of the domain in
the x directions, and p=2p/Lx for p=0,,N-1. We introduce the integrating factor, ,
The 4th order Runge-Kutta method (Press et.al. 1992) was used for the time derivative. The
initial conditions used were
where x0 denotes the starting point. The time evolution of this envelope solitary wave is shown in Fig 1
Page 372
The
numerical
result
is
shown
in
Fig
where
2=0.35,
V02=5.0
and
x02=-60.
Fig. 2 The collision between two solitary waves: (a) t=0.0, (b) t=8.0, (c) t=12.5, (d) t=17.5, (e) t=22.5,
(f) t=30.0.
Page 373
The connection between two equations which admit solitary wave solutions can be made
via the Madelungs fluid picture. This implies that we can apply this to other generalizations
of the cNLS equation as well.
Page 374
Page 375
ABSTRACT
This paper mainly presents an increasing the heating value of tar by the distillation process
with different catalytic. Tar is undesirable product from gasification process because of the
various problem associated with condensation of tar aerosols and polymerization to form more
complex structure due to its high viscosity and ignite- retardant but its high heating value about 24
MJ/kg. TISTR has developed the catalyst to reduce viscosity and upgrading of tar. The product of
distillation process have a potential to be used as a fuel oil substitute combustion. The process
was carried out at atmospheric pressure and temperature about 330 oC. Catalytic studied were
Ni, Fe, Co and ZSM-5. These catalysts were prepared on activated alumina supporter except
ZSM-5 was prepared from alumino silicate. The results showed that Co as a catalyst to yield at
about 43 percents while Fe, Ni and ZSM-5 as catalyst to yield a 30 percent however Ni and
ZSM-5 increase the heating value of the fuel oil equal to 6,500 kcal / kg while the fuel oil with
the other catalysts have heating value to 6,000 kcal / kg.
Keywords: tar, distillation, catalyst, high heating value, fuel oil
Introduction
Tars are undesirable products in biomass stills because there reduce its efficiencies.
However, it can be used as fuel for their high heating value. Many kinds of biomass gasification
process have been developed treating various materials for different purposes. Chunshan Li et al
[1] present a tar properties overview, analysis, reforming mechanism and biomass gasification
models. They reported interesting works such as the study of Milne et al about a detailed
description of the operational conditions for tar elimination in biomass gasification and a survey
of the effect of the temperature on the tar formation and conversion. In addition, they completed
some previous studies about tar yields. There are mainly five methods (mechanism methods, seltmodification, thermal cracking, catalytic cracking and plasma methods) used to reduce tar
formation during gasification and pyrolysis of biomass [2]. Each method present obviously both
advantages and disadvantages : Mechanism methods only remove or capture tar from product
gases, while the tar energy is lost ; catalytic and thermal cracking process are generally used to
decompose or to reduce tar. Plasma technology can only remove fly ash, NOx and SO2 but also
sharply decrease the formation of tar during biomass gasification. Takeo K. et al [3] investigated
the performance of Ni/CeO2/ Al2O3 catalysts in the steam gasification of cedar wood biomass. The
catalyst was prepared by impregnation and sequential impregnation methods. Results reveal that
Page 376
The samples of tar produced by gasification process of the eucalyptus wood from ceramic
factory were used in this experiments. Tar in this process was produced in temperature gasifier
range between 400 to 600C. The high heating value of tar was measured by using a calorific
calorimeter (Parr 6300 calorimeter) and its composition with GC-MS (Varian 450-GC / Varian220-MS) apparatus. The ultimate analysis was analyzed by using Leco truspec CHN.
Experimental
In order to analyze the effect of the catalyst on the eucalyptus wood tar distillation, the
experiments were effectuated with and without catalyst. The hot vapors produced in its boiling
point are immediately channeled into a condenser (Figure 1). The distillate is analyzed using a
calorific calorimeter (Parr 6300 calorimeter) for high heating value and the ultimate analysis by
using Leco truspec CHN and flash point was measured with APM-7 PENSKY-MARTENS
CLOSED CUP TEST UNIT.
Catalyst preparation
A 5 gram of alumina (Al2O3) were mixed with 20 ml of 1 molar of catalytic metal (
Fe2SO4, NiCl2, CoCl2 ). We used Al2O3 because its function as catalyst and its note that Al2O3
has surface area 350 m2/g. The mixture is dried in an electrical oven at a temperature of 60 oC
for12 hours until its moisture content reaches value of about 10-15 % (dry basis). Then, the
Page 377
Page 378
In a simple distillation of tar, usually used to separate fuel - oil for boiling points in
range of 270 C to 330 C at atmosphere pressure, the vapor pressures of the components are
sufficiently different so that Raoult's law may be neglected due to the insignificant contribution of
the less volatile component on the distillation process. The fuel-oil obtained were composed of
Acenaphthalene C12H8, Acenaphene C12H10, Fluorene C13H10 and Phenanthrene C14H10 as it was
shown by Constantin GOSSELIN [8] who investigated the oil composition obtained from
distillation of tar. We note that the oil heating value obtained by the distillation of tar is inferior to
the Diesel one (table 3). This result is due to the difference between the ratio of C/H of the oil tar
formula and the Diesel one. However, the tar oil flash point values show that this oil can be easily
used as a combustible. Figure 3 and figure 4 show the effect of the catalyst on the distillation
process. It is obviously that ZSM-5 and NiCl2 catalysts lead to high heating values than the other
catalyst used in this study.
Page 379
Diesel
52
10800
6.5
-
Non
48
6000
7.25
27
FeSO4
44
6000
7.29
32
NiCl2
42
6400
7.56
30
45
yield(%)
40
35
30
25
Non
FeSO4
NiCl2
CoCl2
ZSM-5
catalyst
HHV(kcal/kg)
6500
6400
6300
6200
6100
6000
5900
Non
FeSO4
NiCl2
catalyst
Page 380
CoCl2
ZSM-5
CoCl2
42
6100
7.42
43
ZSM-5
46
6550
7.72
31
Page 381
Page 382
Page 383
Page 384
G ( s ) ( l ) = G ( s ) G(l ) = RT ln x
(1)
G ( s ) ( l ) = G ( s ) G( l ) = RT ln x
(2)
x
x
(3)
20.00
25.00
30.00
35.00
40.00
45.00
5.00
10.00
2 (o)
-DL-met
15.00
2 (o)
-DL-met
42.30
32.80
25.30
15.00
21.10
10.00
25.00
45.70
28.00
5.00
20.00
18.30
33.80
5.55
22.15
21.70
22.30
G( s ) ( s ) = G ( s ) G ( s ) = RT ln
Page 385
30.00
35.00
40.00
45.00
G ( s )
G ( l )
and
G (l )
are the Gibbs free energy of -DL-met and -DL-met in solution (J/mol),
and ( s ) are the Gibbs free energy of the solid of -DL-met and -DL-met (J/mol), and x
and x are the solubility (as mole fractions) of -DL-met and -DL-met in solution.
The solubilities of the polymorphs of DL-met in water, which have been reported by
Wantha and Flood (2011), were used to determined the changes of the Gibbs free energy in
equations (1) and (2) for -DL-met and -DL-met, respectively. The plots of the change of the
Gibbs free energy of the two polymorphs are shown in Fig. 4. The Gibbs free energies of both
polymorphs also confirm that -DL-met (which has a lower Gibbs free energy) is the stable
polymorph and -DL-met (which has a higher Gibbs free energy) is the metastable polymorph.
Moreover, the plots of the Gibbs free energy strongly suggest that the two polymorphs are
monotropic system, since the polymorphs are not interconvertible, and the Gibbs free energy of DL-met is always lower than -DL-met at all temperatures below the melting point.
Transformation of the polymorphs of DL-met crystals
The transformation of the polymorphs can be analyzed by means of XRPD analysis. If
there is no phase transformation, the heights of the characteristic peaks do not change. If there is
transformation (the fraction of the polymorph changes), the heights of the characteristic peaks
change correspondingly. For example, if -DL-met is transformed to -DL-met, the heights of the
characteristic peaks of -DL-met decrease while the heights of the characteristic peaks of -DLmet increase.
The changes in X-ray Diffraction profiles during grinding are shown in Fig. 5. Initially,
the characteristic peaks of pure -DL-met do not overlap. After grinding the characteristic peaks of
-DL-met (22.3/2, 28.0/2 and 33.8/2) do not change, but its intensities become lower than
that of the intact -DL-met. This indicates that -DL-met was not transformed during grinding.
This also confirms that -DL-met is the stable polymorph.
Page 386
280
-12.6
290
300
310
320
330
340
350
-DL-met
-DL-met
-12.8
-13.0
-13.2
-13.4
-13.6
-13.8
-14.0
Temperature (K)
- Form
- Form ground
for 5 min
+ - Form
+ - Form ground
for 5 min
- Form
- Form ground
for 5 min
2 (o )
Page 387
(a) -DL-met
(b) -DL-met
Fig. 6 Crystal structures of DL-met: gray = C atom, white = H atom, red = O atom, yellow = S
atom, and violet = N atom. (Matsuoka et al., 1999)
The results of both SMT in water (Wantha and Flood, 2012a) and SST (this work) of the
polymorphs of DL-met showed that -DL-met was transformed to -DL-met. This confirms that DL-met is the stable polymorph and -DL-met is the metastable polymorph. Moreover, the
Page 388
Page 389
Page 390
Hydrodynamics behavior in high-density riser and downer reactors was studied by means
of a numerical approach. A two-fluid model based on kinetic theory of granular flow was
developed to simulate the flow behavior in theses reactors. A k- turbulent model was used for
calculating the turbulent parameters. The simulation results reveal that solid volume fraction in
the downer reactor is much more uniform than that in the riser reactor. In addition, large particle
cluster formation near the wall of the riser can be observed. This large cluster formation leads to
higher RNI(s) in the riser. However, the RNI(vs) both in the riser and downer are almost the same
except near the entrance region where the RNI(vs) in the riser is higher than that in the downer.
Keywords: Simulation, Computational Fluid Dynamics, Hydrodynamic, Riser, Downer
INTRODUCTION
Circulating fluidized bed (CFB) reactors are wildly used in the chemical and
petrochemical industries due to their good mass- and heat- transfer characteristics and continuous
particle handling ability. Two types of CFB have been operated according to the gas-solid flow
direction, which are co-current up-flow CFB (riser) and co-current down-flow CFB (downer). In
the riser, both gas and solid particles are fed to the reactor near the bottom section. Both gas and
solid particles are co-currently flow upward against the gravitational force. The riser reactors have
been used in FCC processes (Chang et al., 2001; Theologos et al., 1997), gasification (Kersten et
al., 2003) and so on. The downer reactor is the new type of CFB which has been developed.
Since both gas and particles are fed to the downer reactor near the top section and flow cocurrently downward along the direction of the gravity, back-mixing of phases is effectively
reduced (Wei and Zhu, 1996; Zhao et al., 2010). Thus this reactor type attracted great attention
from industry, especially for fast reaction with intermediates as desired products. Previous studies
in the CFBs riser and downer are mainly focusing on the hydrodynamics heat and mass transfer in
the low solids fraction regime (Khongprom, 2011; Khongprom et al., 2012; Limtrakul et al. 2008).
Many attempts have been made to operate CFB reactors at high solid concentration regime,
especially in the downer reactors (Cheng and Li, 2004; Liu, 1999). The hydrodynamics, heat and
Page 391
Fig. 1 Reactor geometries used in this study; (a) riser and (b) downer.
Mathematical Model
The Eulerian model used in this study is a two-fluid model based on the kinetic theory of
granular flow. A set of governing equations, continuity, momentum, and solid phase fluctuating
energy conservation equations is shown in Table 1. The constitutive equations were shown in
previous works (Khongprom, 2011; Khongprom et al. 2012). The effect of turbulence was taken
into account via a k- turbulent model. The detail of this turbulent model can be found in
Khongprom et al. (2012). The governing equations and the constitutive equations were solved
Page 392
g g + g g vg = 0
t
(1)
- Solid phase;
( s s ) + ( s s v s ) = 0
t
(2)
( g g v g ) + ( g g v g v g ) = g P +
t
g + tu , g + g g g gs (v g v s )
(3)
- Solid phase;
( s s v s ) + ( s s v s v s ) = s P +
t
s + tu , s Ps + s s g + gs (v g v s )
(4)
3
( s s ) + ( s s )vs =
2 t
( p I + ) : v
s
(5)
+ ( s ) s
Page 393
Value
54
1545
Inlet conditions
- Superficial gas velocity (m/s)
- Solids circulation rate (kg/m2s)
1
400
RNI ( s ) =
( s )
( s )
=
max ( s )
s ( mf s )
(6)
where ( s ) is the standard deviation of the solid volume fraction ( s ), max ( s ) is the
maximum possible standard deviation for the given averaged solid volume fraction ( s ), and
RNI (V p ) =
=
(Vs )
max (Vs )
(V
(Vs )
Vs ) + (Vs Vs ,min )
2
s , max
(7)
where (Vs ) is the standard deviation of the solid velocity, max (Vs ) is the maximum possible
standard deviation for the averaged solid velocity ( Vs ), and Vs , min and Vs , max are the minimum and
maximum particle velocities, respectively.
Page 394
Inlet
Outlet
Inlet
0.00
0.03
0.06
0.09
0.13
0.16
0.19
0.22
0.25
0.28
0.32
0.35
0.38
0.41
0.44
0.47
0.50
0.54
0.57
0.60
0.63
(a)Riser(b)Downer
Fig. 2 Contour plot of solid volume fraction in riser (a) and downer (b).
Page 395
Fig. 3 Radial distributions of solid volume fraction in the riser (a) and the downer (b).
Radial flow nonuniformity (RNI)
Solid volume fraction
Fig. 6 shows the RNI(s) in the riser and downer along the reactor height. It can be seen
that the RNI(s) in the riser is higher than that in the downer. This indicates that the radial
distribution of the solid volume fraction in the downer is more uniform than that in the riser
reactor. The reason is that the large particle cluster formation near the wall of the riser reactor
causes a high particle concentration near the wall with very low solids fraction in the core region
leading to less lateral uniformity.
Page 396
Inlet
Inlet
Outlet
0.02
0.12
0.24
0.35
0.47
0.59
0.70
0.82
0.94
1.05
1.17
1.29
1.40
1.52
1.64
1.76
1.87
1.99
2.11
2.22
(a)Riser (b)Downer
m/s
Fig. 4 Solid velocity vector plot in riser (a) and downer (b)
Page 397
(a)
H(m)
2.0
0.05
1.5
SolidVelocity(m/s)
1.0
0.2
0.5
0.0
00.20.40.60.81.0
r/R()
Fig. 5 Radial distributions of solid velocity in the riser (a) and the downer (b).
0.6
RNI(s)
0.4
0.2
Riser
Downer
01234567
AxialPositionfromInlet(m)
Fig. 6 Variation of the radial nonuniformity index of solids volume fraction in the riser and
downer.
Solid velocity
Fig. 7 shows the RNI(Vp) in the riser and the downer at various heights. Near the inlet
section (0-2 m), the RNI(Vp) in the riser is higher than that in the downer reactor. This is because
of the more uniform of solid velocity in this region of downer reactor (see Figs. 4(a) and 5). After
2 m, the RNI(Vp) of both riser and the downer reactors is almost the same. This implies that the
cluster formation at the wall of the riser and the high density peak of particle concentration near
the wall of the downer reactor induce the same level of particle velocity nonuniformity in these
reactors.
Page 398
RNI(vs)
0.4
Riser
0.2
Downer
01234567
AxialPositionfromInlet(m)
Fig. 7 Variation of the radial nonuniformity index of solid velocity in the riser and downer.
CONCLUSION
The hydrodynamics behavior and the radial flow nonuniformity in high-density riser and
downer reactors were studied by mean of numerical simulation. The solids volume fraction
distribution in the downer is much more uniform than that in the riser reactor. This leads to lower
RNI(s) in downer reactor. Near the inlet section, the RNI(Vs) in the downer is lower than that in
the riser due to more uniform particle velocity in the system. However, the RNI(Vs) both in the
riser and downer reactors are almost the same after the inlet section.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
This work was financially supported by King Mongkuts University of Technology North
Bangkok.
Page 399
Page 400
Page 401
sec (Tp / T2 ) where Tp is the time to peak and T2 is the time to half peak and that acceptable
tolerance can be changed up to 20% for Tp and 60% for T2 .
Fig. 1 definition of impulse waveform (a) lightning and (b) switching according to [3]
Page 402
spark gap
C1
spark gap R F
RF
RT
C1
C2
RT
C2
(b)
(a )
V = V0 et et
(1)
t
t
RT C1
RF C2
e
V = V0 e
(2)
Referring to Fig. 2, the circuit consists of two capacitors in which the first capacitor C1 will be
charged directly from a d.c. voltage to the point of required voltage until the spark gap breaks
down. The energy stored in capacitor C1 is then discharged through the other capacitor, C2 which
is the test object. The impulse voltage (front and tail waves) is controlled by changing RF and
RT respectively, V is the output impulse voltage and V0 is the required voltage stored across
capacitor C1 .
Different impulse voltage waveforms, which are created following the IEC standard in
both generating and testing guidelines [3, 4], can be adjusted for any particular test objects and
studying topics. In addition, some practical techniques can be found in [5]. The values of the
following variables; V0 , and can be determined by using the three different relationship
curves for build-in function impulse generator [3].
Multi-stage Impulse Generator
The corona discharge is the problem of a single-stage impulse circuit. In 1923, Marx
therefore proposed a multi-stage impulse circuit. The modified three-stage circuit is presented in
Fig. 3,
Page 403
RS n
RS n
G1 nC1
R 2 n R1 n
G3
G 2 nC1
R2 n
R1 n
R2 n
R1 n
R1 n
C2
CC
t1 = 3.0 R1 1 2
C1 + C2
(3)
t2 = 0.7 ( R1 + R2 )( C1 + C2 )
(4)
For example, the value of R1 and R2 where an impulse generator has three stages with the capacitor
of 1.5 F each, the load capacitor at 0.0125 F producing 1.2/50 sec wave is 32.8 and
106.57 respectively.
Voltage Multiplier
The high direct voltages can be generated from the rectification of an alternate voltage.
The Cockcroft-Walton circuit is one of the voltage multipliers as shown in Fig. 4 [3]. For the
circuit of resistor, diode and capacitor produce an output voltage of double voltage as presented in
Fig. 4a) and 6 times of V (2*n*V) for three-stage circuit in Fig. 4b) with open circuit only, where
Resistor Rs functions as the current limiter.
Referring to Fig. 4a), the voltage ripple output depends on each load resistor RL and
output capacitor C2 .
Page 404
C1
D
V
C
C2
RL
(a )
RS
( b)
Fig. 5 impulse voltage (a) single-stage impulse generator (b) equation (2)
Multi-stage Impulse Generator
The three-stage impulse generator simulated in PSCAD style is shown in Fig 6. The initial
charge voltage value is 100 kV. The output waveform shows that the peak voltage is
approximately 3 times (281.9 kV), front time is 1.5 sec and tail time is 40 sec .
Page 405
Page 406
Page 407
Page 408
Page 409
Page 410
Page 411
(1)
(2)
BN machine
(3)
Total machine
Economic Analysis
Economic analysis is a vital factor for decision making. Cost is significant in business
competitiveness. Thus, cost analysis is an important evaluation to be concerned. For debottleneck,
Page 412
Valueadded/Unit
Station
Baht
Demagnetize
5.00
Washing
30.00
Deburring
10.00
ECM
20.00
Inspection
10.00
laser
5.00
Pressing
10.00
FineBoring
15.00
Baht
250.00
2
4,000Baht/m
100,000Baht/Shift
1,000,000Baht/Lot
RESULTS
From simulation in real world situation, the bottleneck station of this production line
incurs at OP30, Washing of ECM, Inspection and Laser station.
Solutions of all three cases show the behavior of production line. Batch size and
production strategies dramatically impact to continuous production in different criteria. (In case
of buffer allocation, their outputs of each batch size compared in graph are the best outputs from
buffer space adjusting.)
Fig. 2 Comparison of throughput graph for BA, kanban and Base case
As Fig. 2, this compares the throughputs of each method. The large batch size strongly
impacts on throughput rate of this manufacturing. The highest throughput rate is at 72pieces/batch for all cases. When batch size is larger than 72-piece/batch, throughput rate suddenly
decrease.
Page 413
Fig. 3 Comparison graph of life span for BA, kanban and Base case
In kanban system, at 24-batch size has higher throughput rate than 48-batch size because
24-batch size flows to downstream more frequently than 48-batch size. However, 24-batch size has
higher average life-span, as Fig 3, since at the washing station until fine boring station; it has to
wait for the
available machines. For example, calculating the average life-span of 24-batch size is
compared with 48-batch size. 48-batch size has double size of 24-batch size. At laser station, both
24-batch size and 48-batch size have to wait a queue on machine 46.65 minutes. The output of 48batch size is two times of 24-batch size. Hence, the average waiting time of 48-batch size is an half
of 24-batch size. The larger volume compensates the stalled time. This results in 24-batch size has
average operating time per item is more than 48-batch size. For example at laser station
Page 414
Different
Avearge
BatchWaitingtime
Different
Batchsize OP30Line1 OP30Line2
amount/batch batch/day
Throughput
atWashing
amount/shift
waiting
437
24
49.00
45.33
0
437
48
98.00
90.66
0
422
60
122.00
113.33
8.68
2.00
7.00
14.00
437
72
147.00
135.99
0
430
84
173.00
166.21
6.79
2.00
5.00
10.00
430
96
196.00
181.32
0
414
108
219.00
203.99
15.02
4.00
4.00
16.00
422
120
245.00
226.65
0
Fig 4 shows bottleneck ratio of each method. At base case, BN ratio is highest in the all of
methods. Kanban approach is the best solution following by buffer allocation when
concerning bottleneck ratio perspective.
Fig. 5 Graph of WIP comparison for Push, Pull and Base case
Page 415
Fig 6 Graph of operation cost comparison for Push, Pull and Base case
CONCLUSION AND DISCUSSION
This paper presents not only computer simulation to detect bottleneck and propose
debottleneck solutions but also observes characteristics of serial production line by varied
conditions. Referring to three experiments, each solution is able to reduce severity of bottleneck in
different specific conditions. The batch size is avital important factor that influences behavior of
this line. In fact, the batch size is larger than 72-piece/batch resulting in their throughput rate of
any approaches decrease and having similar rate. Furthermore, the batch size significantly affects
to a life-span of works. Their trends are continuous increment while the batch size enlarges.
Each production controlling strategy makes a different work-in-process level. The push
system has higher WIP level than the pull system. Considering cost analysis selects the appropriate
solution. Consequently, push system gains low cost when the batch size is large. Alternatively,
pull system has lowest cost in solutions as the small batch size.
These management methods are difficult to eradicate all bottlenecks. At ECM station has
four substations inside and there is no area to keep buffer between substations. Hence, in order to
achieve better performance, the way of bottleneck reduction could be cycle time reduction by
increasing machine or splitting this process.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
I would like to be thankful Continental Automotive (Thailand) Company Limited for
information, study case model and suggestion during dissertation implementation.
Page 416
Page 417
In todays World one of the most precious things are Time and Resources. The main factor
in the construction is the utilization of time and resources efficiently. To save both, todays world is
open to innovative ideas for the same. The present paper deals with the comparative study of a two
storey building made with Rapid wall (Gypsum panels) and Conventional Building. The building
used for comparison is a two storey structure constructed with gypsum panels as an initiative by
Fertilizers and Chemicals of Travancore, Kochi called as Rapid House. The structure is located in
Kochi, Kerala and these Gypsum panels were made using Australian Technology. The
conventional building used for comparison has walls made of bricks and slab cast in concrete. The
method of construction, the quantity of raw materials used, the time taken for the construction and
the economy of construction is discussed in this paper
Keywords: resources, innovative ideas, rapid wall, gypsum panels, conventional
INTRODUCTION
There is a huge growing requirement of building materials in India due to the existing
housingshortage of 24.7 million units mainly for the low income groups in urban India. To meet
this challenge, India requires innovative, energy efficient building materials for strong and durable
housing with fast track method of construction at affordable cost concern. The need of the
21stcentury is for energy efficient and eco-friendly products. Rapid wall panel (Glass Fiber
Reinforced Gypsum panel, GFRG) provides rapid or faster construction and contributes to
environmental protection, providing a solution to many of the above issues and concerns. Rapid
wall, also called Gypcrete panel is an energy efficient green building material with huge
potential for use as load bearing and non-load bearing wall panels. Rapid wall is manufactured in a
moulding process using glass-fibre reinforced, water-resistant gypsum plaster and water proofing
additives. All panels are up to 12 meters long and 3 meters high. The panels are cellular in form
and 124 millimeters thick. The formed cells can be used to accommodate building services such as
plumbing and electrical conduits or they can be filled with insulation, for increased thermal
performance, or with concrete for increased load bearing structural capacity .Rapid wall can also
be used as intermediary floor slab/roof slab in combination with Reinforced Cement Concrete
(RCC) as a composite material. Since the advent of innovative rapid wall panel in 1990 in
Australia, it has been used for buildings ranging from single storey to medium - high rise
buildings. It has very high level of resistance to fire, heat, water, termites, rot and corrosion.
Concrete infill with vertical reinforcement rods enhances its vertical and lateral load capabilities.
Rapid wall buildings are resistant to earthquakes, cyclones and fire (5). Axial and shear load tests
have been conducted by Wu and Dare (2004).
Page 418
The panels can be used as load bearing wall, or filler walls for framed structure and as roof slab.
1-2
Unfilled panels
5-6
Filled panels
More than 6
Note: In case of heavy wind load / Earth quake loads reinforced concrete filled panels are
preferred.
Unfilled panels: The cavities in the Rapid wall also referred to as cells remain unfilled
except for the starter bars provided for the positioning of wall and the joints occurring.
Page 419
Joints
The Joints can be divided into Horizontal joints and Vertical joints
Horizontal Joint:
Foundation joint: The connection of wall and foundation is the plinth beam and starter
bars are placed in position as per the cavity. The starter bars are to be provided for 40cm high and
after the wall panels are erected, the starter bars are concreted to a height of 45cm. In case of
panels starting from existing walls, starter bars are to be inserted into holes drilled and epoxy
grouted.
Top floor wall joint: The starter bars start from the slab level, the concrete is placed in the
wall in case of unfilled panels after placing plywood strip by cutting the web to support the
concrete. The reinforcements at joints continue as it is.
Vertical Joint:
L joint: 3 starter bars are used, one in corner and other in adjacent cell. The horizontal bars
of 6dia are placed at 30cm c/c and the adjacent web is cut to place the steel cage in position, The
concrete is filled after proper alignment of the panel.
T joint: This type of joint occur in two cases, one a continuous panel and a perpendicular
panel. Second, all three panels are discontinuous at the joint. In the first case, inner flange of
continuous panel is cut and adjacent web of perpendicular panel is cut and the starter bars are
provided and is concreted. And in the second case all the adjacent web of the panels is cut and the
starter bars are provided and concreted.
Page 420
Straight Joint: In this case 3 starter bars are provided, one in the Joint and other in the
adjacent cells. The web of adjacent cells is cut in order to accommodate the horizontal tie rods and
the concrete is filled in the cavities.
Note: M20 concrete with 10mm size aggregates are used for concreting.
Filler walls: In case of rapid wall use in framed structure, dowels are provided from the framed
structure and it is concreted at those points.
Page 421
Page 422
Rapid
House
Conventional Villa
Bricks
NIL
Gypsum
Panels
362 m2
NIL
Cement
River Sand
NIL
Quarry Sand
25mm /
12.5mm stone
aggregates
Steel
14.5 m3
21 days
Conventional Villa
Page 423
Page 424
Page 425
Page 426
Symbl
Yaw angle
Meaning
Base flap modification inclined angle
Pressure coefficient percentage change
Density
Drag coefficient percentage change
Shear wall
Fuel saving on the drag coefficient change
deg.
deg
-kg/m3
--- 2
N/m
Litter
---
---
velocity of vehicle
Pfb
N/m2
Pb
N/m2
Pn
N/m2
N/m2
Dynamic pressure
N/m2
Reynolds number
--
Re
Page 427
Units
Fig(1) Graphic depicting the distribution of aerodynamic drag for a heavy vehicle tractor-trailer
truck
The data show that under representative operational conditions a crosswind is present and
the distribution of aerodynamic drag between the tractor and trailer is 35% tractor and 65% trailer
(Drollinger, 1987 ).
Page 428
The present study focused on the modifications that can be used to reduces the
aerodynamic drag concentrated by the most important source of drag (i.e. trailer base ) by using
base flaps modification. This type of technologies added on the back base of trailer to study the
effects of changing its inclined angle and also increasing the length of it on the performance.
(Mason, W.T. et al.1999)suggested the splitter device as technology that can be added to the base
of trailer .In present work a combination between the base flap and splitter studied to make the base
flap more efficient than that without splitter. The benefit of this to delay the separation behind the
trailer.
The theoretical part in present study solved by using ANSYS package with FLOTRAN
CFD analysis on two dimensional solid model was constructed semitrailer with Turbulence model
of two equation model
. The output data from the solution was pressure contour, velocity
contour and stream line and velocity vectors on the tractor trailer with and without modification
at =0 only .
4.Experimental Work
In the present investigation the experimental procedure adopted to determine drag
reduction due to different types of modification and to study the change in
aerodynamic
characteristic of the tractor-trailer due to this modification. The experiment was done for scaled
Page 429
All the dimension like width, height and the length of truck model is shown in fig(4).
L6
L2
L11
L5
L12
L3
L1 L7
L8
L4
L10
L9
All dimension in cm
Page 430
L11
L3
:local pressure
Cp
..(3)
Page 431
...
(5)
The drag force in pervious law measured from the drag measurement device from experiment .
Drag Coefficient Reduction
(6)
8.Results and Discussion
8.1-Base Flap Modification Results
Figures(6)to(9)shows the pressure coefficient with yaw angle for different value of the
base flaps inclined angle () from (0to 30) step 10.It is clear from these figures that the base flap
has a positive impact on pressure coefficients for all values for , however it can been seen from
the figures that the best results can be achieved from this modification is happened to occurs
when =10 for which =0 .The solid line curve represent the Cp distribution without
modification, from this figure the efficient value of is 10 in which maximum value of Cp=-0.91
at Y/L3=0.25.
8.2-After Body Additional Length Results
Figures(10,11,12,13) at equals(0,5,10) show that optimum length ratio when
K/L2=0.09for maximum allowable length (4cm) for model and (120cm) for full scale, the value of
CP at Y/L3=1 is (-0.94) . But in different value of Cp and there is a difference between them in the
curves at K/L2=0.045and K/L2=0.022 it was noticed that the previous curve advanced than the
curve of k/L2=0.045 this means the separation is advance with this after body additional length.
8.3-Pressure Coefficient Percentage Improvement
Figures from (14) to (16) shows the conditions of the pressure coefficient depending on the
location of the modification. In which on trailer rear there was increasing in Cp( positive value of
Cp)while on the trailer face there was reduction in Cp (negative value of Cp%).
Fig.(14) shows the pressure coefficient increasing on the rear of trailer with base flap
modification with four yaw angle at different value of . It is shown that the maximum increase in
Cp was happens with a base flap inclined by an angle () equals to 10 with increases in pressure
equals to 9.7%. While for =0,=20,30 the increased in pressure was not to exceeded 6%.
Fig.(15) shows the Cp increase with yaw angle at each value of K/L2(after body length
ratio)modification. It is noted that the maximum increasing in pressure when the after body length
ratio K/L2=0.09with maximum increase in Cp% equals to 9% at =15 and then followed by
curve of K/L2=0.06, 0.045 and 0.022 respectively.
Fig.(16) shows the pressure coefficient increasing by using base flap modified with splitter
for each value of . In this figure the Cp change represent the ratio of the difference between the
Page 432
Fig.(18) illustrate the drag coefficient improvement of modified base flap with splitter at
each value of , it is noticed that as the splitter added there is an improvement in value of
when
=0 ,this mean that a reduction in
as the splitter added. It is noted that all the curves lying
under the solid curve (without modification) this means there was benefit of the use of this
modification.
,it is clear
Fig.(19) shows the percentage change in value of pressure coefficient as
from this figure that the maximum reduction of
at =10 with =0,5,10 with maximum
at equals to 22.5% =10.While for the curve when =5 have maximum
improvement of
reduction when =5 with value of
=13%,all the curve have the same behavior in which there
is an improvement in drag coefficient value which mean that there is a reduction occurs.
Fig.(20) show the percentage drag coefficient change with yaw angle at each value of
with modified base flap (by adding splitter) . It is noted from this figure there was a reduction in
value of
equals to approximately 21% at =20,knowing that this ratio represent the ratio of
the different between the
with base flap with splitter and
with base flap without splitter.
Fig.(21) shows the drag coefficient of the after body additional length . The solid curve
represent the drag coefficient without modification and the other dashed curve show the drag
coefficient with modification with different length ratio of base flaps(K/L2).From the figure the
lower drag coefficient was at K/L2=0.099 at =0 and at =15 and follows with K/L2=0.066, this
shows that as the base flap length increase the pressure at trailer base increase.
Fig(22)Represent the percentage drag coefficient reduction with yaw angle at increasing
the base flap length ratio modification . It is noted that the maximum reduction at K/L2=0.09 with
=19this due to the fact that as the length increase after body increase the pressure
value of
increases.
Fig.(23) shows the bar-chart of the drag force improvement by changing the base flap
inclined angle() this figure show that the best value of is 10 with drag reduction of 19%.
Fig.(24)represent the drag reduction when the base flap modified by splitter. It is clear the
maximum effect of the splitter on the base flap when =20 with drag reduction of 25%.
Page 433
Page 434
Page 435
0.8
wi th out modi fi cati on
Y/ L3
=0
=10deg
=20deg
0.6
=30deg
0.4
0.2
-1.04
-1
-0.96
-0.92
-0.88
CP
Fig (6) pressure coefficient distribution Trailer rear with base flaps modification at =0
0.8
3
L
/
Y
=10
=20
0.6
=30
0.4
0.2
-1.04
P
C
-1.08
-1
-0.96
-0.92
Page 436
0.8
3
L
/
Y
0.6
WITH OUT MODIFICATION
=0
=10
=20
=30
0.4
0.2
-1.12
-1.08
P
C
-1.16
-1.04
-1
-0.96
0.8
3
L
/
Y
=10
=20
0.6
=30
0.4
0.2
-1.04
P
C
-1.08
-1
-0.96
-0.92
Page 437
Y/L2
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.2
-1.08
-1.04
-1
-0.96
-0.92
CP
Fig (10) pressure coefficient distribution Trailer rear with after body length modification at =0
Y/L3
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.2
-1.12
-1.08
-1.04
-1
CP
-0.96
-0.92
Page 438
WIITHOUT MODIFICATION
K/L2=0.022
K/L2=0.045
K/L2=0.066
K/L2=0.09
Y/L3
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.2
-1.16
-1.12
-1.08
-1.04
-1
CP
Fig (12) pressure coefficient distribution trailer rear with different of K/L2 at =10
0.8
Y/L3
K/L2=0.045
K/L2=0.066
K/L2=0.09
0.6
0.4
0.2
-1.2
-1.16
-1.12
-1.08
CP
-1.04
-1
Page 439
8
=0deg
=10deg
=20deg
%
p
C
=30deg
0
0
12
16
yaw angle(deg)
Fig(14) pressure coefficient distribution increasing on trailer rear with yaw angle of base flaps
modification
12
K/L2=0.0228
K/L2=0.0457
K/L2=0.0686
K/L2=0.09
8
%
e
v
a
P
C
-4
-8
0
yaw angle(deg)
12
16
Fig(15) pressure coefficient increasing on trailer rear with after body length ratio
Page 440
12
10
%
v
a
P
C
= 0deg
= 10deg
= 20deg
= 30deg
6
2
0
12
16
yaw angle(deg)
Fig(16) pressure coefficient distribution increasing on trailer rear with yaw angle with splitter
2.4
= 20deg
CD
= 30deg
1.6
1.2
0.8
YAW ANGLE
12
16
Page 441
2.4
without modification
=0deg
=10deg
=20deg
CD
=30deg
1.6
1.2
0.8
0
12
16
yaw angle(deg)
25
20
15
%
D
C
10
=0deg
=10deg
=20deg
=30deg
0
0
yaw angle(deg)
12
16
Fig(19) The change in drag coefficients with yaw angle at each value of
Page 442
20
10
0
0
12
16
yaw angle(deg)
Fig(20) drag coefficient decreasing on trailer rear with base flap inclined angle modified
splitter
2.4
CD
1.6
1.2
0.8
0
yaw angle(deg)
12
16
Fig(21) Drag coefficient on trailer rear with after body length ratio
Page 443
with
20
%
D
C
K/L2=0.022
K/L2=0.045
K/L2=0.06
K/L2=0.09
15
10
0
0
12
yaw angle(deg)
16
Fig(22) drag coefficient decreasing on trailer rear with base flap additional length
Page 444
-0.88
pressure coefficinet
-0.92
-0.96
-1
Experimental
Theortical
-1.04
-1.08
-1.12
0
0.2
0.4
0.6
X/L2
0.8
Fig. (26)Comparison between the experimental results and theoretical results over the roof of the
trailer
Page 445
0.8
= 0deg
Y/L3
= 10deg
= 20deg
= 30deg
0.4
0.2
0
-0.98
-0.96
-0.94
pressure coefficient
-0.92
-0.9
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.2
0
-0.98
-0.96
-0.94
-0.92
-0.9
Fig. (28)pressure coefficient distribution trailer rear with each value of K/L2
Page 446
Fig.(31) Particle trace around the vehicle model velocity contour without modification
Page 447
Page 448
Fig.(35) Particle trace around the vehicle model velocity contour at =10
Fig.(37) Particle trace around the vehicle model velocity contour at =20
Page 449
Page 450
Fig.1 Monthly average of photoperiod (-) and temperature (--) from January 2010 to
February 2011.
Data Collection
Both experiments were collected daily day length, daily maximum and minimum
temperature, DAS to PI, flowering, maturity and yield.
Sample Preparation
Both experiments were randomly selected 4 main culms from different hill for PI
investigation and repeated every 3 days until PI was accomplished. Stereo microscope was used to
examine spikelet primordial stage prior to SEM sample preparation. Stop sampling if the spikelet
primordial stage was determined. SEM sample preparation followed the procedure of Moncur
(1988).
SEM Image for PI Identification
The morphological change of the shoot apex in the rice plant from vegetative to PI and
primary rachis branch primordial were reported in Matsuo, T. and Hoshikawa, K. (1993).
Page 451
Vegetative Stage
Fig.2 The vegetative stage image of KDML 105 (SA - shoot apex, LP- leaf primordial).
Fig.3 The PI image of KDML 105 (am apical meristem, LP-leaf primordial, NN neck
node primordial).
Fig.4 The primary rachis branch image ofKDML 105 (H- hair, LP - leaf primordial, PR- primary
rachis branch primordial).
RESULTS
Cropping Season
Using SEM, rice shoot apex of KDML 105 was investigated under 5 different
photoperiods to identify DAS to PI. The results showed that photoperiod of 10, 11 and 11.30 hrs.
for 12 cycles could induce PI with the neck node primordial stage (Fig.3) and acquired 3 days to
attain primary branch primordial stage (Fig.4). At 150 DAS, under 12 hrs. photoperiod and longer,
Page 452
Page 453
Page 454
ABSTRACT
The Bacillus cereus contamination in milk is critical affected in human health and safety.
In order to determine the number of B. cereus, a total of 50 milk samples from various sampling
points along milk processing lines were collected in dairy plants between October and December,
2011. These samples included raw milk from the holding tank in front of dairy factory (M1), the
balance tanks (M2), and the mixed tanks (M3). The pasteurized milk was collected from the
holding tank (M4) and the packaging machine (M5). The swab sampling points along the dairy
milk tanks were determined and found as positive results. The highest B. cereus number was found
in M2 and M3 that resulted from inadequate sanitizing. In contrast, the raw milk had the low B.
cereus number among sampling points. There was implied to concern the sanitization of milk
processing because of spore forming in equipment. However, the contamination may occur with
several sources such as raw milk, animal feed, soil, faeces, or climate that was the beginning of
microbial contamination.
Page 455
Page 456
M1
45
41
48
M2
5.6x105
2.6x105
6.7x105
M3
7.1x105
6.4x105
8.1x105
M4
2.3x105
1.7x105
1.8x105
M5
1.2x105
1.5x105
2.1x105
Page 457
M1
ND
ND
ND
M2
2.4x105
2.6x105
3.7x105
M3
5.1x105
3.2x105
2.8x105
M4
5.9x104
7.2x104
1.1x105
M5
1.8x104
1.2x104
1.5x104
Page 458
November December
M1
121
131
151
M2
304
353
384
M3
324
393
343
M4
152
131
132
M5
121
122
161
SD = standard deviation
DISCUSSION
The contaminated B. cereus in pasteurized milk was possible due to obtain from
environment and milk process. The raw milk was also the primary source of B. cereus
contamination. Thus, the sample should be collected from farm areas in different periods of
time. However, the finding of B. cereus on the surface of milk tank leaded to the
contamination along the milk processing consequence to short-shelf life and human diseases.
This finding may help to concern the hygienic system of cleaning in milk process.
Fig. 2 The average number of B. cereus isolates from swab milk samples of each sampling point in
dairy plant during October to December, 2011. (M1: front of dairy plant; M2: balanced tank; M3:
mixed tank; M4: holding tank; M5: packaging machine)
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
The authors would like to acknowledge the Mahasarakham University for financial. We
are gratefully for help from the Biology Department, Faculty of Science and the Protein and
Enzyme Technology Research Unit in Mahasarakham University.
Page 459
Page 460
STP49-9
ABSTRACT
Laccase a major enzyme of white-rot fungi involved in lignocellulose degradation. It is important
in biotechnological and environmental applications. The production of extracellular laccase by the
white-rot fungus Lentinus polychrous was investigated using agricultural wastes as culture media for
the growth of fungal mycelium. The agricultural wastes included peanut shells (PS) and rice husk
(RH), supplemented with rice bran (RB). The combination of PS and RB at the ratio 8:1 showed the
highest enzyme production, which was 1,628 U/L after 16 days of incubation. The 2:1 ratio of RH and
RB mixture had laccase activity of 1,000-1,600 U/L for 20 day-cultivation. The optimum pH and
temperature for laccase activity were found to be 4.5 and 30 oC, respectively. Comparison of different
production periods and the mix of PS with RB were found to be appropriate substrates for laccase
production. The results indicated that PS can reduce cultivation time and RB can enhance laccase
production.
Keywords: Laccase, Lentinus polychrous, Peanut shells, Rice husk, Rice bran
INTRODUCTION
Laccases are multi-copper containing enzymes that normally catalyze the oxidation of phenolic and
non-phenolic compounds in the presence of a mediator. The enzyme has been received much attention
and many potential applications in industry including pulp delignification (Lund and Felby, 2001), dye
detoxification and decolorization (Couto, 2007), denim bleaching (PazarlIog et al., 2005), food
industry (Selinheimo et al., 2006; Minussi et al., 2002) and organic synthesis (Mustafa et al., 2005)
have been identified. However, production costs for the enzyme are very high as there are many
fermentation factors such as, medium composition, temperature, system pH and mode of operation
which influence laccase production. Optimization of the medium for fungal cultivation is one of the
most important ways to increase activity and reduce cost in laccase production. More recent
approaches have focused on utilizing agricultural waste as an inexpensive carbon source that strongly
Page 461
Page 462
Agricultural waste
Microorganism
Peanut shells
Pleurotus
sapidus
Trametes sp.
AH28-2
2.10 106
U/kg
Wheat straw
L. edodes
250 U/g
20%Rice bran
L. edodes
528.9 U/kg
Rice husk
and rice bran (1:2)
L. polychrous
1,425 U/L
500 U/L
Reference
Linke et al.,
2005
Sun et al.,
2009
Mata and
Savoie, 1998
Silva et al.,
2005
Sarnthima
et al., 2009
RESULTS
Laccase production on agricultural wastes
L. polychrous was cultivated in two natural agricultural residues, peanut shells and rice husk,
supplemented with rice bran in different ratios. The total amount of culture medium for each flask was
controlled at 30 g. Laccase activities were determined after 4, 8, 12, 16 and 20 days of cultivation.
Laccase production from wastes of agricultural industries has been reported in many microorganisms
(Table 1). The materials are rich in lignocelluloses, which served as suitable carbon sources. Peanut
shells were used as an immobilized substrate for Pleurotus sapidus in fed-batch culture where laccase
activity reached to 500 U/L in the fifth cycle (57 days) (Linke et al., 2005). In addition, 20% peanut
shells were used for the cultivation of the Trametes sp. AH28-2 which obtained at maximum yield at
2.10 106 U/kg (Sun et al., 2009). Furthermore, wheat straw (Mata and Savoie, 1998), mixed with
eucalyptus residues and 20% rice bran (Silva et al., 2005) were reported to be materials for laccase
production in L. edodes with production of 250 U/g and 528.9 U/kg, respectively.
The combination of rice husk and rice bran in the ratio of 1:2 was used for laccase production
in L. polychrous. The laccase activity was achieved at 1,425 U/L (Sarnthima et al., 2009). Comparing
Page 463
3.0
2.5
2.0
1.5
PS:RB 2:1
1.0
PS:RB 4:1
0.5
PS:RB 8:1
0.0
4
Time (Days)
12
16
20
Figure 1. Time course of laccase activity from L. polychrous grown on a mixture of peanut shells (PS)
and rice bran (RB) at different ratios. The growth temperature was 25oC.
Rice husk is a lignocellulosic material obtained from rice milling. This is produced in
Thailand in large amounts every year. So it is very abundant and has a low price. Rice husk has been
tested as a fungal media in many studies (Sarnthima et al., 2009; Suwannawong et al., 2010). In this
work, the cultivation of L. polychrous was determined in rice husk supplemented with rice bran.
Figure 2 shows the different media ratios and laccase activities. The results revealed that laccase
activity was increased at the same rate as cultivation time. Maximum laccase activity was obtained
after 20 days of cultivation. Enzyme activities for the mixture of rice husk and rice bran were observed
at 1.7, 1.6 and 1.1 U/ml when cultured in the ratios of 2:1, 4:1 and 8:1, respectively. The consequence
of low enzyme activity was low enzyme production. The laccase production is due to the composition
of the media. However, rice husk contains silica which is a desiccant and increasing the rice husk
Page 464
Figure 2. Time course of laccase activity from L. polychrous grown on a mixture of rice husk (RH)
and rice bran (RB) at different ratios. The growth temperature was 25oC.
Optimum pH and temperature for laccase activity
Crude laccase enzyme activity was investigated at different pH and temperatures. The
combination of peanut shells and rice bran for all ratios had optimum pH and temperatures of 4.5 and
30 oC, respectively. The highest specific laccase activity in the peanut shells and rice bran ratio of 8:1
(by wt) was 5.6 U/mg. A previous report has shown optimum laccase activity at pH 6.0 and 40 oC
when L. polychrous was cultured on sorghum seeds (Sarnthima and Khammuang, 2008). Purified
laccase was investigated by Murugesan et al. (2006), who reported the optimum pH at 5.0 and
temperature at 40 oC. The recombinant P. sajor-caju (Psc lac4) showed the optimums to be at pH 3.5
and 35 oC (Soden et al., 2002). By comparison, our study showed slightly different optimum pH and
temperature for laccase activity from the previous reports. There were different components in the
media involved in either catalytic mechanism or substrate interaction. The rice bran was composed of
20.9% total dietary fiber, 1.9% soluble dietary fiber, 2.4% nitrogen and, 22.4% fat (Kahlon et al.,
1990). Moreover, the different optimum pH and temperature could due to different isozymes which
are produced in different media.
Page 465
Figure 3. The optimum pH of laccase activity from L. polychrous grown on a mixture of rice husk
(RH) and rice bran (RB) for 16 days. The growth temperature was 25oC for the different media ratios.
Figure 4. The optimum temperature from laccase activity of L. polychrous grown on a mixture of rice
husk (RH) and rice bran (RB) for 16 days. The growth temperature was 25oC for the different media
ratios.
DISCUSSION
The combination of peanut shells and rice bran was more suitable for laccase production than
the combination of rice husk and rice bran. The 8:1 ratio of peanut shells and rice bran contributed
toward laccase activity of 1,000-1,600 U/L after 20 days of cultivation. The results indicate that the
combination of peanut shells and rice bran are more suitable than rice husk and rice bran for laccase
production. Both combinations had the same optimum pH and temperature for crude laccase activity
after 16 days of cultivation at 4.5 and 30 oC, respectively. These results are interesting in further
characterizing the biochemical properties of laccase and their potential in environment treatment.
Page 466
Page 467
Page 468
Page 469
STP51-10
Page 470
Page 471
Fig. 1 cultures of HSC/CD34+ from HbE/-thalassemic patients (A) and normal donors (B).After 7
days,HbE/-thalassemic cell developed to erythroblasts and showed characteristic cell morphology of
cells undergoing apoptosis including cell membrane blebbing and nuclear fragmentation.morphology
of cells undergoing apoptosis including cell membrane blebbing and nuclear fragmentation.
Page 472
Fig. 2 SDS-PAGE was stained with silver stain of -thalassemia/Hb E and normal controls in day 0
(fresh sample) (A). And of -thalassemia/Hb E and normal controls in day 7 (B). BM 4 is CD 34+thalassemia cells at protein concentration 8 g/l BM 5 is CD 34+normal cells at protein concentration 8 g/l
Table 1 The different expressed proteins, whose compared from normal donor and -thalassemia/Hb E
patients. These proteins were then identified by MS/MS analyses.
no.of
match
Intensity Day 0
Intensity Day 7
E
Normal patient Ratio
Epati
Normal ent
Protein name
NCBI ID
Ident
score
MAP4 protein
gi|29387211
51.77
10
0.00
21.00
11.52
24.12
2.09
Cullin-4A cullin-4A
gi|62122550
47.02
10
0.00
20.53
0.00
11.21
25.72
2.29
Polyamine oxidase
splice variant
gi|45439850
44.44
0.00
11.13
0.00
9.34
15.42
1.65
NEDD8-activating
enzyme E1
gi|4502169
42.70
13
14.97
18.73
1.25
15.93
18.60
1.17
gi|453210
37.74
12
9.22
10.62
1.15
12.38
19.66
1.59
gi|15207794
35.08
12
11.66
17.05
1.46
12.02
25.35
2.11
SDK1
gi|119607757
24.29
14
14.14
13.98
0.99
11.13
14.13
1.27
gi|5822333
34.6
11
0.00
11.50
16.55
29.24
1.77
peptide
Page 473
Ratio
Page 474
Page 475
Page 476
Page 477
STP55-12
ABSTRACT
Trace analysis method of 9 volatile organic compounds (VOCs), which are 1,3-butadiene,
vinyl chloride, dichloromethane, chloroform, 1,2-dicholoethane, benzene, 1,2-dichloropropane,
trichloro-ethylene and tetrachloroethylene in water has been studied using a purge and trap techniques
with a VOCARB 3000 trap and separated by gas chromatography-mass spectrometry (GC-MS). The
optimum conditions are 50C, 15 min, 180C and 260C for the sample temperature, purge time,
desorption temperature and bake temperature, respectively. These conditions were used to evaluate
their limit of detection, limit of quantitation, repeatability and accuracy. Drinking water and ground
water from Map Ta Phut area were analyzed volatile organic compounds contamination using this
method.
Keywords: Volatile organic compounds, Purge and trap, GC-MS
INTRODUCTION
Volatile organic compounds (VOCs) are common contaminants in environmental (air, soil,
water and food). VOCs are causes of air toxic, precursors of photochemical smog and acid deposition.
They are also causes of stratospheric ozone depletion and effect to human such as acute effect (taken
VOCs more than 1 mg/L) [1]. Notification of National Environmental Board No. 30 (2007) identifies
that there are nine volatile organic compounds in the air which are 1,3-butadiene, vinyl chloride,
dichloromethane, chloroform, 1,2-dichloroethane, benzene, 1,2-dichloropropane, trichloroethylene and
tetra-chloroethylene. The determination of VOCs has been analyzed using gas chromatography mass
spectrometry (GC-MS) because it is suitable for trace analysis. In addition, the purge and trap (PT)
technique which is the non-complicated solvent-free extraction technique has been used to extract the
volatile and semi-volatile compounds in aqueous samples [2-3]. This technique is more sensitive than
Page 478
Page 479
1,3 -butadiene
54
Vinylchloride
62
Dichloromethane
84, 86
Chloroform
83, 85
1,2-dicholoethane
62, 64
Benzene
78, 77
1,2-dichloropropane
63, 62
Trichloroethylene
130, 132
Tetrachloroethylene
164, 166
Toluene D-8
98, 100
RESULTS
Optimization of GC-MS
Firstly, the HP-5MS capillary column with 30m x 0.25 mm, 0.25 m film thickness (Agilent,
USA) was used for separation of nine VOCs. Unfortunately, this column cannot be separated 1,3butadiene-vinylchloride and dichloropropane-trichloroethylene peaks. The longer column of 60 m
with 1 m film thickness DB-5MS column was chosen in order to improve its separation
performance. The optimum conditions of GC-MS were listed in Table 2. The chromatogram under
optimum conditions was presented in Figure 1.
Fig. 1Chromatogram of VOCs under optimum conditions. 1) 1,3-butadiene 2) Vinyl chloride 3) dichloromethane 4) Chloroform 5) 1,2-dicholoethane 6) benzene 7) 1,2-dichlopropropane 8)
Trichloro-ethylene 9) toluene d-8 (I.S.) and 10) tetrachloro-ethylene.
Page 480
Page 481
Page 482
Page 483
Page 484
CONCLUSION
The method for the determination of nine VOCs in water by PT-GC-MS techniques was
developed. The VOCs were stripped from 15 mL aqueous sample by helium gas at flow rate of 40
mL/min and pre-concentrated in VOCARB 3000 trap. The method was successfully applied for
the analysis the ng/L level of nine VOCs in drinking water and ground water from Map Ta Phut
area.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
Faculty of Science, Burapha Universiry and The Center of Excellence for Innovation in
Chemistry (PERCH-CIC), and Office of Higher Education Research Promotion and National
Research University Development (Project No. 2554A10862028), Office of the Higher Education
Commission, Ministry of Education are gratefully acknowledged for their financial support. This
research work is also supported in part by the grant from Center of Excellence on Environmental
Health and Toxicology, Science and Technology Postgraduate Education and Research
Development Office (PERDO), Ministry of Education.
Page 485
Page 486
Page 487
Average size
Yield
(oC)
(side length)
(%)
3h
120
50 m
56
3h
120
30 m
62
3h
120
10 m
82
HAuCl4
(conc.)
Molar ratio
HAuCl4 : PVP
Time
0.2
0.5
0.4
0.7
Exp.
Page 488
RESULTS
Fig. 1 SEM images of resulting micro-sized gold nanoplate synthesized with different
concentrations of gold salt (HAuCl4): (a) 0.2 M; (b) 0.4 M; and (c) 0.7 M.
Table 1 summarizes the products obtained under different experimental conditions,
including concentration of gold salt (HAuCl4), concentration of PVP, reaction temperature,
reaction time, and yield of plate in the product. Under PVP and EGs concentration constant, the
condition with 0.7 M HAuCl4 gives highest percentage of yield which can be implying this molar
ratio suitable for our synthesis condition. However, in our experiment, the water in washing
process of all experiments was recollected in order to determine the remaining gold ion in the
solution by UV-Vis NIR spectrophotometer. The water in washing process of experiment A and B
presented red color solution while that of Exp. C displayed transparent solution. Moreover, the
optical spectra of the remaining solution in Exp A and B exhibited broad band at 560 nm which is
corresponding to the nano-gold particle. It indicates that there is the gold nano-particle remaining
in the obtained solution from Exp A and B which provides the low percentage yield of gold
nanoplates.
Fig. 1 shows typical SEM images of the resulting micrometer-sized gold nanoplates
obtained at different initial golds concentration. The lower magnification image indicates that the
precipitates consist of mass of plates, including hexagonal, truncated triangular and triangular
shapes. As seen in higher magnification, the images distinctly revealed these plates are in
micrometer-sized up to 10 m in all experimental conditions. When the gold concentration is 0.2
M, the triangular shape has the side length of ~10-20 m was obtained, together with a few
hexagonal Au sheets (Fig 2A). On increasing HAuCl4 concentration to 0.4 M, more Au truncated
triangular and hexagonal shapes are formed. The higher concentration (0.7 M) leads to the
appearance of hexagonal Au plates (~50 m), together with a few Au spherical and triangular (Fig
2C). It can be imply that the seed growth is developed to yield shape-controlled gold nanocrystals
Page 489
60
40
20
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
Concentra tion of HAuCl4 (M)
0.7
0.8
Fig. 2 Average particle sized of micrometer size gold nanoplate with different concentrations of
HAuCl4.
Considering to the size of gold nanoplate, the average size of all Au nanoplates decreased
when increasing the concentration of gold salt, as shown in Fig. 2. Accordingly, an increase of the
HAuCl4 concentration affected the morphology of the products. It was well known that the
nanoparticle growth can happen under the role of thermodynamically control and kinetically
control [3]. The key factor of the size and shaped controlled synthesis is to control the relative
rates of nucleation and cluster growth [6-7]. Under the specific condition, the increasing of metal
concentration plays an important role to increase the amount of seed particle and rate of formation
which affected to reduce the size of obtained nanoparticle [1-3,8].
Since the optical properties of metal nanoparticle depended on their sizes and shapes, the
UV-Vis NIR spectra were also performed and the optical spectra of synthesized micro-sized gold
nanoplates were shown in Fig. 3. In all experimental conditions, these synthesized gold plates
displayed yellow color and exhibited distinct bands at about 760, 970 and 1170 nm which showed
remarkable red shift in agreement with micrometer-sized gold nanoplates (with different shapes)
reported previously [5-8]. The bands corresponded to the in-plane dipole resonance of flat shapes
in anisotropy of Au nanoplates [6-7]. As seen in Fig 1, the Au products in our synthesis consist of
micro-sized gold nanoplates with different sizes and shapes which are difficult to separate them by
size and shape, thus the optical spectra in this study show the same spectral features.
Page 490
0.4 M
Absorbance(a.u.)
0.7 M
_
700
_
800
_
_
900
1000
Wavelength(nm)
_
1100
_
_
1200
Fig. 3 The spectra of resulting micro-sized gold nanoplate synthesized with different
concentrations of gold salt (HAuCl4): (a) 0.2 M; (b) 0.4 M; and (c) 0.7 M.
In summary, we have successfully synthesized micro-sized gold nanoplates with different
shapes including truncated triangular, triangular, spherical and hexagonal plates. The obtained size
and shapes of synthesized gold plate depended on the concentration of initial gold salt. In this
study, the optimal condition of gold salt (at PVP and EG constant) were found 0.7 M because of
the highest percent yield and uniform Au shape. To demonstrate the utility of obtained gold plates
in jewelry application, the micro-sized gold nanoplates were repeatedly synthesized for producing
mass product and then were preformed as gold paste product. The prototype of jewelry using our
gold paste was shown in Fig. 4.
(a)
(b)
Fig.4 (a) synthesized micro-sized gold nanoplates; (b) prototype jewelry made from our microsized gold nanoplate.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
The authors gratefully acknowledge for financial support from the National Research
Council of Thailand (NRCT) via Burapha University and the instrument supports from
Microscopic Center, Faculty of Science for SEM analysis.
Page 491
[4] Tang, T. and Hamley, Ian W. 2009 Multiple morphologies of gold nano-plates by hightemperature polyol syntheses. Colloids and Surfaces A: Physicochemical and Engineering
Aspects 336: 1-7.
[5] Ying, C., Xin, G., Cha-Geng, N., Zhi-Yuan, J., Zhao-Xiong, X., and Chang-Jian, L. 2005
Shape controlled growth of gold nanoparticles by a solution synthesis. Chemical
Communications 33: 41814183.
[6] Caixia, K., Changshun, W., Jiejun, Z., and Hongchen, L. 2010 Formation of gold and silver
nanostructures within polyvinylpyrollidone (PVP) gel. Journal of Solid State Chemistry 183:
858865.
[7] Hong, Y., Ru Xiu, C., and Dai, W.P. 2003 A Simple Approach to Control the Growth of Nonspherical Gold Nanoparticles. Chinese Chemical Letters 14(11): 1163-1166.
[8] Yujie, X., Isao, W., Jingyi, C., Honggang, C., Zhi-Yuan, L., and Younan, X. 2006 Poly (vinyl
pyrrolidone): A Dual Functional Reductant and Stabilizer for the Facile Synthesis of Noble
Metal Nanoplates in Aqueous Solution. Langmuir 22: 8563-8570.
Page 492
Page 493
Page 494
Fig. 1 AChE activities in both sex after exposed to endosulfan and plant extracts for 96 h.
AChE activity in endosulfan treatment after 96 h of exposure is lower than that in plant
extracts treatment. AChE activity (male/female) of the plant extracts and endosulfan is 12.27
1.14 / 12.01 0.44 and 10.32 2.12 / 9.88 0.35 nmoles ACTC/min/mg protein, respectively.
Effect of exposure time on AChE activity inhibition
From Fig. 2, the results indicate that AChE activity decreases with exposure time. The
statistical analysis by One-Way ANOVA reveals that the exposure time has significant affect
(p<0.05) on AChE activity comparing to the control group. For golden shower extracts treatment,
AChE activity is decreased rapidly in first hour from 46.8614.00 to 14.337.02 nmoles
ACTC/min/mg protein. However, the more rapid decrease (p<0.05) is found in endosulfan
treatment. AChE activity decreases from 46.8614.00 to 4.012.14 nmoles ACTC/min/mg protein
in the first hour. In both case, the lowest AChE activity is measured at 96 h after exposure.
Page 495
Fig. 2 AChE activities after exposed to endosulfan and plant extracts against time
Recovery of AChE activity
After 96 h of exposure, the snail was removed and placed in the treatment box filled with
clean water for AChE activity recovery study and the results shown in Fig. 3.
Fig. 3 AChE activities of endosulfan and plant extracts in recovery period against time
AChE activity from both treatments in recovery period remains quite low comparing to the
control; 5.381.99 to 19.447.07 nmoles ACTC/min/mg protein for plant extracts and 2.712.53
to 8.798.71 nmoles ACTC/min/mg protein for endosulfan.
DISCUSSIONS
AChE activity inhibition in male and female of golden apple snail
This result collaborates with the study of Kopecka et al. (2004) which found that AChE
activity inhibition in fish was not affected by the difference of sex. Moreover, Yi et al. (2006) also
reported that AChE level in brain of goldfish (Carassius auratus) in both male and female was not
different after exposed to carbamate.
Page 496
Page 497
Page 498
ABSTRACT
Two rice seedling cultivars of differing salt tolerancewere used to investigate differential
responses to salinity, in leaf and root. Growth parameters, including fresh weight, dry weight,
relative water content and proline content, were measured to assess the comparative responses of
the cultivars. The leaf and root dry weights of rice seedlings decreased in response to stresses
induced by salinity.
Salinity markedly increased the proline content in the shoots of both
cultivars, but in roots there was no significant difference between the proline content in controls
and salt-stressed plants of either cultivar. The increased proline accumulation in both tissues
appears to correlate with adaptation to salinity.
Keywords: relative water content, proline, salt stress
INTRODUCTION
Saline stress negatively impacts agricultural yield throughout the world, whether for
subsistence or economic gain. In north-eastern Thailand, 35% of the land area faces salinity
problems of varying degrees, especially for growing rice, which is considered to be moderately
sensitive to salinity (Akbar et al., 1974). Grain yields of most rice varieties are reduced by half
when the electrical conductivity of the irrigating water reaches 6 dS m-1 (Lu, Z. and Neumann,
P.M.1976; Yoshida, 1981). The response of rice plants to salinity consists of numerous processes
that must be coordinated to alleviate both cellular hyperosmolarity and ion disequilibrium. Several
studies have shown that the Na-K selectivity of plant roots, which minimizes the entry of Na+ into
plants and maintains effective K+ uptake, and also the low rate of salt transport to expanding
shoots, are very important mechanisms and are directly correlated with salt tolerance (Flowers et
al., 1991 and Munns, 2002). The effects of NaCl on rice growing parameters vary depending on
the concentration of salt, the duration of treatment and the age of the shoots (Faustino et al., 1996).
Comparative response studies could provide insights into the mechanisms of salt tolerance in rice.
In the current study, seedlings of two cultivars that differ in salt tolerance, Pokkali (salt-tolerant)
and Khao Dawk Mali 105 (KDML 105,salt-sensitive), were used to compare differential responses
to salinity, in leaves and roots. Growth parameters, such as fresh weight, dry weight, water content
and proline content, were measured to assess the a comparative responses of both rice cultivars to
NaCl stress
Page 499
RESULTS
Effects of salinity on fresh and dry weight
The effects of salinity on leaf growth in seedlings of rice cultivars were compared over a
period of 9 days (Figs1 and 2). Under control conditions there was a steady increase in the fresh
weights of leaves in both cultivars, whereas under saline condition, both cultivars showed a
decrease in leaf weight. Compared with the control plants, Pokkali plants grown under saline
conditions showed 72%, 47% and 54% reduction in leaf fresh weight on saline treatment for 5,
Page 500
DISCUSSION
Salinity affects plants through osmotic effects, ion specific effects and oxidative stress
(Munns,, 2008). Osmotic effects are due to salt-induced decrease in the soil water potential.
Salinity results in a reduced K+ and Ca2+ content and an increased level of Na+ and Cl -. Osmotic
adjustment of rice is achieved through the accumulation of organic and inorganic solutes such as
proline (Yeo, 1998). Therefore, a greater decrease in cell solute potential than in the external salt
concentration may indicate an osmotic adjustment. Organic solutes are accumulated in the cytosol
Page 501
0.25
0.2
0.15
0.1
0.05
0
0
days
A
0.3
0.25
0.2
0.15
0.1
0.05
0
0
days
B
Fig. 1 Effect of NaCl on fresh weights of leaves of rice seedlings of Pokkali (A) and KDML105
(B) under salt stress conditions for nine days. Each point represents the mean of six observations
SEM. White bars represent control conditions, grey bars represent moderate salt stress (60 mM
NaCl) and black bars represent severe salt stress (120 mM NaCl).
Page 502
0.035
0.03
0.025
0.02
0.015
0.01
0.005
0
0
day
A
0.045
0.04
0.035
0.03
0.025
0.02
0.015
0.01
0.005
0
0
5
days
B
Fig. 2 Effect of NaCl on dry weights of leaves of rice seedlings of Pokkali (A) and KDML105 (B)
under salt stress conditions for nine days. Each point represents the mean of six observations
SEM. White bars represent control conditions, grey bars represent moderate salt stress (60 mM
NaCl) and black bars represent severe salt stress (120 mM NaCl).
Page 503
80
60
40
20
0
0
days
100
80
60
40
20
0
0
5
days
B
Fig. 3 Effect of NaCl on relative water content (RW) of shoots of rice seedlings of Pokkali (A) and
KDML105 (B) under salt stress conditions for nine days. Each point represents the mean of six
observations SEM. White bars represent control conditions, grey bars represent moderate salt
stress (60 mM NaCl) and black bars represent severe salt stress (120 mM NaCl).
Page 504
200
160
120
80
40
days
200
160
120
80
40
0
0
5
days
B
Fig. 4 Effect of NaCl on proline content of leaves of rice seedlings of Pokkali (A) and KDML105
(B) under salt stress conditions for nine days. Each point represents the mean of six observations
SEM. White bars represent control conditions, grey bars represent moderate salt stress (60 mM
NaCl) and black bars represent severe salt stress (120 mM NaCl).
Page 505
days
0.05
0.04
0.03
0.02
0.01
0
0
5
days
B
Fig. 5 Effect of NaCl on fresh weights of roots of rice seedlings of Pokkali (A) and KDML105 (B)
under salt stress conditions for nine days. Each point represents the mean of six observations
SEM. White bars represent control conditions, grey bars represent moderate salt stress (60 mM
NaCl) and black bars represent severe salt stress (120 mM NaCl).
Page 506
0.006
0.005
0.004
0.003
0.002
0.001
0
0
days
0.006
0.005
0.004
0.003
0.002
0.001
0
0
days
B
Fig. 6 Effect of NaCl on dry weights of roots of rice seedlings of Pokkali (A) and KDML105 (B)
under salt stress conditions for nine days. Each point represents the mean of six observations
SEM. White bars represent control conditions, grey bars represent moderate salt stress (60 mM
NaCl) and black bars represent severe salt stress (120 mM NaCl).
Page 507
100
80
60
40
20
0
0
days
100
80
60
40
20
0
0
days
B
Fig. 7 Effect of NaCl on relative water content (RW) of roots of rice seedlings of Pokkali (A) and
KDML105 (B) under salt stress conditions for nine days. Each point represents the mean of six
observations SEM. White bars represent control conditions, grey bars represent moderate salt
stress (60 mM NaCl) and black bars represent severe salt stress (120 mM NaCl).
Page 508
100
80
60
40
20
0
0
days
100
80
60
40
20
0
0
days
B
Fig. 8 Effect of NaCl on proline contents of roots of rice seedlings of Pokkali (A) and KDML105
(B) under salt stress conditions for nine days. Each point represents the mean of six observations
SEM. White bars represent control conditions, grey bars represent moderate salt stress (60 mM
NaCl) and black bars represent severe salt stress (120 mM NaCl).
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
This work was supported by funds from the Thailand Commission on Higher Education
and by a Science and Social Science, Burapha University Sakaeo Campus Research Grant to the
corresponding author.
Page 509
Page 510
Page 511
Thadsin Panithanarak
Institute of Marine Science, Burapha University, Chonburi, 20131, Thailand
E-mail: thadsin@hotmail.com
ABSTRACT
Zooxanthellae are unicellular dinoflagellates of the genus Symbiodinium. The genus is
classified into 9 distinct phylogenetic clades (clades A to I) based on nuclear ribosomal DNA
(rDNA) and partial chloroplast large subunit rDNA. Six of these clades are associated with coral
hosts. Various clades may differ in their physiology which influences ecological distribution and
resilience of coral hosts to environmental stresses. Symbiodinium is an important feature of coral
reef ecology and evolution, therefore understanding types and diversity of Symbiodinium correlating
to environmental difference in coral reef habitats is required for coral reef conservation and
management from current and future disturbances. In the Gulf of Thailand, there was no record on
the study of presence, identity and diversity of Symbiodinium. This study was the first to identify the
Symbiodinium of the Gulf of Thailand to the level of phylogenetic clades. Thirty four soft corals in
the genus Sinularia were collected every two month during November 2008-January 2010 from two
different coral reef habitats, inshore coral reefs of Jorake Island (n = 14) and offshore coral reefs of
Juang and Jan Islands (n = 20). Genetic analyses of Symbiodinium were based on partial sequences
of large subunit (LSU) rDNA. The results showed that there were at least two clades of
Symbiodinium from Jorake, Juang and Jan Islands. Most of clade D was detected from inshore site
of Jorake Island while all of clade C was unique to offshore sites of Juang and Jan Islands. The data
from this study suggest that for some soft coral species, different environments could influence the
dominance and evolutionary success among different groups of Symbiodinium.
Keywords: zooxanthellae, Symbiodinium, soft corals, Sinularia, rDNA, the Gulf of Thailand
INTRODUCTION
Zooxanthellae are unicellular dinoflagellates of the genus Symbiodinium forming
mutualistic symbiosis with a wide range of marine invertebrates including sponges, cnidarians and
mollusks (reviewed in Pochon et al., 2006). In coral reef ecosystem, the symbiosis between
Symbiodinium and coral is important to the productivity, survival and success of coral hosts
(Muscatine and Porter 1977). In the past, zooxanthellae were considered as groups of a single
pandemic species, Symbiodinium microadriaticum (Freudenthal, 1962; Taylor, 1974) as they
showed simple and almost featureless morphology. Although, advanced molecular studies reveal
that Symbiodinium is a genetically diverse group of dinoflagelllates and each species possess unique
Page 512
Page 513
Fig. 1 A map showing Symbiodinium collection sites in the Gulf of Thailand comprising inshore
site (Jorake Island) and offshore sites (Juang and Jan Islands). This map was modified from a map
of Amphur Sattahip by the Royal Thai Survey Department, Bangkok, Thailand.
DNA Extraction, Amplification and
Sequencing
DNA was extracted from absolute ethanol-preserved tissue samples using QIAamp DNA
Minikit (Qiagen, Hilden, Germany). PCR amplification of partial large subunit (LSU) rDNA was
modified from the protocols in Pochon et al. (2001) using the specific Symbiodinium primer ITSDINO (5'-GTGAATTGCAGAACTCC-3') situated in the ITS region and the universal primer L_O
[5'-GCTATCCTGAG(AG)GAAACTTCG-3'] situated about 900 nucleotides downstream of the
5'-end of the LSU rDNA. The PCR products amplified with ITS-DINO and L_O included the 3'end of the 5.8 S region, the whole ITS2 region and the 5'-end of the LSU rDNA. The PCR
products were further purified using QIAquick PCR purification kit (Qiagen). DNA sequencing
was carried out by the sequencing service, Macrogen (Seoul, Korea) using both primers (ITSDINO and L_O).
Data Analyses
Nucleotide sequences of partial LSU rDNA were manually checked for accuracy. In each
sample, two sequences (forward and reverse) were obtained. The forward and reverse sequences
were assembled by CAP3 program (Huang and Madan, 1999; http://pbil.univ-lyon1.fr/cap3.php).
Page 514
Page 515
Haplotype
Jorake Island
(n = 14)
(n = 20)
D1
0.50
0.10
D2
0.07
D3
0.07
D4
0.07
0.05
D5
0.29
0.05
D6
0.05
D7
0.05
C1
0.20
C2
0.05
C3
0.05
C4
0.05
C5
0.10
C6
0.25
Page 516
Juang&Jan Islands
Frequencies
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
Haplotype
Fig. 2 Symbiodinium haplotype frequencies showing numbers of samples that were associated with
each particular haplotype based on analysis of the samples from inshore site (Jorake Island) and
offshore sites (Juang and Jan Islands).
Phylogenetic relationships
Phylogenetic reconstructions based on 34 partial LSU rDNA sequences of Symbiodinium found
12 best maximum parsimony trees using heuristic search. A 50% majority-rule consensus of the 12
trees was shown in Fig. 3. Phylogenetic analysis revealed differentiation of 2 genetically distinct
groups of clades C and D Symbiodinium. This separation was well supported by bootstrap values
and posterior probabilities (Fig. 3). The cluster of clade C was strongly supported by both
bootstrap values (100%) and posterior probabilities (1.00, Fig. 3). It was clear that host habitats
(inshore and offshore sites) associated with evolutionary success of clades C and D Symbiodinium
inhabiting a specific soft coral host in the genus Sinularia.
Page 517
- /0.83
- /0.59
52/0.92
54/0.92
Page 518
Page 519
Page 520
Page 521
Page 522
In:
Thompson, J. D., Gibson, T. J., Plewniak, F., Jeanmougin, F. and Higgins, D. G. 1997. The Clustal
X windows interface: flexible strategies for multiple sequence alignment aided by quality
analysis tools. Nucleic Acids Research 24: 4876-4882.
van Oppen, M. J. H. and Gates, R. D. 2006. Conservation genetics and the resilience of reefbuilding corals. Molecular Ecology 15: 3863-3883.
van Oppen, M. J. H., Mieog, J. C., Snchez, A. and Fabricius, K. E. 2005. Diversity of algal
endosymbionts (zooxanthellae) in octocorals: the roles of geography and host relationships.
Molecular Ecology 14: 2403-2417.
Page 523
Page 524
Page 525
Primer name
Sequence (53)*
Purpose
Lip1
GGGGAATTCTACGCTMAAACAAAATACCCT
Lip2
CCCAAGCTTTGASCAATWARATTTACTTT
Lip3
GGGGAATTCAAAGTAAATYTWATTGSTCA
Lip4
CCCAAGCTTACCACAAGMTGTTGTAGGYA
Lip5
GGGGAATTCATGCCTACAACAKCTTGTGG
Lip6
CCCAAGCTTAGGATCTAGWRBATTTGTTA
Lip7
CCCAAGCTTATTTACTTCATCWRSATGATT
Lip-N1
ACTGGCGCCACTCCATGAATAATA
Nested-inverse PCR
Lip-N2
GCCCTGTCCACAAGCTGTTGT
Nested-inverse PCR
Lip-N3
AGTACCCCTGCCACATAGCG
Nested-inverse PCR
Lip-C1
AATAATGATGGGCTGGTACCG
Nested-inverse PCR
Lip-C2
GGTACAGTCATACGCGACAATTAC
Nested-inverse PCR
Page 526
Page 527
Fig. 1 Nucleotide sequence and deduced amino acid of the complete lipase of A. baylyi
The catalytic triad (Ser120, Asp249, His289 residues) were found at perfectly conserved positions
(Snellman and Colwell, 2004). Also, the gene sequence contained two potential calcium binding
site (Asp249 and Asp291) and two Cys residues (-Cys223~Cys273-) involving in disulfide bridge
formation. Moreover, an H-G dipeptide of the oxyanion loop of Acinetobacter lipases was detected
as shown in Fig. 2. According to these conserved amino acid sequences, it can be noted here that
the gene encoding for a novel thermophilic-solvent stable lipase from A. baylyi has been
successfully identified.
Three-dimensional structure of A. baylyi lipase shows the homology with 1EX9. The sequence
was 98% identical with E-value 0.0001 of 1,2-dioctylcarbamoyl-glycero-3-o-octylphosphonate
of Pseudomonas aeruginosa lipase complexed. The positives of amino acid of lipase were similar
with 52.9%. A central six-stranded sheets connected by six helices were observed in the 3-D
structure of lipase (Fig. 3). The evaluation of the 3-D structure on the basis of total free energy was
-13,200.87 kJ/mol. The torsion angles of 49.1% amino acid residue were in most favored region
and only 1.68% amino acid residue in disallowed region. The overall G-factors were 0.5 at
resolution of 2.54 . These results matched well with the characteristic /-folding pattern of
microbial lipase (Jaeger and Reetz, 1998).
Page 528
Fig. 3 The 3D-structural modeling of A. baylyi lipase. A central six-stranded sheets (green)
connected by six helices (blue) and the N- (yellow) and C-terminal (pink) are shown.
Fig. 2 Multiple sequence alignment of the complete lipase of A. baylyi against other related
complete lipases. Symbols: Catalytic triad residues, Cys residues involved in disulfide bridge
formation, Ca2+ Asp residues involved in calcium binding, H-G dipeptide of the oxyanion loop.
CONCLUSION
A lipase gene of the solvent stable A. baylyi was successfully identified with the genomewalking PCR method. The gene has an ORF of 972 bp encoding a protein of 323 amino acid
Page 529
Page 530
Page 531
Page 532
Page 533
Page 534
Page 535
Sequence (53)*
Purpose
EnAmi1
GGGGAATTCTGGATGGAYGGCCCGGCSAA
EnAmi2
CCCAAGCTTCATRCGRAASAGRTGRCGTT
EnAmi3
GGGGAATTCTGGCGYGGCTGGCGYATYCT
EnAmi4
CCCAAGCTTGCCASGCCGGRAATTTYTC
NI-EnAmi3
TGCGGCATCGACTGCTTCGC
Nested-inverse PCR
NI-EnAmi4
TTGGCCGGGCCGTCCATCCA
Nested-inverse PCR
CI-EnAmi1
ACAGGGAGAGATTATCGCTA
Nested-inverse PCR
CI-EnAmi2
AGGAGTATCGCGAAAAATTC
Nested-inverse PCR
CI-EnAmi3
GGATGCTGGCGAAAGCGGAG
Nested-inverse PCR
CI-EnAmi4
ACTTTTACGATAAACGTCAC
Nested-inverse PCR
Page 536
Page 537
Fig. 1 Nucleotide sequence and deduced amino acid sequence of the putative amidase gene
sequence of E. aerogenes. Bold alphabets reveal the suggested start con
Page 538
Fig. 2 Multiple sequence alignment of the ORF of amidase from E. aerogenes (yellow highlight)
against other related complete amidase from the same genera. Symbols: Catalytic triad
residues, Suggested residues involved in the active site.
Page 539
Page 540
Page 541
Page 542
Page 543
Page 544
(1)
Page 545
(2)
(3)
Statistical analysis
Data obtained were first tested for normality and equal variance. If the data were normally
distributed, two-way analysis of variance (ANOVA) was used to compare means at p < 0.05.
Mean values were expressed as average + S.D.
RESULTS
Active compounds on the AP extracts
The Thin Layer Chromatography (TLC) of the AP extracts is shown in Fig. 1. The color dot
bands representing Andrographolide (Rf value = 0.19 which was compared to the lane B) and 14deoxy-11,12-didehydroandrographolide (Rf value = 0.48 which was compared to the lane A) was
present in the crude methanol extract (Lane C) and ethyl acetate fraction (Lane D), while no band
presented on water fraction (Lane E).
Effect of AP extracts on the innate immune response of hybrid catfish and Nile tilapia
Respiratory burst activity
The crude methanol extract and ethyl acetate fraction of AP modulated the respiratory burst
activity of hybrid catfish as shown in Fig. 2a. Only concentrations of 50 and 750 g mL-1 of ethyl
acetate fraction were not different from the control group (0 g mL-1). As illustrated in Fig. 2b,
Nile tilapia macrophage cells incubated with concentration of 50, 250, 500 and 750 g mL-1 of
ethyl acetate fraction are statistically significant at higher value than crude methanol extract and
Page 546
Fig. 1 The Thin Layer Chromatography (TLC) of AP extracts. From left to right, A; 14-deoxy11,12-didehydroandrographide (Control), B; Andrographolide (Control), C; Crude methanol
extract, D; Ethyl acetate fraction, and E; Water fraction of AP.
In this study, we found that AP extracts enhanced immune functions of hybrid catfish and Nile
tilapia by increasing the respiratory burst activity. In hybrid catfish, the respiratory burst activity of
cells treated with both extracts (crude methanol extract and the ethyl acetate fraction) was
significantly higher than for the control group (0 g mL-1) (p < 0.05). However, only
concentrations of 50 and 750 g mL-1 of ethyl acetate fraction were not different from the control
Page 547
Page 548
Fig. 2 Respiratory burst activity of hybrid catfish macrophage cells (a) and Nile tilapia
macrophage cells (b) incubated with different concentration of AP extracts (g mL-1). Data
are expressed as mean O.D. at 620 nm + S.D. (n = 18). Significant different (p < 0.05) from
the control group are indicated by asterisks
Though AP extracts enhanced the innate immune system by increasing the respiratory burst
activity of hybrid catfish and Nile tilapia, more insight experiment is needed to optimize the in
vitro method. The enhancement in the innate immune response of fish by crude methanol extract
and the ethyl acetate fraction was due to the mount presence of andrographolide compounds, as in
the study by Matsuda et al. (1994). Puri et al. (1993) reported that purified diterpene
andrographolides are able to stimulate both antigen-specific and non-specific immune responses in
mice. Naik et al. (2009) also investigated mice and reported that andrographolides increased total
WBCs count and phagocytic activity of mice. In this study, another active compound of AP was
presented, namely 14-deoxy-11,12-didehydroandrographolide. The study need to prove which
active components of AP are responsible for enhancement or interaction to each other and that is
influence to innate immune system response on the studied fish species. However, the present
study together with other previous studies suggests that AP has the potential to enhance the
immune system of hybrid catfish and Nile tilapia. Also, crude extracts from AP can be used as an
immunostimulant in appropriate concentration to control fish diseases in hybrid catfish and Nile
tilapia.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
This research was supported by National Education Ministry of Republic of Indonesia
(Beasiswa Unggulan BPKLN DIKNAS) and University of Brawijaya, Indonesia which have join
program with Burapha University, Thailand. In addition, the authors thank to the National
Research Council of Thailand which had given financial support for this research (fiscal year
2010) in the title of Epidermiology and treatment of parasitic flatworm infestation in marketed
green mussel (Perna viridis Linnaeus) from sea-farms in Chonburi Province. Also, the authors
thank for financial support from Burapha University Annual Grant and partial scholarship from the
Faculty of Science, Burapha University.
Page 549
Page 550
Page 551
Page 552
Page 553
Green fruit
Yellow fruit
Black fruit
80-3
94b
107b
118b
125b
78-9
103a
111a
123a
129a
33-1
95b
106b
119b
125b
16-1
96b
107b
117b
123b
F-test
CV (%)
3.74
2.81
3.02
3.01
1/
Number of female flowers per inflorescence of the studied lines ranged from 3 to 6. Whilst, the
male flower number was from 105 to 168. KUBP 80-3 and KUBP 78-9 were the 2 lines that
having number of male flowers per inflorescence between 138 to 143. When considered the ratio
Page 554
Ratio
Lines
Male flower
Female flower
male: female
80-3
138ab
4b
34.5:1
78-9
143ab
6a
23.8:1
33-1
168a
5a
33.6:1
16-1
105c
3b
35:1
Mean
139ab
5a
27.8:1
F-test
CV (%)
37.92
35.43
Page 555
Moisture
content (%)
Line
KUBP 78-9
yellow fruit
KUBP 78-9
black fruit
KUBP 16-1
yellow fruit
KUBP 16-1
black fruit
Lipid (%)
Ash (%)
Fiber (%)
7.28 0.16c
41.13 1.65a
1/
3.77 0.10c
37.84 0.00a
7.53 0.04b
41.44 1.54a
4.12 0.12ab
35.89 0.00a
7.37 0.05bc
37.94 0.44a
3.85 0.11bc
38.91 0.00a
7.82 0.03a
36.12 3.22a
4.22 0.07a
40.57 0.00a
Protein
content (%)
23.270.00a
21.662.58a
22.570.07a
25.262.50a
FFA (%)
Lipase
activity
(U/g)
0.24 0.01a
1.46 0.11b
0.25 0.01a
1.56 0.01b
0.24 0.01a
1.10 0.15c
0.26 0.01a
1.91 0.05a
Seed moisture content of the 2 lines were significant differ. Also significant interaction of
genotype storage temperature and the interaction of genotype harvest period storage duration
were detected. KUBP 78-9 showed rapid decreasing of % moisture content especially at 20C and
37C storage temperature. Whereas at 50C storage temperature, KUBP 16-1 showed more rapid
decreasing of % moisture content than KUBP 78-9 (Fig. 2).
8.5
8.0
7.5
37 KUBP 78-9 B
37 KUBP 16-1 B
37 KUBP 78-9 Y
37 KUBP 16-1 Y
7.0
6.5
7.0
MC (%)
MC (%)
7.5
20 KUBP 78-9 B
20 KUBP 16-1 B
20 KUBP 78-9 Y
20 KUBP 16-1 Y
8.0
6.5
6.0
5.5
6.0
5.0
5.5
4.5
5.0
4.0
01
14
30
01
14
30
8
50 KUBP 78-9 B
50 KUBP 16-1 B
50 KUBP 78-9 Y
50 KUBP 16-1 Y
MC (%)
2
01
14
30
Fig. 2 Seed moisture content of 2 selected physic nut lines harvested at yellow fruit and black fruit
stage after storage at 20, 37 and 50C for 1 month.
Page 556
.40
.40
20 KUBP 78-9 B
20 KUBP 16-1 B
20 KUBP 78-9 Y
20 KUBP 16-1 Y
37 KUBP 78-9 B
37 KUBP 16-1 B
37 KUBP 78-9 Y
37 KUBP 16-1 Y
.35
.30
FFA (%)
FFA (%)
.35
.25
.30
.25
.20
.20
.15
01
14
.15
30
01
14
30
.40
50KUBP 78-9 B
50KUBP 16-1 B
50KUBP 78-9 Y
50KUBP 16-1 Y
FFA (%)
.35
.30
.25
.20
.15
01
14
30
Fig. 3 Seed free fatty acid content of 2 selected physic nut lines harvested at yellow fruit and black
fruit stage after storage at 20, 37 and 50C for 1 month.
CONCLUSION
The results revealed significant difference among the 4 physic nut lines in some phenotypic
characteristics i.e., harvest date and male and female flowers.
The genetic evaluation using AFLP were not significantly differed indicating that the 16
primers used in the study were not able to detect the genetic differences among the 4 lines.
The interaction of genotype by storage temperature and storage duration was significant for
moisture content and free fatty acid content. In addition, it was found that yellow fruit had better
Page 557
Page 558
Page 559
Page 560
Page 561
Page 562
Page 563
a)
b)
c)
Page 564
Page 565
Page 566
production by
Tien, M., Kirk, T.K. 1984. Lignin degrading from Phanerochaete chrysosporium: purifcation,
characterization and catalytic properties of unique H2O2-requiring oxygenase. Proceedings
of the National Academy of Sciences of the United States of America 81: 22802284.
Vicuna, R. 2000. Ligninolysis. A very peculiar microbial process. Molecular Biotechnology 14:
173176.
Young, L., Yu, L. 1997. Ligninase-catalyzed decolorization of synthetic dyes. Water Research 5:
11871193.
Zhao, X.; Hardin, I.R. 2007. HPLC and spectrophotometric analysis of biodegradation of azo dyes
by Pleurotus ostreatus. Dyes and Pigmets. 73: 322-325.
Zilly, A., Souza, C.G.M., BarbosaTessmann, I.P., Peralta, R.M. 2002. Decolorization of industrial
dyes by a Brazilian strain of Pleurotus pilmonarius producing laccase as the sole phenol
oxidizingenzyme.FoliaMicrobiologica47:273277.
Page 567
Poly(lactic acid) (PLA) has been challenging as one of the most recognizable
biopolymer for more than a decade since it has been readily fabricated as bio-composite
film. In this work, the bio-composite film which was composed of PLA and nanosized
TiO2 particles was used as the carrier for investigating the efficiency of the photocatalytic
activity of the TiO2 embedding throughout the PLA matrix. The photocatalytic activity
efficiency of the TiO2 for degradation of Dichloromethane (DCM) in photoreactor can be
performed by nano-TiO2/PLA bio- composite film. Since the amount of the nano-TiO2
affected the efficiency of the photocatalytic activity, this work was mainly concentrated on
the effort to embed the high amount of nano-TiO2 in the PLA matrix. The developed
photocatalyst bio-composite films were characterized by XRD, UV-Vis near-IR
spectrophotometer and SEM. The SEM images revealed the presence of high homogeneity
of the deposition of nano-TiO2 on the PLA matrix. The XRD patterns interpreted that the
nano-TiO2 embedded in the PLA matrix exhibited mainly in anatase form. In addition, the
photocatalytic results show that the DCM removal efficiencies of 23 %, 41%, 63% and 49
% were obtained when using the catalyst loading at 0%, , 5%, 10% and 15% (wt. cat./wt.
film), respectively.
Keywords: Photocatalytic oxidation, dichloromethane, nano-TiO2/PLA bio-composite film.
INTRODUCTION
In the last decade, TiO2 has been recognized to be one of the most interesting metal oxides used
in photocatalysis process. It has been found to be rather effective material of photocatalytic
activity during both oxidation and reduction reactions. Photocatalytic oxidation (PCO) commonly
uses TiO2 and ultraviolet (UV) light as semiconductor catalysts. Under optimal reaction condition,
organic pollutions can be completely oxidized to form carbon dioxide, water , etc., as final
Page 568
Page 569
Average
Contents
Particle size
Nano-TiO2/PLA
composite film thickness
(wt.%)
(m)
(m)
30
45
30
10
45
30
15
45
30
Sample
Page 570
Representative value
45-55%
Temperature, C
26-42
60
20( 5)
UV light source
Reactor material
stainless steel
0, 5,10,15
300
Page 571
Sample
5%nano-TiO2/PLA
3.26
10%nano-TiO2/PLA
3.21
15%nano-TiO2/PLA
3.15
Page 572
(b)
(c)
(d)
Fig. 1 SEM micrographs (a) PLA film (b-d) 5, 10, 15 wt.% nano-TiO2/PLA composite film,
respectively
100
90
%Transmission
PLA film
80
5%TiO2/PLA film
70
10%TiO2/PLA film
15%TiO2/PLA film
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
250
300
350
400
450
500
550
600
650
700
750
800
wavelength (nm)
Fig. 2 UV-VIS transmission spectra of the nano-TiO2/PLA composite films at various dosages
of TiO2.
Page 573
Intensity(Counts)
2000
1500
1000
2T=48.081
2T=37.857
500
2T=53.938
2T=55.118
2T=38.620
2T=36.999
0
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
2-Theta(?)
Page 574
60
Average
Contents
Particle size
Nano-TiO2/PLA
composite film thickness
(wt.%)
(m)
(m)
30
45
30
10
45
30
15
45
30
Sample
DISCUSSION
In summary, the nano-TiO2 incorporating in polyethylene (TiO2/PLA) modified with maleic
anhydride copolymer for use as photocatalyst material were highly promising photocatalyst for
degradation of volatile organic compound as dichloromethane at very low concentration.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
The authors would like to express gratitude to Faculty of Science & Technology, Suan
Sunandha Rajabhat Univesity, 1 U-Thong Nok Road, Wachira, Dusit, Bangkok . The special thank
is extend to the National Metal and Materials Technology Centre for their financial support and for
providing me with an opportunity to carry out this project.
Page 575
Page 576
Since petroleum base polymers have been classified as global pollutions, the biopolymer
materials have great recognition via their renewable and biodegradable characteristic. In addition,
the green composite has also been new challenge to replace traditional polymer composite. In this
work, TiO2/PBS biocomposite film was developed to be used as a supporter for determining the
photocatalytic oxidation activity of the TiO2 on the dichloromethane degradation. Poly (butylene
succinate) (PBS) is a synthetic biopolymer which has a reasonable mechanical strength. The
modified-TiO2/PBS biocomposite films were investigated to evaluate the degradation of
dichloromethane (DCM). In this work, the concentration of the nano-TiO2 was constant at 10%wt.
In order to improve the dispersability of the developed photocatalyst, the nano-TiO2 powders were
modified by 0.05 %mole of ethyl triethoxysilane (ETES) and stearic acid (SA), respectively. The
10%wt. nano-TiO2/PBS biocomposite films with thickness of 30 m were prepared by blown film
technique. To evaluate the dispersion efficacy, the modified-TiO2/PBS biocomposite films were
characterized by Scanning Electron microscopy (SEM). Photocatalytic degradation of DCM in gas
phase was determined using an annular closed system photoreactor. The obtained result which was
corresponding to the absorption of nano-TiO2/PBS biocomposites film were investigated in a range
of 300-800 nm via UV/VIS/NIR spectrophotometry. The energy band gap of unmodified, ETESand SA-TiO2 biocomposite film were found to be 3.18, 3.26, and 3.26 eV, respectively. The SEM
shows that the modified-TiO2 with both ETES and SA exhibit uniform dispersion, while the
unmodified-TiO2 shows an evidence of agglomeration in the PBS matrix. For photocatalyst
efficiency, the photocatalytic activity of modified-TiO2/PBS biocomposite film increased
comparing to that of the unmodified-TiO2/PBS biocomposite film. Moreover, the photocatalytic
degradation of ETES-TiO2/PBS biocomposite film yielded degradation efficiency of 57 %DCM,
whereas SA-TiO2/PBS biocomposite film yielded the removal efficiency of 23 %DCM, for
treatment time of 200 min.
Keywords: film, modified TiO2, biopolymer supporter
Page 577
Page 578
ETES-TiO2/PBS
Ethyl triethoxysilane
10
30
SA-TiO2/PBS
Stearic acid
10
30
Materials Characterization
Morphology
The microstructure of the Nano-TiO2/PBS biocomposite film was examined using the Scanning
Electron Microscope (SEM, Hitachi S-3400N). In order to prevent the charge build-up during
SEM observation, samples were coated with gold which was used for ion sputter target. The
sputter rate and time were set for 10 nm min-1 and 3 min, respectively. The gold film thickness was
approximately 30 nm (Shinde et al., 2008
Optical property
Ultraviolet-visible spectra of the photocatalysts were recorded using the UV-VIS
spectrophotometer (Lamda 950, Perkin Elmer instrument) equipped with an integrating sphere. A
BaSO4 dye was used as a reference. The scan ranges from 300 to 800 nm. All spectra were
monitored in the absorbance mode and acquired under ambient conditions. The band gap energy of
TiO2 thin film can be calculated from absorbance results (Shinde et al .,2008). The optical
absorbance spectra, the adsorption coefficient and the band gap of TiO2 film were evaluated.
Briefly, the absorption coefficient () was calculated using the following correlation, = ln (1/d)/t,
where t is the transmittance and d is the thickness of the film. The thickness of the film was also
evaluated from the UV spectrum and the average value corresponding to 30 m. The band-gap
energy was obtained by plotting the optical absorption (h)2 and the photon energy (h). Then the
extrapolation of the linear portion of the curve must be performed to receive the band gap energy
(Andronic and Duta., 2007).
Page 579
Page 580
Page 581
Functionality
400-900
960-910
2850, 2920
3400
Fig. 4 shows the results of TGA of unmodified and modified TiO2 powder. There are three
decreasing regions of weight loss, below 100C, between 100 C and 300 C and continues
gradually till 800 C. In the first region, the weight loss is due to evaporation of physically
adsorbed water from TiO2 networks void (Mohammadi et al., 2008). In the second stage, the
weight loss is due to dehydroxylation. After that the modified TiO2 can be attributed to large scale
oxidative thermal decomposition of alkyl chains. The weight loss contributes to amount of
different weight of silane coupling agents which used grafting on surface of TiO2. Moreover, this
result shows that degradation of SA-TiO2 particles more than of ETES-TiO2 particles. The Organic
contents of SA as modifier have longer chain than ETES.
Page 582
Page 583
Figure 6. UVvisible absorption spectra of unmodified and modified TiO2 biocomposite films
The results from the UV-Vis spectroscopy in Fig. 6 show that both the unmodified and
modified TiO2/PBS biocomposite film absorbs in the range of UV region. The energy band gap
(Eg) of these TiO2/PBS biocomposite films is calculated from this result which is expressed in
Table 3. The energy band gap (Eg) of unmodified, ETES- and SA-modified TiO2/PBS
biocomposite films are 3.18, 3.26 and 3.26 eV, respectively. It found that surface modification
strongly effect to the energy band gap of TiO2 powder. In addition, the maximum absorption
wavelengths of unmodified, ETES- and SA-modified TiO2/PBS biocomposite films are 360, 350
and 330 nm, respectively.
Photocatalytic activity of the unmodified and modified TiO2/PBS biocomposite film for
removal of DCM in dry air was investigated. For all experiments, the initial concentration of
dichloromethane, the air flow rate, and the UV light intensity were set to be about 5.07 mg/m3, 4
L/min, and 1.2 mW/cm2, respectively for the treatment time of 200 min. While, modification
effect of nano-TiO2 in PBS film on photocatalytic activity was investigated. As seen from Fig. 7,
the DCM removal efficiency of modified TiO2/PBS biocomposite films is higher than unmodified
TiO2/PBS biocomposite film at treatment time of 200 min. The photocatalytic degradation of
ETES-TiO2/PBS and SA-TiO2/PBS film yielded degradation efficiency of DCM 57% and 23%,
whereas unmodified-TiO2/PBS film yielded degradation efficiency of DCM 18% with the
removal efficiency for treatment time of 200 min.
Because of energy band gap and dispersion of modified TiO2/PBS biocomposite films
enhanced, which was shown in Table 3 and Fig. 5, respectively.
Table 3. Calculated results of energy band gap of unmodified- and modified-TiO2/PBS
biocomposite films from the UV-Vis spectroscopy.
Sample
10TiO2/PBS
3.18
10SA-TiO2/PBS
3.26
10ETES-TiO2/PBS
3.26
Page 584
The special thank is extend to the National Metal and Materials Technology Centre for
their financial support and for providing me with an opportunity to carry out this project.
Page 585
Page 586
This research was aimed to study the possibility of direct dye removal by using zeolite .
The adsorption capacities of Direct dye was considered. The characterization of the
zeolites was carried out by zeta potential analysis, Fourier transform infrared (FTIR), and
Scanning electron microscopy (SEM). The results from zeta potential analysis of zeolite
exhibited negative charge at - 24 mV . The increasing of surface charge of zeolite arose
from the presence of hydroxyl functional group at its surface. The adsorption behavior of
dyes on zeolites was tested using a UV Vis near-IRspectrophotometric technique. The
adsorption isotherm were fitted to the Lanngmuir and Freundlich model. The hightest
adsorption capacities of the dyes removal were in a range of 50 to 80 %. This study clearly
indicated that the zeolites exhibited a great potential on textile dyes removal.
Keywords: zeolites, Direct dye, Adsorption, Lanngmuir, Freundlich.
INTRODUCTION
A dye can generally be described as a colored substance that has an affinity to the substrate to
which it is being applied. The dye is usually used as an aqueous solution, and may require a
mordant to improve the fastness of the dye on the fiber. In contrast, a pigment generally has no
affinity for the substrate, and is insoluble. Color removal from textile effluents has been the subject
of great attention in the recently years. The presence of low concentrations of dyes in effluent
streams is highly visible and undesirable, which causes a reducing of light penetration and
potentially inhibiting of photosynthesis. Color removal due to the water-soluble reactive dyes is
problematic: current methods relying on activated sludge systems are not adequate, neither on site
nor after dilution with domestic wastewater at sewage works. They are a very important class of
textile dyes, whose losses through processing are particularly significant due to their high
hydrolyzing tendency. Thus, in the case of cellulose fibers dyed, nearly 50% maybe lost to the
effluent (Grgorio et al, 2006).
Direct or substantive dyeing is normally carried out in a neutral or slightly alkaline dye bath, at
or near boiling point, with the addition of either sodium chloride (NaCl) or sodium sulfate
(Na2SO4). Direct dyes are used on cotton, paper, leather, wool, silk and nylon. They are also used
as pH indicators and as biological stains. Substantive dye is a dye used in a process in which dye
molecules are attracted by physical forces at the molecular level to the textile. The amount of this
Page 587
In this study, Zeolite was attempted and the effect on dye removal from solution was
investigated. An adsorption mechanism of direct dye was investigated. Moreover, the
effect of silanol groups on the adsorption process was evaluated. Different analytical
methods such as Fourier transform infrared were used to identify the structure of Zeolite
and to elucidate the proper mechanism of dye adsorption. Zeta potential also carried out.
MATERIALS AND METHODS
Natural Zeolite MHZ was obtained. The crystalline silica was 35-50 %. The samples were then
washed with deionized water, dried at 100 C, desiccated and stored in tightly stoppered glass
bottles. Fourier transform infrared (FTIR-Perkin-Elmer Spectrophotometer RX I) of Zeolite was
studied.
The spectra of the solid were then recorded. FTIR Perkin-Elmer Spectrophotometer RXI was
used in all investigations. Scanning electron microscope of Zeolite was carried out using JEOLJSM 6400 scanning microscope. In order to identify the structure, the zeta potential of the Zeolite
and dyes were measured using a Zetasizer Nano ZS (Malvern Instruments) equipped with a 633nm
He-Ne laser.
Page 588
Ce / Cads = 1 / Qb + Ce / Q
(1)
Where Ce is the equilibrium concentration textile dyes in solution (M) and Cads is the amount
of textile dyes were sorbed onto Zeolite, Q and b are Langmuir constants related to sorption
capacity and sorption energy, respectively. A linear plot is obtained when Ce/Cads is plotted against
Ce over the entire concentration range of dyes investigated The Freundlich sorption isotherm, one
of the most widely used mathematical descriptions, usually fits the experimental data over a wide
range of concentrations. This isotherm gives an expression encompassing the surface
heterogeneity and the exponential distribution of active sites and their energies. The Freundlich
adsorption isotherms were also applied for the removal of textile dyes on Zeolite (Emin Erdem et
al., 2005):
(2)
The Freundlich constants of n and K were calculated by the slope and interception of the
Freundlich plots as show in equation 2 and 3, where Ce is the equilibrium concentration in mg/L
and Cads shows that the adsorption seems to follow the Freundlich isotherm model as well as the
Langmuir isotherm,
K = RTnbe H / RT
(3)
Where K roughly represents the adsorption capacity and can be related to the surface energy as
well as the adsorption intensity. The value of n is usually greater than 1 when the surface is fully
covered.
Physical Characterization
Scanning electron microscopy (SEM) was a primary tool for characterizing the fundamental
physical properties of the adsorbent. It shows an effective potential to determine the particle shape
and appropriate size distribution of the adsorbent. The modification potential of Zeolite provided
by micrographs was shown in Fig. 1. When the solid structure of Zeolite is considered, their
frustules are divided into two main categories: centric (discoid) and pinnate. In Fig. 1, modified
Zeolite has notable pores as discs or cylindrical shapes which express an advantage possibility for
dyes adsorption.
Page 589
Page 590
-1
Page 591
Dye
sample
Direct
Freundlich
parameters
Langmuir parameters
Q
(mg/ml)
0.030
b
(l/g)
R2
1/n
K
(mg/g)
R2
For the Langmuir model, the linearity was well maintained in the considered concentration
range and can be indicated that in the range of concentration for this study showed the effective
dye removal. It is important to notify that the mechanism of dye adsorption on Zeolite cannot be
determined directly from the Langmuir or Freundlich fitting. However, from Table1, it can be
concluded that the adsorption isotherms of Direct dye exhibit Langmuir behavior, which indicates
monolayer adsorption. As showed in Fig.5, it can be concluded that Freundlich model can be
indicated the trend of adsorption efficacy of the direct dye.
Page 592
Page 593
Page 594
ABSTRACT
This research was conducted to investigate lead (Pb) contaminations in surface soil, water and
sediment in the Chanthaburi River and vicinity area along the river. The samples were collected to
estimate Pb contaminated concentrations and also potential environmental risks by Hazard
Quotient Equation (HQ). The results revealed that the distribution of Pb in surface soils of the
orchards located on the bank along the river in dry and wet seasons were in the ranges of 4.06 4.67 and 4.60 - 4.80 mg/kg, dry weight (dw.), respectively and the potential environmental risks of
surface soil are not at risks (HQ < 0.1). The Pb concentrations in water of the Chanthaburi River
from upstream down to estuaries in dry and wet seasons were ranged from not detectable (ND) 0.002 and ND - 0.005 mg/l, respectively and did not exceed the standard for surface water (0.05
mg/l). Likewise, the potential environmental risks of water are not at risks (HQ < 0.1). Also, in
sediment, the concentrations of Pb in dry and wet seasons were very low in the ranges of 2.20 4.24 and 2.46 - 4.34 mg/kg, dw., respectively and the potential environmental risks of sediment are
not at risks (HQ < 0.1), as well. It can be concluded that, at present, this project area is not at risks
in spite of Pb-containing pesticide applications had been performed for many years ago. Regards
to the Water Quality Index (WQI) obtained from 8 parameters of dissolved oxygen (DO), fecal
coliform bacteria (FCB), pH, biochemical oxygen demand (BOD), total phosphate (TP), nitrates
(NO3), turbidity and total solid (TS), the water quality in most study area are classified to be good.
Keywords: lead, environmental risks, Hazard Quotient, Water Quality Index, Chanthaburi River
INTRODUCTION
The Chanthaburi River, located in Chantaburi Province, starts from Soi-Dao Mountain and
flows through Ma-Kham District which is the first community area and flows through orchard
plantation area, the major activities. Then, it runs through Muang District, high density
communities, and down to Lam-Sing District which connected to the Gulf of Thailand. The major
geology of this province consists of the mountains, forests and highlands with the height of 30-190
meters above sea level.
Most agricultural areas are located along the river and the rainfall washes away the pesticides
into river and estuaries. Most factories in this province are medium and small. There are
transportation and food production. The others are non-ferrous industry, timber industry and wood
products and industrial agriculture (Ministry of Industry Thailand, 2007).
Page 595
Page 596
Fig. 1 Map of sampling stations in the Chathaburi River and vicinity area (modified from Region
of Environmental office 13, 2010).
total phosphate (TP), nitrates (NO3), turbidity and total solid (TS). The WQI is calculated using
the following equation:
(1)
n = number of parameters
wi = unit weight of parameter
qi = the quality of parameter (PCD, 2010).
Surface soil/Sediment: Samples preparation of surface soil and sediment were air dried under
shade around 2 days, crushed by using a porcelain pestle and mortar and sieved to remove the
particles greater than 2 mm, using stainless sieve. The physical and chemical analyses of surface
soil and sediment were measured in the laboratory as follows: pH, organic matter (Walkley and
Black, 1934), texture (Sheldrick and Wang, 1993) and cation exchange capacity (Chapman, 1965).
Total lead contents of water samples will be investigated using method of nitric acid digestion
(APHA, 1998). Likewise, total lead contents of surface soil and sediment samples were
investigated using method of nitric acid digestion (USEPA, 1996). All surface soil and sediment
samples will be dried at 103 C for 24 hours prior to digestion. Pb contents of samples were
determined by Varian SpectrAA-600 Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometer (The lower limit of
detection was <1.0 g/L.).
Page 597
no hazard exists
hazard is moderate
hazard is high (Lemly, 1996).
Statistical analysis of data was carried out with the SPSS statistical program for Window
(version 18.0). Comparisons of mean values lead between seasons by the significance level was of
p < 0.05.
RESULTS
The accuracy of the analytical procedure for Pb determination calibrated against standard
reference material by the percentage recovery was at 98.29. Whereas method detection limit
(MDL) was at 0.0012 mg/l.
The physical and chemical characteristics of surface soil are shown in Table 1. The
concentrations of Pb in surface soils in dry and wet seasons were in the ranges of 4.06 to 4.67 and
4.60 to 4.80 mg/kg, dw., respectively (Fig. 2). The Pb in surface soil mainly showed high
concentration in only the depth of 11-15 cm. regards to agricultural and industrial activities related
to Pb which was banned in Thailand for many years ago. The Pb was previously added to gasoline
used for gasoline-powered machines which have been employed in agricultural operations for
cultivation, water pumping and harvesting )Wenzhong et al., 2010) which is the main activity of
this province. The result of statistical analysis for comparisons of Pb concentrations between
seasons in surface soil was significant difference.
The characteristics of water were shown in Table 2. The concentrations of Pb in water in dry
and wet seasons were in the ranges of ND to 0.002 and ND to 0.005 mg/l, respectively (Fig. 2).
The concentration of lead decreased as increasing the period of time based on annual water quality
report during the year 2004-2010 in the Chanthaburi River (Region of Environmental office 13,
2010). The Pb in water mainly showed high concentrations in dry season. In addition, Pb in wet
season showed high concentrations at stations S5 and S6 because those stations were receiving
estuaries of rain runoff from contaminated tributaries. The result of statistical analysis for
comparisons of Pb in water between seasons showed no significant difference. Most of the water
qualities of the river are classified to be good as calculated Water Quality Index (WQI) of the
Chanthaburi River shown in Table 3. The bad
Page 598
Sand (%)
Silt
(%)
Clay
(%)
Texture
pH
OM
(%)
CEC
(cmol/kg)
Dry Season
SS1
SS2
SS3
SS4
(cm)
22.8
52.9
24.3
Silt Loam
5.7
5.67
14.69
6-10 (cm)
21.3
52.8
25.9
Silt Loam
5.6
4.90
14.31
11-15 (cm)
23.3
51.4
25.3
Silt Loam
5.1
3.48
12.16
(cm)
28.7
48.2
23.1
Loam
5.7
5.45
14.67
6-10 (cm)
24.9
50.7
24.4
Silt Loam
5.6
3.51
12.22
11-15 (cm)
25.0
49.8
25.2
Loam
5.2
2.50
9.84
(cm)
43.5
39.3
17.2
Loam
5.4
3.77
9.58
6-10 (cm)
38.6
42.5
18.9
Loam
4.8
2.31
7.86
11-15 (cm)
41.3
39.3
19.4
Loam
4.8
2.07
7.78
(cm)
27.6
45.7
26.7
Loam
5.1
4.63
14.69
6-10 (cm)
29.1
44.4
26.5
Loam
4.3
3.51
11.38
11-15 (cm)
28.8
45.3
25.9
Loam
4.4
2.95
11.06
(cm)
24.2
50.5
25.3
Silt Loam
5.0
4.96
13.83
6-10 (cm)
24.8
48.3
26.9
Loam
4.9
3.05
12.65
11-15 (cm)
25.0
48.2
26.8
Loam
4.9
2.14
10.42
(cm)
25.3
49.5
25.2
Loam
5.6
4.78
13.98
6-10 (cm)
26.2
48.9
24.9
Loam
5.2
2.92
11.17
11-15 (cm)
26.9
47.4
25.7
Loam
5.0
2.27
10.10
(cm)
47.8
35.2
17.0
Loam
4.7
2.51
8.21
6-10 (cm)
41.9
35.8
22.3
Loam
4.6
3.70
10.52
11-15 (cm)
43.2
38.4
18.4
Loam
4.6
1.76
7.28
(cm)
43.8
37.0
19.2
Loam
5.9
4.13
17.25
6-10 (cm)
43.6
37.5
18.9
Loam
4.8
5.52
7.63
11-15 (cm)
35.9
41.1
23.0
Loam
5.2
3.70
3.18
0-5
0-5
0-5
0-5
Wet Season
SS1
SS2
SS3
SS4
0-5
0-5
0-5
0-5
Page 599
TS
Stations
DO
BOD
TP
NO3
FCB
(mg/l)
(mg/l)
(mgP/l)
(mgNO3/l)
(MPN/100ml)
pH
(NTU)
(mg/l)
Dry Season
S1
2.56
26.00
6.78
0.0108
0.74
40
S2
3.89
28.00
7.5
5.54
0.0038
0.82
70
S3
3.26
32.00
7.1
4.29
0.0073
0.31
40
S4
5.59
21152.00
6.9
3.16
0.0231
0.31
150
S5
4.57
35397.33
7.5
5.69
0.0038
0.34
<300
S6
3.78
37225.33
4.60
0.0021
0.46
<300
S1
4.60
188.00
7.5
7.28
0.0401
1.72
2670
S2
4.56
205.33
7.5
6.39
0.0821
1.19
24000
S3
5.52
222.67
7.5
5.50
0.0576
1.05
1650
S4
9.65
12078.67
7.2
6.33
0.0471
0.74
930
S5
14.50
34657.33
7.8
5.44
0.1468
3.23
24000
S6
3.85
25268.00
7.5
7.85
0.0725
0.57
2100
Thai Surface
Water Quality
Standard
(PCD, 1994)
5-9
2.0-6.0
1.5-4.0
5.0
Wet Season
1000-4000
quality of water at station 5 might be according to the activities from aquaculture in this
area. This consistent with the annual water quality reports during from the year 2008 to 2010,
which revealed that the water quality tend to decreased gradually. (Region of Environmental
office 13, 2010).
The physical and chemical characteristics of sediment are shown in Table 4. The
concentrations of Pb in sediment in dry and wet
Page 600
Stations
WQI
Criteria
Class
Dry season
WQI
Criteria
Class
Wet season
S1
84
Good
S1
76
Good
S2
81
Good
S2
66
Fairly
S3
78
Good
S3
75
Good
S4
63
Fairly
S4
72
Good
S5
71
Good
S5
53
Bad
S6
67
Fairly
S6
74
Good
71-100
61-70
31-60
0-30
(PCD, 2010).
Good
Fairly
Bad
Very Bad
pH
OM
(%)
Sand
(%)
Silt
(%)
Clay
(%)
S1
99.3
0.2
0.5
Sand
6.2
0.11
1.25
S2
46.9
31
22
Loam
5.3
1.58
7.75
S3
14.5
61
24
Silt Loam
5.1
4.26
12.87
S4
98.8
0.2
Sand
5.5
0.07
2.75
S5
22.9
53
24
Silt Loam
6.4
5.89
20.75
S6
78.3
11
11
Sandy Loam
7.0
1.78
7.11
S1
97.9
1.1
Sand
7.0
0.13
1.57
S2
27.7
49
24
Loam
5.5
4.50
12.11
S3
64.8
17
19
Sandy Loam
5.4
3.47
10.95
S4
22.4
50
28
Clay Loam
5.5
1.85
7.35
S5
33.3
36
30
Clay Loam
6.7
5.16
17.81
S6
74.3
15
11
Sandy Loam
7.2
1.73
Stations
Texture
(cmol/kg)
Dry Season
Wet Season
Page 601
Page 602
2011
May
24];
from:
URL:
Chapman, H. 1965. Cation exchange capacity, pp. 891-901. In C.A. Black, Evan D.D., Ensminger
L.E., White J.L. and Clark F.E. (Eds.). Method of soil Analysis. American Society of Agronomy.
Madison, Wisconsin.
Lemly, A. 1996. Evaluation of the Hazard Quotient method for risk assessment of selenium.
Journal of Ecotoxicology and Environmental Safety 35: 156-162.
Ministry of Industry Thailand. 2001. Hazardous substances prohibited the production, import,
export or possession (hazardous materials 4). Government Gazette on 2001 Nov 30. Bangkok.
Ministry of Industry Thailand. Industrial in Chanthaburi Province. 2007 [cited 2011 Jul 22];
Available from: URL: http://www.industry.go.th.
PCD. 1994. Thai Surface Water Quality Standard. Polution Control Department. Gazette on 1994
Feb 24. Bangkok.
PCD. 2004. Thai Soil Quality Standards for residential and agriculture. Polution Control
Department. Government Gazette on 2004 Oct 20. Bangkok.
PCD. 2009. Draft Interim Thai Sediment Quality Standard. Polution Control Department. Bangkok.
PCD. Water Quality Index. 2010 [cited 2011 Jul 22];
http://wqm.pcd.go.th/water/index.php/2010-04.../427--5---wqi.
Available
from:
URL:
Region of Environmental office 13. 2010. Report monitoring surface water quality of the East in
Thailand. Ministry of Natural Resources and Environment. Chonburi.
Seralathan, K., Prabhu, D., Kui, J., Kannan, N., Krishnamoorthy, R., Shanthi K. and Jayaprakash
M. 2008. Assessment of heavy metals (Cd, Cr and Pb) in water, sediment and seaweed (Ulva
lactuca) in the Pulicat Lake, South East India. Journal of Chemosphere 71:1233-1240.
Sheldrick, B., and Wang, C. 1993. Particle size distribution, pp. 499-511. In M.R. Carter (Ed.). Soil
Sampling and Methods of Analysis. Canadian Society of Soil Science. Lewis Publishers. Ann Arbor.
USEPA. Method 3050B. Acid digestion of sediments, sludges and soils. 1996 [cited 2011 Mar 5];
Available from: URL:
http://www.epa.gov/wastes/hazard/testmethods/sw846/online/3_series.htm.
Walkley, A. and Black. I. 1934. An Examination of Degtjareff Method for Determining Soil
Organic Matter and a Proposed Modification of the Chromic Acid Titration Method. Journal of
Soil Sci 37:29-37.
Page 603
Page 604
There have been various methodologies to enhance the efficacy of the TiO2 as photocatalyst for
dichloromethane treatment. Among those, activated carbon has been recently recognized as high
quality supporter for nano -TiO2 photocatalyst. The preparation of carbon-supported nano TiO2HDPE film (TiO2-Ac/HDPE) was achieved by blown film process. The characterization of
composite films was done by UV-Vis near IR spectrophotometry, Scanning Electron microscopy
(SEM), and BET surface area analysis. The photocatalytic oxidation activity of TiO2-Ac/HDPE
composite film was examined using an annular closed system reactor equipped with a UV C
lamp as energy source. Dichloromethane (DCM) in gas phase was introduced for photo catalytic
oxidation activity tests. The result from the SEM reveals the well define dispersion of carbonsupported nano TiO2 on the composite film surface with 3 and 5%wt. activated carbon while
10%wt activated carbon shows the agglomeration phenomenon on the composite film. The
calculation of energy band gap of TiO2-Ac/HDPE film were 3.18 eV, 3.27 eV and 3.27 eV,
respectively with varying the quantity of activated carbon support at 3, 5 and 10 % (wt.cat/wt.
film). The photocatalytic degradation test show the DCM removal efficiencies of 58%, 47% and
36% with using 3, 5 and 10 % (wt.cat/wt. film) activated carbon support at 350 minutes treatment
period.
Keywords: Photo Catalytic Oxidation, Activated Carbon Support, and Dichloromethane
INTRODUCTION
Chlorinated Volatile Organic Compounds (VOCs) in indoor air environments have received
significant attention mainly due to their toxicity and carcinogenicity (Chen et al., 1998).
Application of traditional method for indoor VOCs treatment seems impractical at low
concentration. For instant, adsorption, which has been the most commonly used method to treat
indoor air contaminants, is practical but ineffective for some types of organic compounds (Jo et
al., 2004). Recently, Photocatalytic Oxidation (PCO) has been gaining attention as a possible
alternative method for indoor air purification because it promises to clean air more efficiently and
effectively (Jacoby et al., 1996). PCO uses UV light to activate the catalyst to generate hydroxyl
Page 605
Page 606
10
50
10
50
10
10
50
Materials Characterization
Morphology
The microstructure of the TiO2-Ac/HDPE composite film was examined using the Scanning
Electron Microscope (SEM, Model Hitachi S-3400N and EDAX). In order to prevent the charge
build-up during SEM observation, samples were coated with gold which was used for ion sputter
target. The sputter rate and time were set for 10 nm min-1 and 3 min, respectively. The gold film
thickness was approximately 30 nm (Jiang et al., 2009).
Optical property
Ultraviolet-visible spectra of the photocatalysts were recorded using the UV-VIS
spectrophotometer (Lamda 35, Perkin Elmer instrument) equipped with an integrating sphere. The
scan ranged from 200 to 800 nm. All spectra were monitored in the absorbance mode and acquired
under ambient conditions. The band gap energy of TiO2-Ac/HDPE film can be calculated from
absorbance results (Jiang et al.,2009). The optical absorbance spectra, the adsorption coefficient
and the band gap of TiO2-Ac/HDPE composite film were evaluated. Briefly, the absorption
coefficient was calculated using the following correlation, = ln (1/d)/t, where t is the
transmittance and d is the thickness of the film.
The thickness of the film was also evaluated from the UV spectrum and the average value
corresponding to 360 nm. The band-gap energy was obtained by plotting the optical absorption
(h)2 and the photon energy (h). Then the extrapolation of the linear portion of the curve must be
performed to receive the band gap energy.
BET-surface analysis
Pore size distribution for TiO2-Ac samples was determined at 77 K using an Autosorb-1 surface
area analyzer (Quantachrome, Science Engineering). The samples were dried at 100oC for 8 h prior
to the measurement.
X-ray Diffraction (XRD)
The crystalline structures of photocatalysts were determined by X-Ray Diffraction (XRD)
technique. XRD patterns were obtained on the X-Ray Diffraction (TTRAXIII,Rigaku) using Cu
K and radiation (=1.5404 ). The current and voltage applied were 300 mA and 50 KV,
respectively. The scan ranges from 20 to 60 with a scan rate of 5 min-1 (Shifu et al., 2009).
Photocatalytic Oxidation Reactor
The photocatalytic oxidation reactor used in this study was an annular closed-system. The
reactor is composed of an UVC lamp with 254 nanometer wavelength. The UV light intensity was
recorded using a digital radiometer equipped with a UV-C sensor. The TiO2-Ac/HDPE composite
Page 607
45-55%
Temperature, C
26-42
30
Initial Contaminant
concentration DCM, ppm
25 (5)
UV light source
UV light intensity, m W
cm-2
350
Page 608
(b)
(c)
(d)
Fig. 1 SEM micrographs of PE TiO2-Ac/HDPE (a) with 3%wt Ac (b), 5%wt Ac (c), and 10%wt Ac (d).
RESULTS
Morphology
SEM micrographs (Fig.1) show surface morphology of TiO2-Ac/HDPE composite film. The
dispersion of nano-TiO2-Ac in HDPE matrix reveals uniformed dispersion of carbon-supported
nano-TiO2 on the film surface with using 3%wt. activated carbon. Even the efficiency of
dispersability of carbon-supported nano-TiO2 on the films was reduced with activated carbon
contents, the photo catalytic efficiency of the composite film still improved. For the reason that
nano-TiO2 supported on activated carbon showed the advantage of increasing the active site on
nano-TiO2 surface.
Pore size distribution
Fig. 2 shows pore size distributions of Ac and TiO2-Ac with varying the amount of Ac content.
It can be clearly seen that the presence of TiO2 in pores caused the reduction in peak areas.
Noticeably, the characteristics of activated carbon, i.e. mesopore (20-500 Ao) and macropore (5001000 Ao) are occurred in activated carbon particles.
Page 609
Fig. 2 Pore size distribution for TiO2/Ac with varying the amount of Ac content.
For the entire pore diameter range, the pore size distribution, in Fig.2, for nano-TiO2 supported
with activated carbon lies beneath that of pure Activated carbon. A decrease in the amount of Ac
contents with constant amount of TiO2 may decrease the volume of pore which confirming the
presence of TiO2 in pore. With no TiO2 content, the pore volume show the highest pore volume
and decrease with lowering amount of Ac.
As a consequence, the BET surface area of activated carbon supported nano-TiO2 (Table 3)
increased with increasing Ac content, high active area of Ac can be supported TiO2 particles.
Table 3. Specific surface area Activated carbon before and after loading by nano-TiO2.
Sample
TiO2
contents
(%wt)
Activated
carbon
contents
(%wt)
BET surface
area
(m2/g)
10
48.41
10
51.65
10
10
53.67
100
79.43
Page 610
Page 611
Activated
carbon
Energy
band gaps
(%wt)
contents
(%wt)
(Eg eV)
10
No adding
3.18
10
3.18
10
3.27
10
10
3.27
Sample
Photocatalytic Activity
Photocatalytic activity of the TiO2-Ac/HDPE composite film for removal of DCM in dry air
was investigated. For all experiments, the initial concentration of dichloromethane, the air flow
rate and the UV light intensity were set at 25 ppm, 2 L min-1 and 4 mW/cm2, respectively. At the
duration of
treatment time of 350 minute showed constant decrease in decomposition
As seen in Fig. 5, the TiO2-Ac/HDPE composite film with the activated carbon of 3, 5, and 10
% (wt cat./wt film) showed an increase in the removal efficiency corresponding to variation of
content of the Activated carbon. The TiO2-Ac/HDPE composite film with 3%wt activated carbon
showed the highest removal efficiency (58% removal efficiency), followed by 5%wt. (47%
removal efficiency) and 10%wt. activated carbon (36% removal efficiency), respectively.
Page 612
I would like to express my gratitude to the Faculty of Science & Technology, Suan
Sunandha Rajabhat Univesity,1 U-Thong Nok Road,Wachira ,Dusit, Bangkok.
The special thank is extend to the National Metal and Materials Technology Centre for
their financial support and for providing me with an opportunity to carry out this project.
Page 613
Page 614
Page 615
Page 616
WQI
i =1
w iq i
(1)
n=Numberofparameters
wi=Unitweightofparameter
The physical and chemical analyses of surface soil were measured in laboratory as
followings: pH, organic matter (Walkey and Black, 1984), texture (Sheldrick and Wang, 1993)
and cation exchange capacity (Chapman, 1965). Paraquat contamination of surface soil and water
sample were investigated using method of spectrophotometer (Tatong, K. 2010).
Actual or potential threat of adverse effects on living organisms and environment (HQ) is
caused by effluents, emissions, wastes, resource depletion, etc., arising out of organization's
activities. The HQ can be obtained by calculation using the following equation:
locationsbyGPSposition
No.
surfacesoil
(SS)
watercolumn
(S)
N12o41.498
N12o41.482
E102o10.382
E102o10.400
N12o40.081
N12o40.247
E102o10.006
E102o09.951
N12o38.401
N12o38.381
E 102o08 385
E 102o08 394
Fig.1 Sampling locations for surface soil (SS ) and water column (S ) in the Chanthaburi River
and vicinity area (modified from Region of Environmental office 13, 2010).
Page 617
EEC
Screening Benchmark
(2)
EEC = estimated (maximum) environmental contaminant concentration in the soil or water at area.
(e.g. mg contaminant/kg soil)
Screening Benchmark = maximum allowable of
paraquat concentration; if the contamination concentration is below this level, the contaminant is
not likely to cause harmful effects.
If HQ < 0.1
no hazard exists.
If HQ 0.1- 1.0
hazard is low.
If HQ 1.1 - 10
hazard is moderate.
If HQ >10
hazard is high.
(Lemly, 1996).
All data were processed and adjusted to obtain the 95% of confidence interval (P < 0.05) using
SPSS statistical program for window (version 18.0).
RESULTS, DISSCUSSION AND CONCLUSIONS
Physical and chemical characteristics of surface soil are shown in Table 1. The concentrations
of paraquat in surface soil were in the ranges of 3.33 to 8.28 and 1.30 to 9.15 mg/Kg dw.,
respectively (Fig. 2). The highest concentration of paraquat was found at station 1 in both seasons.
However, there was no significant different between paraquat concentrations in each season.
Hazard Quotient (HQ) of surface soil, using the screening benchmark base on the lethal
ingestion dose of paraquat in human (Nation Library of Medicine, 1992), showed that the potential
environmental risks in dry season are not at risks with low hazard. (HQ < 0.1).
In water, Hazard Quotient assessment using screening benchmark base on the water criteria and
protection of freshwater aquatic life (established by Canada) showed that the potential
environmental risks in both seasons are not at risks (no hazard exists, HQ < 0.1) with low hazard
(HQ 0.1-1.0).
With respect of WQI, most of water qualities in the Chanthaburi River are classified to be good
(WQI = 71 -100) as shown in Table 3. However, there were some parameters that exceeded the
quality standard (PCD, 1992), such as BOD in station 4 and station 6 (dry season) and FCB in
station 2 and station 5 (wet season).
The low quality of water at station 5 in wet season might be due to the activities from
aquaculture as well as runoff.
Page 618
stations
sand
(%)
silt
clay
(%)
(%)
texture
pH
OM*
CEC*
(%)
(cmol/Kg)
dryseason
SS1
22.5
52.4
25.2
siltloam
5.47
4.68
13.72
SS2
26.2
49.6
24.2
loam
5.50
3.82
12.24
SS3
41.1
40.4
18.5
loam
5.00
2.72
8.41
SS4
28.5
45.1
26.4
loam
4.60
3.7
12.38
wetseason
SS1
24.7
49.0
26.3
loam
4.93
3.38
12.30
SS2
26.1
48.6
25.3
loam
5.27
3.32
11.75
SS3
44.3
36.5
19.2
loam
4.63
2.66
8.67
SS4
41.1
38.5
20.4
loam
5.30
4.45
9.35
*OM=OrganicmatterCEC=CationExchangeCapacity
Fig.2 Paraquat contaminations in the Chanthaburi River and surface soil in vicinity area
Page 619
turbidity
(NTU)
pH
DO*a
BOD*a
TP*
NO3 *
TS*
a
FCB*
(mg/l)
(mg/l)
(mgP/l)
(mgNO3 /l)
(mg/l)
(MPN/100ml)
dryseason
S1
2.56
8.0
6.78
0.0108
0.74
36.00
40
S2
3.89
7.5
5.54
0.0038
0.82
28.00
70
S3
3.26
7.1
4.29
0.0073
0.31
32.00
40
S4
5.59
6.9
3.16
0.0231
0.31
21152.00
150
S5
4.57
7.5
5.69
0.0038
0.34
35397.33
<300
S6
3.78
8.0
4.60
0.0021
0.46
37225.33
<300
Wetseason
S1
4.60
7.5
7.28
0.0401
1.72
188.00
2670
S2
4.56
7.5
6.39
0.0821
1.19
205.33
24000
S3
5.52
7.5
5.50
0.0576
1.05
222.67
1650
S4
9.65
7.2
6.33
0.0471
0.74
12078.67
930
S5
14.50
7.8
5.44
0.1468
3.23
34657.33
24000
S6
3.85
7.5
7.85
0.0725
0.57
25268.00
2100
1,0004,000
Standardswaterqualityofsurfacewater
59
26
14
*DO=DissolveOxygenBOD=BiologicalOxygenDemandTP=TotalPhosphateNO3 =Nitrate
Page 620
criteria
ass*
1
dry season
stat
ions
QI
very good
W
QI
S1
water quality
criteria
good
S2
1-100
3
fairly good
bad
very bad
0-
S4
good
fairly good
30
good
fairly good
good
good
bad
good
2
7
good
1
S6
5
6
S5
criteria
1-60
5
good
1-70
QI
water quality
6
8
S3
good
4
2
wet season
3
6
fairly good
4
contamination in soil and water did not exceed the quality standard. Thus, the human health of
local people might be not posed to the risks (water criteria and protection of freshwater aquatic life
by Canada suggested at concentration of 16 g / L and the lethal ingestion dose of paraquat in
human is 35 mg / Kg (HSBD, 1992)). Even though the risks are very low and even no
environmental risks occur in this area, the paraquat application should be done carefully and
correctly for the safe ecology and also the next generation.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
This research work is supported by scholarship from the Center of Excellence on
Environmental Health and Toxicology (EHT) under Science and Technology Postgraduate
Education and Research Development Office (PERDO) of Ministry of Education.
Page 621
American Public Health Association (APHA). 1998. Standard methods for the
examination of water and wastewater. Twentieth Edition. APHA Inc., New York.
Chapman, H. 1965. Cation
Exchange
Capacity. In Black C.A., Even D.D., Ensminger
L.E., White J.L., Clark F.E. and Dinauer R.C. (Eds). Method of soil analysis. Part 2 Chemical and
Microbiological Properties.
Colinvaux,P.A. 1973. Introduction to Ecology. John Wiley & Sons, Inc. NewYork.
Dennis, D.M.D., and Zupko, A.J. 1995. Soil- Washinh Process for Site Remediation, pp.
745 777. In D.L. Wise & D.J. Trantolo (Eds.). Remediation of Hazardous Waste Contaminated
Solid, Marcell Dekker, Inc. New York.
Hazardous Substances Databank (HSDB). Paraquat. National Library of Medicine. [serial
online] 1992. [cited 2011, Jan 15]; Available: URL: http://pmep.cce.cornell.edu/profiles/
extoxnet/metiram-propoxur/paraquat-ext.html.
Hazardous Substances Databank (HSDB). Paraquat. National Library of Medicine,
Bethesda, MD. [serial online] 2000 [cited 2011, Jan 11]; Available from: URL:
http://www.panap.net/uploads/media/paraquat_
monograph_PAN_AP.pdf.
International Programmed on Chemical Safety (IPCS). Paraquat and diquat.
Environmental Health Criteria 39, [serial online] 2010 [cited 2010, March 17]; Available from:
URL: http://www. inchem. org/ documents/
ehc/ ehc/ ehc39.htm.
Jayakody, A.S. 2007. Assessment of dredging influenced sediment toxicity of
endosulfan toxicity and lindane on Black tiger shrimp (Penaeus monodon) in Chanthaburi river
estuary in Thailand. M.Sc. thesis. University of Asian Institute of Technology, Bangkok, Thailand.
Keithmaleesatti, S., Thirakhupt, K. Pradatsudarasar, A. Varanusupakul, P. Kitana, N and
Robson, M. 2007. Concentration of organochlorine in egg yolk and reproductive success of
Egretta garzetta (Linnaeus, 1758) at Wat Tan-en Non-hunting Area, Phra Nakhorn Si Ayuthaya
Province, Thailand. Journal of Ecotox Environ Safe 68: 79-83.
Lemly, A. D. 1996. Selenium in Aquatic
wildlife: Interpreting Tissue Concentration
Norwood, pp.427-446.eds., SETAC Series, Lewin Press, Boca Roton F.L.
PAN. Paraquat. [serial online] 1996 [cited 2010, March 17]; Available from: URL:
http: // www. panuk.org / pestnews / Actives/
paraquat.htm.
Pollution Control Department (PCD). [serial online] 2010 [cited 2011, Jan 11];
Available from: URL: wqn.pcd.go.th/water/
index.php/2010-04//427--5---wqi.
Provincial Agriculture Extension Office Chanthaburi. Land use for agriculture
[serial Online] 2009 [cited 2010 May 20]. Available from: URL: http://www.chanthaburi.
doae.go.th/data1/database_ chan.htm.
Osotspa, Y., Panitsakpatana,S., Wongmanee - rote, A. and Tongju, C. 1998. Soil Colloid, pp. 182 185. Basic Agronomy, Kasetsart University Press, Bangkok.
Sheldrick, B.H. and Wang, C. 1993. Particle size distribution- Soil Sampling and Methods
of Analysis. pp. 449-511.In M.R. Carter (Ed.). Canadian Society of Soil Science. Boca Raton:
Lewis Press, Canada.
Tatong, K. 2010. Ecokinetics of herbicides from Farmland and to the river: A case study
of Chathabuti estuary in Thailand. M.Sc. thesis. University of Asian Institute of Technology,
Bangkok, Thailand.
United States Environmental Protection Agency (US EPA). 2006. Ecological Risk
Assessment Guigance for Superfund Step 2: Screening level Exposure Estimate and Risk
Calulation. USA: States Environmental Protection Agency.
Page 622
Page 623
Page 624
Page 625
Page 626
Activation solution
Osmolality
(mOsm.kg-1)
pH
Tap water
6.670.58
7.8
1% NaHCO3
208.001.00
8.4
159.670.58
7.5
50 mM KCl+1 mM MgSO4
190.331.53
8.5
17 mM NaCl+5 mM Tris-HCl
37.331.00
7.0
141.670.58
8.0
256.331.53
7.44
Page 627
Motility*
(%)
VSL (um/s)
VCL* (um/s)
VAP (um/s)
Duration time*
(S)
Tap water
5.173.18b
8.071.76
18.213.12ab
10.651.61
11.00 0.58de
1% NaHCO3
13.730.08b
12.516.92
19.466.92ab
14.136.93
22.67 0.88d
0.3%NaCl+0.4%Urea
14.923.96b
25.4710.11
34.099.25ab
28.4410.25
8.00 0.58e
50 mM KCl+1 mM
MgSO4
11.010.68b
21.347.36
29.533.83ab
23.387.23
44.50 1.50c
17 mM NaCl+5 mM
Tris-HCl
52.071.27a
23.587.53
33.153.72a
26.556.81
162.00 10.00a
45 mM NaCl+5 mM
KCl+30 mM Tris-HCl
14.590.01b
8.223.09
14.742.13b
9.642.71
80.50 9.50b
* Different letters in each column indicate significantly different at P<0.05 (ANOVA, Duncans test).
a
Fertilization (%)
60
ab
b
50
40
c
cd
30
20
10
0
Tr1
Tr2
Tr3
Tr4
Tr5
Tr6
Activation solution
Tr1= Tap water, Tr2= 1% NaHCO3, Tr3= 0.3% NaCl+0.4% Urea, Tr4= 50 mM KCl+1 mM MgSO4, Tr5=
17 mM NaCl+5 mM Tris-HCl, Tr6= 45 mM NaCl+ 5 mM KCl+30 mM Tris-HCl
Fig. 1 Mean percent (SE) fertilization of frozen P. hypophthalmus spermatozoa in six different
activated solutions using 10% dimethyl sulphoxide (DMSO) and 0.9% NaCl at 10 C min-1
freezing rate. Different superscript letters over the bars indicate significant difference among
activated solutions at P<0.05 (ANOVA, Duncans test).
Page 628
Page 629
Page 630
CH4 + CO2
(1)
However, the complex organic compound has been solubilized to volatile fatty acid (VFA) in
acidogenesis process that hydrogen gas is produced by Clostridium spp. (Das and Veziroglu, 2001)
At present, there are many researchers to study the hydrogen production from high strength
wastewater. Actually, acidogenesis process or dark fermentation, it determined that the organic
compound can be decomposed to hydrogen gas under anaerobic condition and non-photosynthesis.
Page 631
(2)
For instance, thermodynamics mechanism, 4 moles of hydrogen gas and 2 moles acetic acid
are produced from one mole glucose as follow. (Fang et al., 2002)
C6H12O6 + 2H2O = 2CH3COOH + 4H2 + 2CO2
(3)
Experiments from many researches showed that hydrogen gas 2-3 moles are produced from
glucose 1 mole because of butyric acid forming, propionic acid forming and methane gas
occurring (Vavilin et al., 1995) as these equation:
C6H12O6 = CH3CH2CH2COOH + 2H2 + 2CO2
(4)
(5)
(6)
As previous equations, there are many reactions for hydrogenation and dehydrogenation.
Therefore, the high yield of hydrogenation will be conducted by controlling either butyric acid or
acetic acid formation. The propionic acid and methane gas will be inhibited in the system.
Lay et al. (1998) researched on hydrogen production by the heated anaerobic sludge 15 mins.
The results showed that the heated sludge can produce hydrogen gas the same as Clostridium spp.
For example, the hydrogen yield from heated sludge was 140 ml-H2/gVSS as 60%H2 at pH 5.6.
The biogas rarely found methane gas and volatile fatty acid was butyric acid.
However, Kim et al. (2004) studied on hydrogen production from food waste by increasing
fermented domestic sludge that heated 90oC for 10 mins to inhibit the methane forming bacteria.
The experiment was conducted in batch system at 35oC and adjusted pH 5-6 with hydrochloric
acid and potassium hydroxide. Therefore, the hydrogen production rate determined 122.9 ml-H2/g
carbohydrate or 0.123 m3-H2/kg COD. The hydrogen forming bacteria was found as Clostridium
spp.
Horiuchi et al. (2002) concluded that the favorite condition for hydrogen production was pH
that depending on producing volatile fatty acid. Especially, butyric acid was found at pH 6-7 and
either acetic acid or propionic acid was discovered at pH 8. In addition to, hydrogen yield
correlated with butyric acid produced. Moreover, Hawkes et al. (2002) had reviewed the literatures
of hydrogen production to evaluate the suitable condition for operating in anaerobic system. It
concluded that pH should be 5.5-6.0 at 30oC in HRT 8-12 hrs.
MATERIALS AND METHODS
A Lab-Scale for Hydrogen Production.
A fermenter is as semi complete mixed reacter which has stirrer controlled by timer. There are
3 stages for operating as feeding, stirring and settling. The flow diagram of a lab-scale shows in
Figure 1.
Page 632
Gas
counte
H2inf
tank
H2
reactor
tank
Gas
holde
H2eff
tank
Page 633
Parameter
Unit
COD
mg/l
BOD
VFA
SS
O&G
TKN
PO43--P
Min-Max Average
44,410 - 111,551
184,310
mg/l
22,205 55,776
92,155
mg/l as
318 7,694
CH3COOH 16,973
mg/l
3,430 12,355
32,685
mg/l as
418 2,312
hexane
5,578
mg/l
56 - 3,530 2,184
mg/l
17 - 296
176
After hydrogen production, pH effluent had inverse correlation with volatile fatty acid
significantly at confidence interval 95%. Consequently, volatile fatty acid increasing caused pH
decreasing when COD volume loading increasing as shown in Figure 2 and Table 3. Correspond
with Fang et al. (2002) in hydrogen production, organic compound converted to organic acid that
pH decreased or acidity increased. Likewise, volatile fatty acid and hydrogen yield increased when
pH effluent decreased. (Chang and Lin, 2003)
From Figure 2, pH effluent will be kept in 4.3-4.5 because methane gas was produced at pH
more than 4.5. In conformity with Fang et al. (2002); Yu et al. (2002), Yu and Fang (2003) and
Hawkes et al. (2002) the suitable pH of hydrogen production should be 5.0-5.5. Methane gas will
be produced at pH more than 5.5. (Han and Shin, 2004 and Morimoto et al., 2004)
According to Morimoto et al. (2004) the hydrogen yield will be decreased when pH effluent
was less than 4.5. Therefore, methane gas is invisible but carbon dioxide gas accelerated
significantly. Owing to pH decreasing, the solubilization of carbon dioxide gas will be dropped
away. Hence, acid buffer will be reduced when pH has changed so the biochemical hydrogen
activity is below. The hydrogen yield decreases.
Page 634
Parameter
pH
COD
(mg/l)
BOD
(mg/l)
VFA
(mg/l)*
COD
loading
H2
production
H2
Influent
Min-Max
3.0-6.4
19,430 57,075
8,750 41,000
1,086 6,200
Effluent Efficiency
Min-Max
3.4 - 4.8
11,944 24.97%
51,265
5,250 21.24%
33,000
2,314 90.34%**
7,257
3
5.68-55.10
(kg/m -d)
(L/gCODr-d)
0.12
(%)
25.90-63.56
NaOH
(g/gCOD-d)
0.002-0.029
F/M
(gCOD/gVSS)
1.65
1.78
VFAeff/inf
pH
VFA*
Influent
Effluent
Min-Max Average Min-Max Average
4.6 - 6.78
5.73
3.95 4.43
4.73
326 1,236
1,129 2,830
3,158
5,343
Remark: * mg/l as CH3COOH
Page 635
Page 636
Fig. 3. The changes of COD decrease, VFA increase and H2 production rate
From Figure 3, the COD decreasing and VFA increasing had increased when COD volume
loading increased. It meant that the organic compound was decomposed to volatile fatty acid more
and more. On the other hand, H2 production rate (L/gCODr) had decreased when COD volume
loading increased. It showed that the higher COD could not be decomposed to H2 in HRT 1 day.
From Figure 3, it indicated that the hydrogen production rate was the hightest at COD volume
loading 14.40 g/L.d.
From Table 4, the hydrogen production operated at COD between 10,000 and 30,000 mg/l. The
average of hydrogen production rate was 6.49 mmole/gCODr-d or 0.11 L-H2/gCODr-d that was
nearly to experiments of Kim et.al. (2004). The hydrogen yield was 52.62% (maximum 70.20%).
For that matter, COD volume loading and hydrogen yield had increased when hydraulic retention
time (HRT) decreased.
Besides, HRT had inverse correlation with hydrogen production rate significantly at confidence
interval 95%. According to Fang and Chang (2003) and Fang et al. (2002), the highest hydrogen
production rate was at HRT 8 hrs. In addition to, Hawke et al. (2002) found that the hydrogen
yield was carried out at HRT was at 8-12 hrs. Including Yu and Fang (2001) concluded that HRT
was 12 hrs. conducted to the highest hydrogen production. Furthermore, Ueno et.al. (1996)
discovered that HRT had correlated with COD while HRT was 0.5-3 days.
Page 637
Parameter
VFA
COD
Unit
Influent Effluent
Min-Max Min-Max
326 1,129 mg/l as
3,158
5,343
CH3COOH
mg/l
11,981 7,802
33,870
28,401
H2
3.2 9.65
mmoleH2/g
production
CODr.d
rate
0.07 0.15
L H2/g
CODr.d
H2
29.00 70.20
%
Moreover, HRT of hydrogen production affected to volume of hydrogen reactor. Size of reactor
was small when HRT became less than. (Chang and Lin, 2005 and Lin and Lee, 2003) Then HRT
decreased, VFA and hydrogen yield had increased. Bai et al. (2003) studied that butyric acid was
produced at HRT 6 hr so that hydrogen production became maximum.
From designing system at, COD influent 40,000 mg/l, the hydrogen gas was produced
maximum 63.56% at pH 4.3. The average of hydrogen yield was 52.2 L/d or biogas 82.1 L/d at
53%H2.
In case of F/M of hydrogen production was 1.65 gCOD/gVSS. At the steady condition, COD
influent was 800 g/d and MLSS and MLVSS were 634 g and 486 g. It showed that hydrogen
producing bacteria needed high concentration of COD in order to compose to volatile fatty acid,
H2 and CO2 that COD removal efficiency was between 10% and 30%.
DISCUSSION
In this investigation, a lab-scale anaerobic semi complete mixed reactor was operated to
develop the technology of hydrogen production from food waste. This study focused on the diluted
wastewater that has the maximum COD influent as 57,075 mg/l. The hydrogen system was started
gradually COD volume loading rate from 5.68-55.10 kgCOD/m3.d at HRT 1 days and kept still pH
in 4.3-4.5. The hydrogen yield was 0.12 L-H2/gCODr.d at 45%H2. The average efficiency of COD
and BOD removal were 25% and 21% respectively. The conditions of hydrogen production as
VFAeff/inf and F/M were 1.78 and 1.65 respectively.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
The authors gratefully to acknowledge the financial support by the grant from Thailand
Institute of Scientific and Technological Research.(In-house project of TISTR) As well as, the
authors wish to acknowledge Huay Khawng domestic wastewater treatment plant for their support
of the fermented sludge and TISTRS canteen for support the food waste. .
Page 638
Page 639
Yu, H., Zhu, Z., Hu, W. and Zhang, H. 2002. Hydrogen Production from Rice Winery Wastewater
in an Upflow Anaerobic Reaction by Using Mixed Anaerobic Cultures. International Journal of
Hydrogen Energy. 27: 1359-1365.
Page 640
The insect cytochrome P450 (P450s) have been report to play an imrtant role in pyrethroid
insecticides detoxification in many Anopheles mosquitoes, including Anopheles minimus
mosquito, one of primary malaria vector in Thailand. In order to fulfill the catalytic activity, the
P450s- enzymatic reaction requires electrons transfer from NADPH through FAD and FMN
cofactors, one by one, from its redox partner, the cytochrome P450 oxidoreductase (CYPOR)
enzyme. Interestingly, the An. minimus CYPOR enzyme (AnCYPOR) properties is clearly
difference from mammalian CYPOR enzymes and play an importance role in An. minimus P450mediated pyrethroid insecticides activity in vitro. In this study, based on amino acid sequence
alignment and computational analysis, the computational modeling of the AnCYPOR was
constructed. The predictive three-dimensional model structure of AnCYPOR is difference from
previously characterized mammalian CYPOR. As CYPOR is crucial for various P450-mediated
reactions in mosquito, specifically inhibit of CYPOR activity may decrease many P450-catalytic
reactions in vivo. In addition, Clove extract (Syzygium aromaticum) could selectively inhibited
AnCYPOR enzyme compared to rat CYPOR enzyme. Therefore, the difference in properties and
structure as well as selective inhibition of AnCYPOR by Clove extract would be beneficial for a
malaria vector control program for safety synergistic insecticide.
Keywords: NADPH-Cytochrome P450 ocidoreductase, Anopheles minimus, Thai herbals,
inhibition
INTRODUCTION
The reemergence of many vector-borne diseases such as malaria, caused by resistance of insect
vectors to chemical insecticides, mediated by cytochrome P450 enzyme in family 6 (CYP6), is an
obstacle for vector control programs in many tropical countries (Rivero et al, 2010; Rongnoparut
et al., 2012). Long-term continued uses of pyrethroids have led to pyrethroid insecticide resistance
in various mosquito species, including Anopheles minimus, one of a primary malaria vector in
Thailand (Chareonviriyaphap et al., 1999). The mosquito Anopheles minimus, one of the primary
malaria vectors in Thailand, had increased levels of CYP6AA3 and CYP6P7 transcripts during
deltamethrin resistant selection (Rongnoparut et al., 2003; Rodpradit et al., 2005). Both CYP6AA3
and CYP6P7 are belonging to family 6 of the cytochrome P450 monooxygenase (P450)
superfamily of enzymes. However, the P450 reaction requires electron supplementation from
Page 641
Page 642
Page 643
Page 644
Page 645
Page 646
Page 647
Page 648
Page 649
*
*
Fig 3. Effect of selected Thai plant on CYPOR enzymes. The selected plant extracts were incubated with rat CYPOR (dot bar) or AnCYPOR (horizontal bar) enzymes
and measuring for the remaining activity compared to the control reaction (enz). The specific inhibitor for rat CYPOR (2AMP) was used as positive control.
The effects of tested plant extracts were measured in three concentration 1 ug/ml (A), 10 ug/ml (B) and 100 ug/ml. All tested were perform in triplicate and
analyzed the difference between AnCYPOR and rat CYPOR remaining activity by t-test (p < 0.05).
Page 650
ABSTRACT
Organoclays were produced from sodium-rich bentonite and organic surfactant or quaternary
ammonium cation (QAC). Two C-12 alkyl chain length cationic surfactants with different
molecular structure, Dodecylpyridinium chloride (DPC) and Dodecyltrimethylammonium bromide
(DTAB), were added to bentonites at 0.5-2.0 times the cation exchange capacity (CEC). This study
was performed to determine the feasibility of using organoclays to remove phenol and lead
contaminants. The role of competition between phenol and lead was observed. The result was
found that no direct competition was noticed between phenol and lead contaminants. That is, the
sorption of phenol was not affected by lead sorption. The reason for this may come from phenol
and lead having different sorption sites and mechanisms, namely, phenol adsorption was chemical
mechanism for DPC-organoclay and partitioning mechanism into the organic phase of interlayer
space, which modified by DTAB, while lead adsorption was chemisorbed to silanol, aluminal, and
other edge sites.
Keywords: Organoclay, Cationic Surfactant, Phenol, Lead, Sorption
INTRODUCTION
Toxic organic and inorganic contaminations, such as phenolic compounds and heavy metals are
commonly found in the industrial wastewater. Water quality would be affected by the mixed
contaminants released into water environment which leaded to pollution problems. Especially, the
heavy metal ions have already endangered the sustainable development of human society (Jin et
al., 2011; Li et al., 2009; Popat et al., 1994; and Liu et al., 2010) Contaminants of phenolic
compounds from petroleum and petrochemical, coal conversion, pesticide, paint, pharmaceutical,
plastic, paper and phenol producing industries are considered one of the priority pollutants in
wastewater, because its toxicity to organisms even at low concentrations (Liu et al., 2010; Santos
and Linardi, 2001; Sheikheldin et al., 2000; and Veeresh et al., 2003). As a result, Environmental
Protection Agency (EPA) regulations call for lowering phenol content in wastewater to less than 1
ppm (Dutta et al., 1998).
Adsorption is widely used technique for removing phenol and heavy metals in which various
type of adsorbents such as pine cone, palm shell, chitosan, organoclay, and so on (Issabayeva et
al., 2008; Meng et al., 2008; Momilovi et al., 2011; and Wan Ngah et al., 2011) Previous studies
Page 651
Formular
Structure
Molecular
weight
(g/mol)
C17H30NCl
283.90
(DPC)
C15H34NCl
308.35
(DTAB)
94.12
Phenol
(C6H5OH)
Lead
(Pb2)+
207.19
Sample Preparation
The organoclays prepared with the amount of DPC and DTAB equivalent to X times the CEC was
named XDPC and/or XDTAB with X=0.50, 1.00, 1.50, and 2.00.The sodium-rich bentonite was
washed several time with deionized water in order to remove soluble inorganic salts and any adhering
Page 652
(1)
where f is fraction of CEC satisfied by organic cation, Mcation is mass of organic cation required to
achieve the desired fraction of CEC (mass), Mclay is mass of the base clay (mass), GMWcation is gram
molecular weight of organic cation (mass/mol), Z is moles of charge per equivalent, mol/equivalent
(Bartelt-Hunt et al., 2003).
Sorption of Phenol and Lead
Batch sorption experiments were performed by containing 25 ml glass vials, 0.05 g of the 9 sorbents,
namely bentonite, the 4 ration of DPC-organoclays, the 4 ration of DTAB-organoclays and synthetic
wastewater with phenol concentration 10 mg/l and various ration of lead concentration range from 5 to 20
mg/l. The mixed solution was adjusted pH to be 7.00.5 using HCL and NaOH. All samples were shaken
at 150 rpm for 30 min at room temperature (232oC) to reach the equilibrium state. The supernatant was
filtered through 0.45 m Nylon membrane syringe filter, and the phenol solution was analyzed by UVspectrophotometer with the absorbance wavelength 270 nm (Xu and Zhu, 2007). All experiments were
conducted in triplicates to ensure reproducibility.
RESULT
Sorption of phenol in the presence of lead: Fig 1 and 2 shows the sorption of phenol onto DPCand DTAB-organoclays of lead at phenol concentration: lead concentration = 10:5, 10:10 and
10:20.
1.4
Phenol
10:05
1.2
10:10
10:20
1.0
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.2
0.0
0.5 DPC
1.0 DPC
1.5 DPC
Page 653
2.0 DPC
1.2
Phenol
10:05
1.0
10:10
10:20
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.2
0.0
0.5 DTAB
1.0 DTAB
1.5 DTAB
2.0 DTAB
Page 654
Page 655
Page 656
P = V 0.3W / m 3 (see [1]) There Ptotal power (w) of speaker(needed sound power) ; V
total volume of room or hall , To avoid amplifier works in ultimate limit, the actual power
should is P30%.
We have known human ear is more sensitive to the sound frequency from1000Hz to 5000 Hz
,So we should consider main power of speaker is distributed in above frequency range when
choosing speaker system. Sound coming from microphone is a non line input ,so microphone is an
usually used sound resource in the room and hall. Speaker system is often researched as sound
resources which amplified microphone sound signal. The sound-field coming from speaker system
constructs sound-field of room and hall.
Page 657
Left1
120
Right1
Right2
Left2
Because the construction price of acoustic environments, designing and constructing are based
on common classroom for multi-media room and conference hall of university . If speaker system
is set reasonable and we can construction an uniform sound-field ,we only need ordinarily
absorption material on the wall, example pp, pps ,gypsum board etc. Of course, its able not to use
any absorption material .The performance price ratio will be satisfying at all. The reverberation
time can be calculated as traditional method.
For multi-media room when the material of interface (wall surface) is same, reverberation time
can be calculated as follow[1]:
Page 658
0 .2
> 0 .2
T
T
60
60
= 0.161
V
( s)
S
0.161
(s)
ln(1 ) + 4mV
(1)
(2)
Where average absorption factor in interface (wall surface); Vvolume in the room (m 3 )
Sinterface square in the room (m 2 ) ; mair absorption factor
For conference hall, Perhaps the materials of three group walls are not same, reverberation time
can be calculated as fallow[1]:
T60 =
X
Y
Z
0.16V
0.16V
0.16V
] (s)
]+ [
]+ [
[
S S ln(1 x ) S S ln(1 y ) S S ln(1 z )
(3)
Page 659
1
2
1200
Left1
Right1
7
6
X1
Right2
Left2
9 X2
Y2
10
Y1
8
11
13
12
P = L p1 + 10 lg n (dB)
(4)
when n sound resources work at same time. Where Ptotal sound intensity level in some point in
the room or hall; L p1 sound intensity level of a sound resource.
When n=2 and sound resource power is same, then L p = L p1 + 3 dB
So we can check the sound intensity level of point 6 (when left 1 and right 1 works at same
time) is equal to L p1 +3 ( when only left 1 or right 1 works sound intensity level is L p1 ) . In
position X1 Y1,X2 Y2 where we have found there are the best listening effect by
actually experiment .The sound intensity level where X1Y1X2Y2 can be as a relative
standard so that we can adjust appropriately the speakers position of the left 1 right 1 Left 2
and right 2 for sound intensity level of every point in picture 2 is close to X1 Y1,X2 Y2 as
soon as possible.
We will draw a distribution graph of sound-field after measuring all points(113)which
will is useful to listing design of multi-media room or conference hall.
Page 660
L p = 10 log(
L p1
/ 10) (dB)
(5)
i =1
CONCLUSION
In order to get clear and more uniform sound-distribute for audiences in multi-media room and
conference hall ,we have to calculatedesign and measure the acoustic environment above room
and hall. Above the methods of calculating designing and measuring are more simple and
convenient, the result is match for practical effect.
Page 661
Page 662
Page 663
(1)
The SEM images were collected using a JSM 5800, JEOL was used to investigated the
morphology of the product.
Sorption Test
Dye adsorption
Sorption studies were performed in batch experiments. Batch sorption studies were
performed at adsorbent doses and contact time to obtain the equilibrium isotherm. The adsorption
of Mohom dye was performed by shaking 0.5 g of solid in 100 mL of dye solution of 20 mg/l at
100 rpm for 2 h. The determination of Mohom dyes was done spectrophotometrically on Lagarge
by measuring absorbance at max of 605 nm. To investigate the effect of adsorbent doses (0.14%) and contact time on adsorption.
Page 664
[Co-Ce]V/W
(2)
Where Co and Ce are the initial and equilibrium concentrations (M), respectively, of the dye in
solution, V is the volume (L), and W is the weight (g) of the adsorbent. To determine the sorption
effeiciency of the system (%Rem) was indicating the percentage of removed dyes.
%Rem
Co-Ce x 100
(3)
Co
where Co and Ce are, respectively, the initial concentration and concentration at the equilibrium
of concentration (mol/l)
RESULTS
Characterization of the Adsorbent material
The chemical composition of the slag, acid treated slag and zeolite product are show in Table 1.
The Si/ Al ratio of the slag is about 8.72, indicating that this type of slag is favorable for use as a
raw material for low Si zeolite synthesis. Furthermore, the slag has lower Fe and Ca. Among them,
Fe associates to the presence of Magnetite, which can behave as an inert material for zeolite
synthesis while Ca could act as an inhibitor through the formation of calcium silicate. After
pretreatment by acid digestion by 3M HCl, the Si/ Al ratio of the acid slag is about 301.27. To
obtain a lower Si/Al ratio zeolite such as zeolite A will requires the addition of aluminium.
Aluminium hydroxide was added into the acid treated slag for control the Si/Al molar ratio of 1.
Table 1 Chemical composition of slag and zeolite.
Sample
Constituent (%)
Raw Slag
Slag 700
Na2O
0.35
<0.01
9.34
MgO
1.5
<0.01
<0.01
Al2O3,
8.49
0.19
29.43
SiO2
43.57
32.54
55.67
CaO
36.14
22.33
0.11
Fe2O3
5.11
0.13
0.07
Si/Al
8.72
301.27
3.21
Page 665
NaAzeolitestandard
Zeolitesamplefromslag
Fig. 1 XRD patterns NaA zeolite of standard and zeolite sample from slag activated by 3M NaOH
at 105 C for 3 h by conventional heating.
The overall gel of slag starting raw material as 13.75Na2OAl2O32.46 SiO21433.2 H2O. The
zeolites synthesized were Na-A zeolite after 3M NaOH activation at 105oC for 3 h. The Na-A
zeolite appeared and have the cubic shape of Na-A zeolite with a size of about 3-4 m was
observed clearly as shown in Fig.1 and Fig.2.
Fig. 2 XRD patterns of NaA zeolite standard (A) and zeolite sample from slag activated by 3M
NaOH at 105 C for 3h by conventional heating.
Sorption Studies
Effect of the Adsorbent Dosage.
It has been observed that the color removal of Mohom dye increases with increasing adsorbent
dosage.
Page 666
Fig. 3 Effect of adsorbent doze on the percentage color removal of Mohom dye into zeolite.
Fig.3 shows that the percentage color remove of Mohom dye increases with increasing
adsorbent doze (zeolite sample from slag), and remain almost constant after 0.5 g of adsorbent in
100 mL of dye solution. Adding more NaA zeolite results in a little further adsorption. As a result,
the optimum adsorbent doze has been chosen as 0.5 g of adsorbent in 100 mL of dye solution (5
g/L) and this value has been kept constant for all the experiments.
Effect of the contact time
This experiments were carried out to find the optimum time to reach equilibrium. The
experiments were performed against time (2, 6, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 120, 150, 180,
240, 300, 360 and 420 min) at a constant Mohom dye concentration of 20 mg/L and a solid/ liquid
ratio of 0.5% (5 g/L).
Fig. 4 Effect of contact time on the adsorption of Mohom dye into zeolite.
A
Fig 4. shows that the conditioning time increases, the amount of adsorption of Mohom dye into
zeolite increase, and remain almost constant after 120 min of contact time. As a result, the
optimum contact time has been chosen as 120 min. and this value has been kept constant for all the
experiments. Mohom dye has been quickly adsorbed into the porous of zeolite, and slow
adsorption because of the decreasing porous.
Page 667
1 +
Qo
qe
(4)
bQ0Ce
where qe is the amount adsorbate (mg/g), Ce is the equilibrium concentration of the adsorbent
(mg/L), and Q0 and b are the Langmuir constant related to the maximum adsorption capacity and
energy change in adsorption, respectively.
The feasibility of the process is calculated by the dimension less constant separation
factor: R
R
(5)
1
1+ bC0
Where b is the Langmuir constant, Co is the initial concentration. The magnitude of the R valves,
ie, 0<R<1, indicates the favorable adsorption.
Freundlich Isotherm
The adsorption data for Mohom dye is also analyzed by the Freundlich model.
log qe =
log Kf
where qe is the amount adsorbed (mg/g), Ce is the equilibrium concentration of the adsorbate
(mg/L), and Kf and n are Freundlich constant, related to the adsorption capacity and adsorption
intensity, respectively.
Table 2. Constant of the Langmuir and Freundlich.
Langmuir
Freundlich
qe
Adsorbents
(mg/g)
b (L/mg)
R2
Kf
R2
55.1
5.55
0.97
8.47
1.4
0.87
Zeolite A Standard
60.1
5.56
0.97
9.93
1.5
0.86
Page 668
Slag generated in a foundry industry was used as a low-cost adsorbent for the removal of
Mohom dye. Slag was modified by hydrothermal treatment using NaOH solution under various
conditions for zeolite synthesis. The overall gel of slag starting raw material as The overall gel of
slag starting raw material as 13.75 Na2OAl2O32.46 SiO21433.2 H2O. In batch experiments,
parameters studied include the effect of the adsorbent doze and contact time on the color
adsorption. The result showed that the optimum condition of zeolite from slag was 0.5 g of
adsorbent in 100 mL of dye solution and the contact time reached to equilibrium within 120
minute in synthetic wastewater at 20 mg/l by adjust pH of 9. The percentage of basic dyes
removal 99.8%. The adsorption isotherm fitted well with Langmuir equation with the maximum
sorption capacities was 55.1 mg/g of zeolite. These studies reveal that slag can be used for the
effective, efficient and reproducible removal of the reported Mohom dye form wastewater.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
The authors are thankful to the Thailand Institute of Scientific and Technological Research
(TISTR),Thailand, for consistent encouragement and financial support.
Page 669
[9] Asfour, H.M.; Nassar, M. M.; Fadali, O.A. 1985 Color Removal from textile effluents using
Hardwood . Journal chemistry.. Technological. Biotechnology. 35A: 28-36.
[10] Ganesh, R., Boardman, G.D. Michelsen, D. 1994. Fate of azo dyes in sludges. Water
Research. 28: 1367-1379.
[11] Gupta, V.K., Sharma, S. and Sharma, M. 2000. Removal of basic dyes from aqueous using
Baggase Fly ash. Separation Science Technology 35: 2097-2120.
[12] Yoshiyuki, S, . Ryouji S, M, Taichi, N. Takayuki, 2005. Hydrothermal synthesis of zeolite A
using blast furnace slag, ISIJ. Int. 45: 937-945.
[13] Morayama, N., Yamamoto, H., Shibata, J. 2002. Mechanism of zeolite synthesis from coal
fly ash by alkali hydrothermal reaction, Int. J. Mineral. Process. 64: 1-17.
[14] Wajima, T., Haga, H., Kuzaa, , K. Ishimoto, K.and Tamada, O., K. Ito, T. Nishiyama, R.T.
Downs, J. F. Rakovan, Zeolite synthesis from paper sludge ash at low temperature with addition
of diatomite, J. Hazard. Material. B132 (2006) 244-252.
[15] Fernandes N.R.C. -Machado, D.M.M.Miotto. 2005. Synthesis of NaA zeolitew and Xzeolite from oil shale ash, Fuel 84:2289-2294.
[16] Ong, S.T. 2009. The removal of basic and reactive dyes using Quartenised sugar cane
bagasse. Journal of Physical Science 20 (1) 59-74.
Page 670
ABSTRACT
L-Alanine is used as a sweetener agent. To produce L-alanine from glycerol, alanine
dehydrogenase gene (aladh) from Aeromonas hydrophila was cloned into pET-22b vector, namely
pET-22bAlaDH. The recombinant plasmid was expressed in Escherichia coli KR, an E. coli
MB2795 alanine racemase deficiency mutant containing T7 RNA polymerase on its chromosome.
The enzyme specific activity was about 20.8 U/mg protein. The clone produced the maximum Lalanine of 0.027 g/l when it was cultured in minimum medium containing 3 % (v/v) glycerol at 37
C, 250 rpm, for 144 h without IPTG induction. Surprisingly, L-alanine production using glycerol
was 1.4 fold higher than that cultured in 3 % (w/v) glucose at the same condition.
Keywords: L-alanine production, L-alanine dehydrogenase, Escherichia coli, glycerol
INTRODUCTION
L-Alanine is an amino acid which used for food additive as a sweetener agent and
pharmaceutical applications. It can be synthesized from pyruvate by alanine dehydrogenase
(AlaDH, EC 1.4.1.1) (Suye et al., 1992).
Generally, glucose is used as a sole carbon source for L-alanine production. Other carbon
sources have not been reported so far. Glycerol tends to be an alternative carbon source for amino
acid production by E. coli because it is a huge by-product from biodiesel process.
The aim of this study was investigation of L-alanine production using glycerol as a carbon
source by a recombinant E. coli. Previously AlaDH from Aeromonas hydrophila was screened in
our laboratory. The resting cell of recombinant E. coli BL21(DE3) expressing AlaDH of A.
hydrophila could produce L-alanine from pyruvate but the mixture of DL-alanine in a ratio of 3:2
was observed. The mixture of D-alanine caused by the activity of alanine racemase (AlaR) which
isomerized L-alanine to D-alanine, an essential component of peptidoglycan layer in cell wall
(Matsushashi, 1994). AlaR encodes by alr and dadX genes (Galkin et al., 1997). Therefore, E. coli
MB2795, an alanine racemase-deficincy mutant (alr-, dadX-) was selected to use as a host cell in
order to improve high purity of L-alanine.
Page 671
Page 672
Page 673
10,000
3,000
1,000
500
Figure 1 Restriction pattern of pET-22bAlaDH Lane m: 100 bp DNA ladder, Lane 1: pET22bAlaDH digested with EcoRI-HindIII, and Lane 2: PCR product of aladh
Expression of alanine dehydrogenase
Eight transformants of E. coli KR harboring pET-22bAlaDH were randomly picked for
AlaDH activity assay. The results are shown in Table 1. The transformants gave various levels of
AlaDH total activity and specific activity from 816-1,910 U and 12.8-20.8 U/mg protein,
respectively. The protein patterns detected by 12.5 % SDS-PAGE are shown in Figure 2. A
subunit of AlaDH has molecular weight about 38 kDa. The transformant No. 3 which showed the
highest specific activity of 20.8 U/mg protein was chosen for nucleotide sequencing. It displayed
100 % identity with its parent clone.
Table 1 AlaDH activity from crude extract of E. coli KR harboring pET-22bAlaDH
Clone
E. coli BL21(DE3)
harboring pAlaDH
E. coli KR
E. coli KR
harboring pET-22b
Transformant No. 1
Transformant No. 2
Transformant No. 3
Transformant No. 4
Transformant No. 5
Transformant No. 6
Transformant No. 7
Transformant No. 8
Total
Cell wet AlaDH
total activity protein
weight
(mg)
(g)
(U)
AlaDH
specific
activity
(U/mg
protein)
0.88
2300
66.1
34.8
0.92
0.0
77.3
0.0
0.97
0.0
50.4
0.0
0.80
0.73
0.90
0.83
0.77
0.96
0.63
0.69
1180
1250
1910
1570
1150
1590
1250
816
69.5
65.9
91.9
80.1
59.5
91.4
71.4
64.0
17.0
19.0
20.8
19.6
19.3
17.4
17.5
12.8
Page 674
Figure 2 Protein pattern of recombinant E. coli KR harboring pET22bAlaDH induced with 0.4
mM IPTG for 4 h detected by SDS-PAGE Lane M: Protein marker, Lane C: E. coli KR harboring
pET-22b vector, Lane 1-8: E. coli KR harboring pET-22bAlaDH No.1-8
L-Alanine production of E. coli KR harboring pET-22bAlaDH
The effect of IPTG concentration on L-alanine production by E. coli KR harboring pET22bAlaDH in glycerol medium is shown in Figure 3. Without IPTG induction, concentration of Lalanine reached the maximum of 0.027 g/l at 144 h after that it kept constantly. When 0.25, 0.5 and
1.0 mM IPTG was induced, the clone produced 0.024 g/l of L-alanine at 120 h. Cells growth
reached the stationary phase at 120 h at all conditions of IPTG induction and then slightly
decreased. The result showed that E. coli KR harboring pET-22bAlaDH produced the highest
amount of L-alanine (0.027 g/l) when the clone was cultured without IPTG induction for 144 h.
Figure 3 L-Alanine production (solid symbols) and cell growth (open symbols) of E. coli KR
harboring pET-22bAlaDH. Cell was cultured in 200 ml of minimum medium contained 3 % (v/v)
glycerol at 37 C, 250 rpm without IPTG induction (diamonds), induced with 0.25 mM IPTG
(squares), 0.5 mM IPTG (triangles), and 1.0 mM IPTG (circles).
The results of the optimization of IPTG concentration for L-alanine production by E. coli KR
harboring pET-22bAlaDH in glucose medium are shown in Figure 4. The clone produced the
Page 675
Figure 4 L-Alanine production (solid symbols) and cell growth (open symbols) of E. coli KR
harboring pET-22bAlaDH. Cell was cultured in 200 ml of minimum medium contained 3 % (w/w)
glycerol at 37 C, 250 rpm without IPTG induction (asterisks), induced with 0.25 mM IPTG
(squares), 0.5 mM IPTG (triangles), and 1.0 mM IPTG (circles).
named E. coli KR. As the results, AlaDH activity of E. coli KR harboring pETAlaDH (20.8
U/mg protein) was lower than E. coli BL21(DE3) harboring pAlaDH (34. 8 U/mg protein) about
1.7 fold. The pET-22b is a high expression vector (copy number>100) which contained the T7lac
promoter similarly with pRSFDuet-1 vector. The expression levels of E. coli KR harboring pET22b was lower than E. coli BL21(DE3) harboring pAlaDH. That might be caused from the
difference host used. E. coli KR harboring pET-22bAlaDH could produce L-alanine when the
clone was grown in minimum medium containing glycerol or glucose as carbon sources. The clone
growing in glycerol medium produced 1.4 fold of L-alanine higher than that growing in glucose
medium. Cost of glycerol is lower than glucose about 2 fold. Therefore, using glycerol will be an
advantage in industrial scale. Moreover, the results also showed that the clone produced the
maximum of L-alanine when it was cultured without IPTG induction. It will be useful for Lalanine production in a large scale because it did not require any expensive supplement of IPTG.
While using glucose, the clone produced the maximum of L-alanine when it was induced with 0.5
mM IPTG.
Page 676
Page 677
Page 678
Page 679
Page 680
ICP-MS conditions
Reflected power
1550 W
Sampling depth
8 mm
Carrier gas
0.85 L/min
Makeup gas
0.34 L/min
Nebulizer pump
0.08 rps
2 C
RESULTS
Effect of Na2SeO3 Single Addition on Se Accumulation
S. bayanus showed the highest to Se (10 mg/L Na2SeO3) accumulation potential after repeating
the procedure 3 times. Organic Se content was calculated by Se concentration against DCW and
the number of yeast cell/mL (Fig. 1, 2).
Fig. 1 Yeast strains were cultured in 20 mg/L Na2SeO3 and analyzed the incorporated Se
concentration against DCW.
Page 681
Fig. 2 Yeast strains were cultured in 20 mg/L Na2SeO3 and analyzed the incorporated Se
concentration against the number of yeast cell.
S. bayanus cultivated in the media with different concentrations of Se (10, 20, 30, 40, 50 and
60 mg/L). Growth of yeast was inhibited by the presence of Se in medium and
this
inhibition correlated with Se concentration. Increase of Se concentration from 10 to 60 mg/L
diminished specific growth rate from 0.180 to 0.055 h-1 (Fig. 3). Na2SeO3 was added to the liquid
medium immediately after the inoculation of the yeast. The final concentration of Na2SeO3 in each
medium was 10, 20, 30, 40, 50 and
60 mg/L. All experiments were performed in duplicate.
After 48 h, the yeast was harvested and then digested to determine the total Se in the yeast. The
different concentrations of Se added to the yeast were summarized in Fig. 4. The more Se added to
the yeast, the yeast growth was inhibited (Se in cell smaller when increasing the amount of Se
added to the yeast from 10 to 60 mg/L). S. bayanus showed the highest to Se (20 mg/L Na2SeO3)
accumulation potential at 48 h.
Fig. 3 Growth of yeast in the media with different concentrations of Se, mg/L.
Page 682
Page 683
Page 684
Page 685
Page 686